Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit 6788 - Target - Offices
6788 91-354 target 301 strander boulevard Permit 6788 - Target ``p • •N : II - UB DI I• year) 1988 SETBACKS: N- S- E- UTILITY PERMITS REQUIRED? OYes Ea No W- t you c Public Worksl FIRE PROTECTION: ®Sprinklers © Detectors 0 N/A ZONING: BAR /LAND USE CONDITIONS? GE) Yes 0 No CONDITIONS (other than those noted on or attached to permit/plans) WA. ST. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE # WGCLAC *370N0 EXP. DATE 6 - 01 - 92 ARCHITECT A. F. Ritter Architect PHONE 612- 339 -0313 ADDRESS 120 First Avenue North, Minneapolis, MN PR•P `�� • E• Target Stores PH•N 612 -370 -8910 ADDRESS 33 South Sixth Street, P.O. Box 1392, Minneapolis, MN ZIP 55440 CONTRACTOR W. G. Clark Construction Co. PHONE 624 - 5244 ADDRESS 408 Aurora Avenue North, Seattle, WA ZIP 98109 WA. ST. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE # WGCLAC *370N0 EXP. DATE 6 - 01 - 92 ARCHITECT A. F. Ritter Architect PHONE 612- 339 -0313 ADDRESS 120 First Avenue North, Minneapolis, MN ZIP 55401 BUILDIIfl PERMIT CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 BUILDING PERMIT NO. (J2 1S: DATE ISSUED: SITE ADDRESS PROJECT NAME/TENANT Target TYPE OF 0 New Building I Addition WORK: 0 Rack Storage . O Reroof DESCRIBE WORK TO BE DONE: Construct interior TO' APPROVED FOR ISSUANCE BY: I hereby certify that I h.. le re and ordinances goy: ping th' does not preps e • give a constructina :`perform A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY NO. 301 Strander B1 (POST WITH INSPECTION CARD AND PLANS IN A CONSPICUOUS LOCATION) DESCRIPTION AMOUNT RCPT # DATE BUILDING :PERMIT FEE;: PLAN CHECK FED 530.00 T582 . 8.'22: 9 Y.' • BUILDING :SURCHARGE;< OTHER: TOTAL 349 50< PLAN CHECK NO.: 91 -354 . ;:PROJECT : INFORMATION • S # 1 VALUE OF CONSTRUCTION - $ 150, 000.00 ASSESSOR ACCOUNT# 262304- 9005 -05 Tenant Improvement (commercial) Demolition (building) U Grading/Fill O Remodel (residential) O Other: offices inside existing store. USE. - FLOOR SQUARE OCC. SQUARE OCC. SQUARE OCC. FEET LOAD FEET LOAD FEET LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC. SQUARE OCC. TOTAL LOAD FEET LOAD SQUARE FEET TOTAL OCC, LOAD BUILDING OFFICIAL StGNA and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of lay ork will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit r , to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating o, work. I am aut •rized to sign for and obtain this building permit. DATE: PRINT NAME: t4- Thrs`permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced wrthm 180 d ays:from he date a. issuance, or if the work is•suspended orabandoned for • a` period of 180 days from the last:inspection, COMPANY: W co. CL au ..-C . Cp DATE ISSUED: DATE: BUILDING( ?ERMIT APPLICATION TRACKING PLAN CHECK NUMBER 91- DE PARTME I BUILDING - initial review 2:) FIRE .PANING 9 O PUBLIC WORKS O OTHER 04 BUILDING - final review REVIEW COMPLETED PERMIT NO. DATE READY PERMIT EXPIRES AMOUNT OWING PROJECT NAME SITE ADDRESS INSTRUCTIONS TO STAFF • Contacts with applicants or requests for information should be summarized in writing by staff so that any time the status of the project may be ascertained. • Plan corrections shall be completed and approved prior to sending on to the next department. e Any conditions or requirements for the permit shall be noted on the plans or summarized concisely in the form of a formal letter or memo, which will be attached to the permit. ® Please fill out your section of the tracking chart completely. Where information requested is not applicable, so note by using "N /A ". BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE/OCCUPANCY INFORMATION (to be filled out by Plan Checker) FLOOR: TOTAL .............. ................. SQUARE OCC. FEET LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD SQUARE FEET OCC. LOAD SQUARE OCC. FEET LOAD TOTAL SQUARE FEET DEPARTMENTAL REVIEW "X" in box indicates which departments need to review the project. • I /VA �1 - -mot I Q� INIT: INIT: 9 - 3 - 91 .! (ROUTED INIT: Tory -12fi 30 I - 5 - t'rc-nd.eY F31 SUITE NO. CONSULTANT: ZONING: TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: N )6 CONTACTED DATE NOTIFIED 2nd NOTIFICATION 3RD NOTIFICATION EQ UIREME N Date Sent - ME Nk1 Date Approved - Sprinklers ( Detectors O N/A c ' FIRE PROTECTION: FIRE DEPT. LETTER DATED: ' c/(5/41 INSPECTOR: BAR/LAND USE ONDITIONS? REFERENCE FILE NOS.: ire Z` e, q�j,ffe er MINIMUM SETBACKS: N- S- TOTAL OCC LOAD UTILITY PERMITS REQUIRED? [] Yes No PUBLIC WORKS LETTER DATED: UBC EDITION (year): ig88 Lt (� 1 � 1 : "l J a� a l 1 (init.) BY: (init.) BY: knit.) Keith Barrow Business Development 408 Aurora Avenue North. Seattle, WA 98109 (2(6) 624.5241 FAX 682.7126 CITY OF TUKWILA Department of Community Development - Building Division 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 APPLICATION :MUST BE FILLED OUT COMPLE.TEL Y SITE ADDRESS I - 6 "r'RAN l.t'DE2.. T°a t -V V 'r4.4 14-WIt e _BB,,, �I4 /.t�. } 9 j1.0E2 PROJECT NAME/TENANT iNrrr.,12. o NAvez aVa!✓.twi r4 - 71424e Sa u-r t-- c ei.r e TYPE OF U New Building U Addition 1410 Tenant improvement (commercial) U Demolition (building) WORK: 0 Rack Storage 0 Reroof ❑ Remodel (residential) 0 Other 2rTEtz.1a, 11.AP2DVe n.jeka DESCRIBE WORK TO BE DONE: L..r ,5 cAc-r 0 nzairt . carkl e.l✓.S c (.4.5 BUILDING USE (office, warehouse, etc.) 'eery 1 NATURE OF BUSINESS: , c L.... WILL THERE BE A CHANGE IN USE? ® No 0 Yes If Yes, new building requirements may need to be met. Please explain: SQUARE FOOTAGE - Building: I 16, I j) Tenant Space: Area of Construction: 41 -Ls WILL THERE BE STORAGE OR USE OF FLAMMABLE, COMBUSTIBLE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS IN THE BUILDING? No 0 Yes IF YES, EXPLAIN: PROPERTY OWNER -. . Si t ADDRESS 3� rn ( ;r± r TtEe T' 0 . t X 1''..�9'�. - t�1 5. i i - ir4 4 ZIP �544 D CONTRACTOR - PHON •6) ADDRESS ZIP 4bQ, AL-ti �a , v c. . rue) •56.4.r vve,sw 43% o, WA. ST. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE # WG CL AC *370No E DATE 6/1/92 ARCHITECT � l� A. r 'I�rrre,fZ. 4. gz - � 1 rrt T ADDRESS �o BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZED AGENT DATE APPLICATION ACCEPTED SUITE # CONTACT PERSON •�-4. 15 4 6 12.0 NA 4 , 4 BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION �]*t 'i ; I!] :II I XL •u UILDING :PERMIT FEE' PLAN : >C HECK`.FEE; >; > : BUILD!NGSURCHARG OTHER: !:' TOTAL ;: "WW2 VALUE OF CONSTRUCTION - $ * 1vra,000 15o, oat.) 6¢ ) ASSESSOR ACCOUNT # 2,62.30 9 DU�J " oS PHON PHON O .. >KNO TH1 Ai►u ..: > >: > :. `,: < >> A .:::. S�' A�AN�!'> 1w. 7�A11AlI�t. EO: 11�iS> �► �! P> l: t!` F)...: N .............................. ................... .::.:: C�JrRREOT .. I1N1�:> :1 >:: Ai�.;�►E�lf�;al�E>al »'�E�: ��! P! .............................. ............................... . SIGNATURE ', DATE ;7 , , l_74-4-4� 4n. g3 . / / PRINT NAME•12v,131,,, 4 4,:l3zt_i t.."1..al\.1 PHON 45_74).... t 1h ADDRESS CITY/ZIP - 5,. . ' 5-r6z, 1--el 4 Kl ail9e.)4 --►S 14 -.01. 54'�"� APPLICATION SUBMITTAL In order to ensure that your application is accepted for plan review, please make sure to fill out the application completely and follow the plan submittal checklist on the reverse side of this form. Handouts are available at the Building counter which provide more detailed information on application and plan submittal requirements. Application and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. VALUATION OF CONSTRUCTION Valuation for new construction and additions are calculated by the Department of Community Development prior to application submittal. Contact the Permit Coordinator at 431-3670 prior to submitting application. In all cases, a valuation amount shoed be entered by the applicant. This figure wIil be reviewed ana is subject to possible revision by the Building Division to comply with current fee schedules. BUILDING OWNER / AUTHORIZED AGENT If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect/engineer, or contractor licensed by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property owner authorizing the agent to submit this permit application and obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal. EXPIRATION OF PLAN REVIEW Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitations. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 304(d) of the Uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. If you have any questions about our process or plan submittal requirements, please contact the Department of Community Development Building Division at 431 -3670. DATE APPLICATION EXPIRES 6i2)) 37 - AS L c _PHO, 1Z) 51S ZIP, 4-b COMMERCIAL,. ... • .. .. . , . P ... completed buidirio �Otif appilcatlon (one for each • • • bu Assessor Accoun Number Two (2) sets of consttucUon plans, whIch inclu . . . . . S5:110 by 'if washinite6Ptate . •• •,..„:.: •::..• : . . . . . .. D . Energy calculations stamped 01f a Washington State licensed ................................................................ • . • •"•• " .• • •••• •• •.• ::••• ••• • •••• :•••• • • • • Legal deactiption r Washington ' • .. . Arthltocturnl d Suctural drawings Mechanical • dra ..... • Landscape plan ... .:CoinPleted:Otilibi'perinkapPliCrolOk(Cinkfrk'entire::Pfo SIx (8) sets of civil drawings . . ivid.:aireCk • •••••■••., Completed building permit application fl Assessor Account Number ............. ............. . ... " . • . .......... . NOTE1 r:(re* 4tcri!!0e ne kide dimens and Pfri!Oh#4 'OW stamped license engini3e .„: :,• • . • RESIDENTIAL NEW SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLINGS/ADDITONS Completed building permit applicatio -• • • •• :••• JAtisciasor4tircoont, tietti;(2),OI the *0.000 one:: • : 1" • „,.. Washington State licensed ••• . • .• . • • 'SP ARCHITECTS LTD. SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST AuG 2, 1991 Washington State Energy Code data 001 Exit doors Dimensions of ati elates ........ ... •••• exits • • • . .• .,••• • of racks (height. width and length), ilales xft veys on plan • ... 1:„:.::•:::„:„,.:„..:::..:.„::::.::.„,::::::,..,::::::,:„:,: Legal description :: . . .• . .• - ... .::::::' ::::::::::::::.::::::::::::::,:::,,:::::::::•,,,,,,,. - A060aor Account ! .. ..il t• • • •:... Two se pc2 ::',.:•,•::-4irici. n',4! vngs , yih •••: t . t. , a . :. .. inc 1: Yttati:::... iwitttort : 4,,;filuvir19 ::Fi 777...: .,.:. Site 'Roof plan ari _!._) r !:1:!:!..7.7.!•H :: i:•. . ,, ...• ..,:. q ,:: :11 ... .,IcphYre axon ro ,7010 itt: : .,..wii,.....1.1.... i....!,....!"onotht):10i,....:01....:.17, f.i.:!:::::,.: it., ,t:,,:.,............. . Building 'elevations (all views) :8Butivild6itungraietefrosms-isrg plans .-......::::•:::•„•....... '' , . .., :,,.........„ ....,..,,,:i„. . ..,,, ,„. f_i Co mp lete d • • .'•., l'itiltytenr permit ap plication ,. •:,. ..•::.::::.'...iie,.:s:,':::......:.::::::••••••::::::-..•':- . i 1 .:77-',7 le.! .. • • ;•",:iti;.ins sho'!'4)1 ... .:.• .•••.: • 1;lication:•::::.i..::::::*,'..:::::::.:::::::,, ,1.66i. (6) etsc4 • • ! :''''' ..:• ,• • :•. : •: '" i ;t/tit y :• • • • site plan may combined. . • ,•:,, • Bu ilding site plan NOT:•: Pu II . ,.... Info may be rqqvuum, 1. for spa .........::,,......:.•.•::,:.: _, 1 .,,.if.t11"11q utility perm application ,.....:. . . . : .. .. ,,•••• •,;:„..4.ind soils. •••• , A iiciiii4 to136qi•ifirlid. '':' ,,. • _itico conditions. : • s ite 1wini° . . : • • . . ..............: . •:....•.„ ........„.....:.........„...„.... ta.nant,,s :e4d PO.. oio - t! - 'a .• ::..:::: . ,::: - :•;.:' :: ',:'„::::..::::.::.:.:.. : ..,.. : . : . "'" '. • EJ(Iiidnija051:ProPo • • •• ijaibioli;...:..66/‘ii,,Ito O! . "..•.;.,....,...-:•••:•:::•::.::::....,..,..,.......,•:,,............,,,•:::•......,::.:::::•;:,.....,.......••••", .....,....:••••::::::.,•;:•:::::.::::::,,... . :,..'::::::,,•....:: ••••-•:".•-••. ,.. • Laiii.d4t(400::Oarijii:?:'1:-.'''''''''''' l'::..:;,:::::'•;.':::<-•'''::••''''''''''"•:'::::':': . ''': . '•::.: . ::::.:.."' " •........•• .,..........,........••.......„ •• . .•••••• ••••••••• •• . • ......• • .......,.........,:„....„:„:„:„ i • ...• ••,:••••••"-.••••••.,...- • •-• •• •• • .. bu ilding Filan''..,i',,,:,,i::',:i:::,:::,i,„::•:::?a-:.:.•?:,,•::-.:,..-.... •::'ti:iiiiiii6Oatic'6 ''•'•••::''.ft•i'::.•ii: ‘'.::1-:.......•••••:. lF1:°9'...:.:.:::;:..r:,...'::'•'.!:::i.°iI°4.6.1:7:::4 :t:'.°:pa.P'q...7114961t:1•!111;:);h...9:1ttoille.:!c7:P:.:..'•':.')1:9.::::?:1q;:ii1ed.....:..:.:....:. ... - : . .... ' .... iii`E*"111-'"''''''''''''''':.?':":::1i - - eh la „.. ... . . •:- .. .':''' • :.•: .••••. ,.:.....,.„:„:re'01.'4,(Palr91Pi.9V.:.:,:...:;;;;.....,..:'..:..•::',.....':':'.::::::::::.:,::::::::.:. t. '..itEdoorsiqgrei. • :ynill;:.;iiO4'.,tr,!: ........:.,:....::„..,....... dem olished . ...'::::. '... - :•••:''''..illat411B :::-:'''a:':::':;:.::::':::::„.:::::',.-....:•:-,:,: :::.......,,:':•'.....C:::::,:rs,:::;';)::::',i, iiii1„::76ii:„..7..6""'.„.:!,:.::',:,..';',....,,,,k1.,:s.,.'''':s40n:.ht1'::...:'1:'';:: wall ::::::•.01,1"::,..':..:i.:...:',:a7.717::,.,„!'i;,,.!,n,..:1,,g.,...,';',',,::7;,. 6;),'7;2::s,.se,:::)„...,:..-,:./..•:, t i • - -..:':iiiia0Y:',a;.wo-.. itolk:.to,....:..1!. •::::i ..- •- ''• °1 • 1q •••:•••••••: ,,, ••:::: ,, :'•:•' . : . '"::'''":::' . * :••/* i=>' ,...7 : ?........., .....=::•„:::::::•:.:.:.....,..,......•,- -- •• ' ...:: ...... -...:::::::::::.:,.......:..:..... ,... . REI100F Narrative describing existing roof material being removed, and NOTE A certification loller Ia required pnor to final Inspection and sign ::••• off of the permit ..•■•••••• • • .• Two (2)::*06:'.0i.planti:.Wtjlph include Site Plan (showing building and Ioat1on of antenna/sa dish), state titensod • • • • RE! ....................... ::Completed Ntlthect permit application (one for each structure) • ••'••• : • • • Assessor Account Number . • Tqa sets„ • • • • 5410 plan • Foundation plan Floorplan $ Building cross • . • • • . . • • - ...•:•:■.61ruCtutal framing plans NOTE If ;„ • .•• ,..• any utility work Is to be done 0:0V100 utility permit application and plan • • . • , • . . : .. . . .. „.. „ ..„. REHOOF$ Completed builc$0* permit application (one for each structure) • .....„.• Assessor : • . Narrative describing existing roof being removed, and I' ..::: material being InStalloct;' . . . • ... • " " , .: • : •.„ :..„.• „ „ : . . .• „ .„ NOTE: A coal fiCittien !titter Is prio final Inspection and sign off of the permit..: • : • • • T November 25, 1991 Cert No. 9110 -33 Dear Mr. Larson: Dennis H. Stack President DHS:lal tr) City of Tukwila Building Department 6230 Southcenter Boulevard Tukwila, Washington 98188 Attention: Dave Larson Reference: Target Store Addition 301 Strander Boulevard Permit No. 6788 [ NOV 2 71991 PLANNING DEPT CASCADE TESTING LABORATORY, INC. TESTING & INSPECTION / ENGINEERS / GEOLOGISTS 12919 N.E., 128TH PLACE KIRKLAND: (206) 623 -9800 KIRKLAND, WASHINGTON 06034 FAX: (208) 823 -2203 SEATTLE: (206) 525 -8700 EVERETT: (2081259-0E117 This is to advise you that special inspections are completed for the above referenced project. Special inspections were performed for the following activities and copies of reports have been sent to you. 1. Reinforced concrete for sidewalk and handicapped ramp 2 Visual welding inspection on roof hatch All work inspected conformed to Tukwila Building and Land Development approved plans, specifications Director's Rules, SBC and related codes and /or verbal or written instructions from the Engineer of Record. Our last report is dated 10 -18 -91 and is number 73315. Respectfully, CASCApE TESTING LABORAT•' INC. 'ro ect: ype o nspect , ; t ; t . 14.. . 6„5„ 7- I"' JU Address; � n {� qat� Called: ___- - Special Instructions: Date Wanted: /..... � 13 -121n�/m � < Requester: err '` r , ,,.,, , s, .�, Phone go.: ,e''7 244( COMMENTS: nspector; $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100' Call to.schedule reinspection: 0. Approved per applicable codes. VeVt'r T. xr. �trr .# y.' u' t�.+ at,-- �+• *.r INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (07tv PERMIT N0. 206)_431 -3670 ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. roe ype o nspection: / Address: Uf Date Called: /r Special Instructions; Date Wanted: / ' 6 .. 5 . m. .m. Requester: t s Phone / PIZ INSPECTION RECRRD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 ;7 R R O. (206) 431 -3670 C] Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: ffr Corrections required prior to approval. Kept No.: •"rr C.1> N 44. r1- vl s C5 ,`�- - t J 1 1.r '• t 1 • t - t .::> .f.' - 1■ b K. . nspector .-( . ` gate Ir c ❑ $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100.. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: Project Type of Inspectio : Address: ` 75 Q `s: Ck. Date Called: I' _ . r r 1 Special Inslru Date Wanted: R ' 10 q iam. Requester: Phone No.: L 4 1,2 - «.w.w wow,.... ,a.:...,.- cr...,.....,, CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT N0. (206) 431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: [� $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. ; Call, to schedule reinspection. )i; t o.: ress. Special Instructions: ro e� COMMENTS:. Inspector: ! INSPECTION . RECORD Retain a, copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd,, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 A ype o ns Date Called: to , Dale Wanted: . b -- z,s" ell a.m. Requester: F Phone No.: Approved per applicable cod : : .C]__COrreCOrrs _required prior to approval. PERMIT NO/ 20. 431 -3670 ©: $30. REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED: Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at '6300 Southcenter Blvd.; Suite' 100: Call to schedule reinspection. .m. "re act: . ,, % s r ,,,,,..6 peci Instructions: " - I 1/ . Date Wanted 10 0/ 4-4 1 ( a p.m. R ste Dw4cL1A Phone No. COMMENTS: Receipt 167 INSPECTION RECORD Retain .a copy with permit 0. .. CITY: OF:TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Suthcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 0 Approved per applicable codes. g Corrections required prior to approval. 0 $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Irat PROJECT: � al - PERMIT NO. / • . .�� SITE ADDRESS: 0 17,), ,( DATE CALLED: 0 -- - 9 I TYPE OF INSPECTION: M I�j DA TE WANTED: /, - / r7- CIO' ..m. SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: I REQUESTER: S OS S PHONE NO.: 575- i 40 INSPECTION RESULTS /COMMENTS: t 1 . - i )r L +W'� ' �!�!! • t� L L� INSPECTOR: �: �52.--' DATE: / p -1 telPFsi },V.1 CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division Phone: (206) 431 -3670 I to" INSPECTION RECORD 1 t ^.• iiCV RG:: ?:� - �.'k! 6300 Southcenter Boulevard - #100 Tukwila Washington 98188 PROJECT: t.....r PERMIT NO. SITE ADDRESS: - 71 . t,..) • tera.A,r DATE CALLED: I -- at) - - c TYPE OF INSPECTION: DATE WANTED: SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: ' .A.. , . . REQUESTER: ...... 3: BO PHONE NO.: ¶'f (4 S3 77 INSPECTION RESULTS/COMMENTS: --- 11 ii -1 Ja-- StA IA • getiS,2 ala IL- X-9-0(- . / i ( . ,..... •' 1 g -Len - r-L. * • . ' . rS "1%_. ,k1nrct.-u..1 _ • . . _ , 111,..-6. I •■..... ,••....—: ..e f 7 "-- • INSPECTOR: 411 DATE: ( I 0- ' T / CITY OF TUKWILA Dept. of Community Development - Building Division Phone: (206) 431-3670 • , . INSPECTIO4 RECORD 6300 Southcenter Boulevard — #100 Tukwila Washington 98188 Project Name Address Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: City of Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 -7661 (206) 575 -4404 TUKWILA FIRE . DEPARTMENT `FINAL APPROVAL FORM Retain current inspection schedule Needs shift inspection Gary.L:. VanDusen, Mayor Control No. Permit No. Suite Approved without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued PHONE CALL FROM NICK OLIVAS. TARGET: STORE MGMT. :REQUESTED, A SEPARTATE ADDRESS FOR.THE.TARGET STORE SOUTHCENTER SPOKE REGION DISTRICT OFFICES. NICK WOULD NOT GIVE SEPARATE ADDRESS BUT WOULD GIVE: THESE. OFFICE A SUITE NUMBER.. THE NEW ADDRESS • IS NOW 301 STRANDER,,SUITE 107 PERMIT FILE # 6788 DATE:. October '21i 1991 SUBJECT: PHONE CONVERSATION WITH ROBB GRUMAN , 110B19 CALLED TO INFORM BUILDING OF CHANGES TO'APPROVED DELETE DOOR 110 -A. 2. DELETE OFFICES 121,122, &.123 CHECKED FILE, EXITING REMAINS O.K. IF DOOR 110 -A IS DELETED. THE REMOVAL OF PRIVATE OFFICES 121,122 & 123 WILL NOT EFFECT EXITING. THE. FRAMING INSPECTION AND ELECTRICAL. R.I. HAS BEEN INSPECTED. AND APPROVED. I TOLD ROBB TO. HAVE ARCHITECT SUBMIT. A REVISED. PLAN FOR THE RECORD, PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION, SO THAT AN APPROVED PLAN WOULD BE ON SITE AT THIS TIME CITY OF TUKWILA 6200 SOUTIICENTI(R BOULEVARD, TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 Plan Check #91 -354: Target 301 Strander Bi PHONE N (206) 433.1800 THE FOLLOWING COMMENTS APPLY TO AND BECOME ? T �F THE APPROVED PLANS UNDER TUKWILA BUILDING PERMIT NUMBER l� 1. No changes will be made to the plans unless approved by the Architect and the Tukwila Building Division. 2. Plumbing permit shall be obtained through the King County Health Department and plumbing will be inspected by that agency, including all gas piping (296- 4732). 3. Electrical permit shall be obtained through the Washington State Division of Labor and Industries and all electrical work will be inspected by that agency (872- 6363). 4. All mechanical work shall be under separate permit through the City of Tukwila. 5. All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be posted at the job site prior to the start of any construction. 6. Any new ceiling grid and light fixture installation is required to meet lateral bracing requirements for Seismic Zone 3. 7. Partition walls attached to ceiling grid must be laterally braced if over eight (8) feet in length. 8. Any exposed insulations backing material to have Flame Spread Rating of 25 or less, and material shall bear identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. 9. All construction to be done in conformance with approved plans and requirements of the Uniform Building Code (1988 Edition), Uniform Mechanical Code (1988 Edition), Washington State Energy Code (1991 Edition), and Washington State Regulations for Barrier Free Facility (1989 Edition). 10. Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. Cary L. VanDusen, Mayor Target Page 2 1 . Validity of Permit. The issuance of a. permit or approval of plans, specifications and computations shall not be construed to be a permit for, • or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of this code or of any other ordinance of the jurisdiction. No permit presuming to give authority or violate or cancel the provisions of this code shall be valid. "X" REQUIRED INSPECTIONS PHONE DATE APPROVED INSPECT. INITIALS DATE(S) CORRECTION NOTICE ISSUED 1 Footings 431 -3670 2 Foundation 431 -3670 3 Slab and/or Slab Insulation 431 -3670 4 Shear Wall Nailing 431 -3670 5 Roof Sheathing Nailing 431 -3670 6 Masonry Chimney 431 -3670 I I R 7 Framing 431 -3670 8 Insulation 431 -3670 X 9 Suspended Ceiling 431 -3670 X 10 Wall Board Fastening 431 -3670 11 12 13 X 14 FIRE FINAL Insp: 575 -4407 15 PLANNING FINAL 431 -3670 16 PUBLIC WORKS FINAL 431 -3670 X 17 BUILDING FINAL 431 -3670 CITY OF TUKWILA Department of Community Development - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 SITE ADDRESS: 301 Strander B1 BUILDIrG PERMIT INSPECTION RECORD (Post with Building Permit in conspicuous place) SUITE NO.: BUILDING (i-AS PERMIT NO. DATE ISSUED: q -a3 -a I PROJECT: Target CALL FOR INSPECTIONS AT LEAST 24 HOURS IN ADVANCE (INSPECTOR COMMENT SECTION ON REVERSE INSPECTION PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS All approved plans and permits shall be maintained available on the site in the same location. 1. FOOTING - When survey stakes and forms are set and rebar is tied in place. 2. FOUNDATION - When forms and rebar are in place. 3. SLAB - If structural slab or If underslab insulation is required. 4. SHEARWALL NAILING - Prior to cover. 5. ROOF SHEATHING NAILING - Prior to cover. 6. MASONRY CHIMNEY - Approximately midpoint. 7. FRAMING - After rough -in inspections such as mechanical, plumbing, gas piping, electrical and fire stopping is in place. 8. INSULATION - After framing approval, but before installation of wallboard. Baffles must be installed to keep attic ventilation points clear. 9. SUSPENDED CEILING - Fasten diffusers, lights and seismic bracing. 10. WALL BOARD FASTENING - Prior to taping (see UBC Chap. 47 and Table 47G). 11. 12. 13. 14. FINAL FIRE INSPECTION - Contact Fire Department for their requirements. 15. FINAL PLANNING INSPECTION - Contact Planning Department for their requirements. 16. FINAL PUBLIC WORKS INSPECTION - Contact Public Works Department for their requirements. 17. FINAL BUILDING INSPECTION - When all work, corrections, reports and other inspections are complete. OTHER AGENCIES: Plumbing (including gas piping) — King County Health Department -- 296 -4732 Electrical — Washington State Department of Labor and Industries — 277 -7272 A preconstruction meeting with the Building Inspector may be scheduled prior to starting the job by contacting the Department of Community Development, Building Division at 431 -3670. Although not required, a meeting of this type can often eliminate problems, delays and misunderstandings as the project progresses. 00,1,E Plan Check No.: 9 REQUIRED INSPECTIONS PLAN REVIEW COMME(S-dS 0 All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be posted at the job site prior to the start of any construction. 6. When special inspection is required, either the owner, architect or engineer shall notify the Tukwila Building Division of appointment of the inspection agencies prior to the first building inspection. Copies of all special inspection reports shall be submitted to the Building Division in a timely manner. Reports shall contain address, project name and permit number of the project being inspected. 7. All structural concrete to be special inspected (Sec. 306, UBC). 8. All structural welding to be done by W.A.B.O. certified welder and special inspected (Sec. 306, UBC). 9. All high - strength bolting to be special inspected (Sec. 306, UBC). 0 Any new ceiling grid and light fixture installation is required to meet lateral bracing requirements for Seismic Zone 3. Partition walls attached to ceiling grid must be laterally braced if over eight (8) feet in length. 12. Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment is required. 13. Engineered truss drawings and calculations shall be on site and available to the building inspector for inspection purposes. Documents shall bear the seal and signature of a Washington State Professional Engineer. Any exposed insulations backing material to have Flame Spread Rating of 25 or less, and material shall bear Identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. 15. Subgrade preparation including drainage, excavation, compaction, and fill requirements shall conform strictly with recommendations given in the soils report prior to final inspection (see attached procedure). 16. A statement from the roofing contractor verifying fire retardancy of roof will be required prior to final inspection (see attached procedure). All construction to be done in conformance with approved plans and requirements of the Uniform Building Code (1988 Edition), Uniform Mechanical Code (1988 Edition), Washington State Energy Code (1990 Edition), and Washington State Regulations for Barrier Free Facility (1990 Edition). 18. All food preparation establishments must have King County Health Department sign -off prior to opening or doing any food processing. Arrangements for final Health Department inspection should be made by calling King County Health Department, 296 -4787, at least three working days prior to desired inspection date. On work requiring Health Department approval, it is the contractor's responsibility to have a set of plans approved by that agency on the job site. 19. Fire retardant treated wood shall have a flame spread of not over 25. All materials shall bear identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. Such identification shall be issued by an approved agency having a service for inspection at the factory. Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 21. All spray applied fireproofing, as required by U.B.C. Standard No. 43 -8, shall be special inspected. 22. All wood to remain in placed concrete shall be treated wood. 23. All structural masonry shall be special inspected per U.B.C. Section 306 (a) 7. Validity of Permit. The issuance of a permit or approval of plans, specifications and computations shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of this code or of any other ordinance of the jurisdiction. No permit presuming to give authority or violate or cancel the provisions of this code shall be valid. 25. A Certificate of Occupancy will be required for this permit. Project: o-r Cr No changes will be made to the plans unless approved by the Architect and the Tukwila Building Division. Plumbing permit shall be obtained through the King County Health Department and plumbing will be inspected by that agency, including all gas piping (296- 4722). Electrical permit shall be obtained through the Washington State Division of Labor and Industries, and all electrical work will be Inspected by that agency (277- 7272). All mechanical work shall be under separate permit through the City of Tukwila. 1. Footings 2. Foundation 3. Slab /Slab insulation 4. Shear Wall Nailing 5. Roof Sheathing Nailing 6. Masonry Chimney ><, 7. Framing 8. Insulation 9. Suspended Ceiling 10. Wall Board Fastening 11. 12. 13. X 14. Fire Final 15. Planning Final 16. Public Works Final X 17. Building Final Plan Check No.: 9 REQUIRED INSPECTIONS PLAN REVIEW COMME(S-dS 0 All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be posted at the job site prior to the start of any construction. 6. When special inspection is required, either the owner, architect or engineer shall notify the Tukwila Building Division of appointment of the inspection agencies prior to the first building inspection. Copies of all special inspection reports shall be submitted to the Building Division in a timely manner. Reports shall contain address, project name and permit number of the project being inspected. 7. All structural concrete to be special inspected (Sec. 306, UBC). 8. All structural welding to be done by W.A.B.O. certified welder and special inspected (Sec. 306, UBC). 9. All high - strength bolting to be special inspected (Sec. 306, UBC). 0 Any new ceiling grid and light fixture installation is required to meet lateral bracing requirements for Seismic Zone 3. Partition walls attached to ceiling grid must be laterally braced if over eight (8) feet in length. 12. Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment is required. 13. Engineered truss drawings and calculations shall be on site and available to the building inspector for inspection purposes. Documents shall bear the seal and signature of a Washington State Professional Engineer. Any exposed insulations backing material to have Flame Spread Rating of 25 or less, and material shall bear Identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. 15. Subgrade preparation including drainage, excavation, compaction, and fill requirements shall conform strictly with recommendations given in the soils report prior to final inspection (see attached procedure). 16. A statement from the roofing contractor verifying fire retardancy of roof will be required prior to final inspection (see attached procedure). All construction to be done in conformance with approved plans and requirements of the Uniform Building Code (1988 Edition), Uniform Mechanical Code (1988 Edition), Washington State Energy Code (1990 Edition), and Washington State Regulations for Barrier Free Facility (1990 Edition). 18. All food preparation establishments must have King County Health Department sign -off prior to opening or doing any food processing. Arrangements for final Health Department inspection should be made by calling King County Health Department, 296 -4787, at least three working days prior to desired inspection date. On work requiring Health Department approval, it is the contractor's responsibility to have a set of plans approved by that agency on the job site. 19. Fire retardant treated wood shall have a flame spread of not over 25. All materials shall bear identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. Such identification shall be issued by an approved agency having a service for inspection at the factory. Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 21. All spray applied fireproofing, as required by U.B.C. Standard No. 43 -8, shall be special inspected. 22. All wood to remain in placed concrete shall be treated wood. 23. All structural masonry shall be special inspected per U.B.C. Section 306 (a) 7. Validity of Permit. The issuance of a permit or approval of plans, specifications and computations shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of this code or of any other ordinance of the jurisdiction. No permit presuming to give authority or violate or cancel the provisions of this code shall be valid. 25. A Certificate of Occupancy will be required for this permit. Project: o-r Cr No changes will be made to the plans unless approved by the Architect and the Tukwila Building Division. Plumbing permit shall be obtained through the King County Health Department and plumbing will be inspected by that agency, including all gas piping (296- 4722). Electrical permit shall be obtained through the Washington State Division of Labor and Industries, and all electrical work will be Inspected by that agency (277- 7272). All mechanical work shall be under separate permit through the City of Tukwila. TARGET PURCHASING CC21 TEL No.612 -335 -5158 C * * REVISION SUBMITTAL DATE .r agPT 1D, 19q CITY OF TUKWILA 6300 SOUTHCENTER BOULEVARD TUKWILA, WA 98188 S PERMIT NUMBER — (If previously issued) PLAN CHECK NUMBER 91-S64 Sep 3,91 10:16 No.011 P.04 c PROJECT NAME .5OUTHCENTER. (TARG SPOKE REGLON 0)6r. OFFICE_ ADDRESS O. CONTACT PERSON _goal. C?JZLIMAr4 — PHONE 612-370- b 6 1 1 0 ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER _ F1 i~ .R ArRCH f TESTS TYPE OF REVISION: Pt REVIEW Comm ENT RES R,NS SHEET NUMBER(S) "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revisions and date revisions. SUBMITTED TO: Q1,M T E,E NEDIGTO RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP111991 PERMIT CENTER Alexander F. Ritter Architect MEMORANDUM COMM.NO.: CLIENT: PROJECT: SUBJECT: MEMO BY: DATE: Attention: 9092.901.92 Target Stores Southcenter SR/DO, Tukwila, Plan Review Respon a 91 -354 Mario Racelis �� 10 September 1991 Robert Benedicto RECEIVED CITY OF TIIKWILA SEP 1 1 1991 PERMIT CENTER Copy: Robb Gruman Steve Fautsch WA File 4 The following is an item by item response to the plan review dated 27 August 1991. 1. GENERAL. Provide a site plan which will show parking dedicated to the proposed office space. This plan should show that the proposed stairs and railings for the new entry, will not encroach into the required access drive. General Code information is required on the plans. Notes should include but is not limited to Code Edition, Type of construction, Occupancy group, area of construction, etc. Response: Based on our conversation with you, the Owner will be submitting a letter to you providing the required information regarding parking counts required by code and existing parking for the Target parcel. The plans have been revised showing dimensions of the access drive relative to the stair landing. The plans have been revised to include the general code information and project data. 2. EXITING. Corridor 117 is required to provide one hour fire rated construction per U.B.C. Sec. 3305 (g). Consequently, all openings including the access to this egress path must be protected as prescribed in U.B.C. Sec. 3305 (h). Provide details to show how this will be accomplished. Note: pair of doors which lead from corridor 117 to existing exit corridor must be provided with hardware that will comply with Washington State Barrier Free requirements and the provisions of U.B.C. Sec. 3304 (c). Plans do not indicate what type of operating hardware exists at these doors. Please note this information on plans to avoid interpretation during field inspection. Response: The plans have been revised to add a note regarding installation of smoke detectors in the area of Corridor 117. Per our telephone discussion, with this inclusion, the plans will comply with U.B.C. Sec. 3305(g), Exception #5. Alexander F. Ritter, MA in association with Setter, Leach & Lindstrom, Inc. / Architects • Engineers • Planners 120 First Avenue North, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55401 FAX 612 • 339 • 6760 TEL 612 • 339 • 0313 MEMORANDUM. Plan Review-Response 10 September :1991.. Page .2 The pair of existing doors leading. from Corridor 117 into the existing exit corridor have been revised to include original specified hardware information for clarity of compliance. The actual installation of the intended hardware has not been verified to date, but will be verified by the General Contractor prior to beginning construction: BARRIER FREE REQUIREMENTS. Indicate on plans the accessible route of travel for access to this office space. The accessibility should include parking provisions that are independent of those existing for the retail store: Location on site plan must be indicated and provisions for signage detailed. Response: The plans have been revised to add a handicapped access ramp and additional handicapped parking spaces (Bulletin 1). Should there be any question and/or clarification needed, .. please contact this office. MVR:dme /rej mm09 -6 trgsct Alexander F. Ritter Architect 10 September 1991 Mr. Robert Benedicto Plans Examiner City of Tukwila 6200 Southcenter Boulevard Tukwila, WA 98188 RE: Southcenter Spoke Region District Office Strander Blvd. and Andover Park West Tukwila, WA AFR/SLL Comm. No. 9092.901.02 Plan Check Number 91 -354 Dear Mr. Benedicto: RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEA' 1 1 1591 PERMIT CENTER In response to the 27 August 1991 Plan Review, we have made changes to our drawings, calculations and specifications as required. Enclosed are two documents that respond to plan review comments and indicate changes made. The Plan Review Response (two copies enclosed) addresses each item of the Plan Review and Bulletin #1 (two copies enclosed) amends the drawings and specifications after original issue. The following describes each of the documents. The Plan Review Response is based on requests for additional information that is needed to issue a building permit for the referenced Target store. Each comment made in the Plan Review is repeated and our response follows in bold type. ,If a change is made to the drawings or specifications, following the response the applicable bulletin is noted in parentheses. The Bulletin is typical of the format we use to amend the construction documents after the original issue. This document describes each change and lists affected drawings and specification sections. Whenever a drawing change is made, the affected area is clouded and a triangle with two numbers is placed by it. The numbers refer to the bulletin number and the item number. If another bulletin is issued, the first set of clouds is removed, but the triangle will always remain to indicate that a change has been made. Every change to the construction documents is summarized in a bulletin following this procedure. Alexander F. Rutter, MA In association with Setter, Leach & Undatrom, Inc. / Architects • Engineers • Planners 120 First Avenue North, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55401 FAX 612 • 339 • 6760 . TEL 612 • 339 • 0313 Mr. Robert Be(; ..icto 10 September 1991 Page 2 We would like to see the building permit•issued as soon as possible, and hope these documents have answered your concerns. If you have any questions or. comments, please feel free.to call collect. Sincerely, Mario V. Racelis Stephen J. Fautsch, A.I.A. Project Architect. New Stores Discipline:Leader Enclosures: Copy: Robb File MVR:dme /rej 1t09 -6 trgsct Plan Review Response Bulletin #1 Gruman 4 ALEXANDER F. RITTER, ARCHITECT in association with SETTER LEACH & LINDSTROM INC. 120 First Avenue North Minneapolis, Minnesota 55401. (612) 339 -0313 CIVIL: N.I.C. Commission No. 9092.901.02. .T E M Description (continued on next Page 2) BULLETIN NO. 1 10 September 1991 Code Review Response Revisions Attachments: Al, A2 Contract Documents for for Drawing changes described below are referenced on the drawings by the following symbol: Bulletin. No. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP• 1 1 191 PERMIT CENTER TARGET STORE SOUflICENTER SPOKE REGION DISTRICT OFFICE 301 STRANDER BLVD.. TUKWILA, WA TARGET STORES A Division of Dayton. Hudson Corporation 33 South. Sixth Street Minneapolis, Minnesota 55440 -1392 The provisions in the Contract Documents issued 16 August 1991 relating to Bulletins (Document 00900 Supplementary Conditions) apply to this bulletin. The Contractor is requested to quote a separate price for each of the following items, using the CSI account code in the Schedule of Values submittal form. Submit:the quotations to the Owner's Site Representative using Owner's Change Order'Proposal Form on or before 23 September 1991. This request for quotation does not constitute authorization to proceed with the work. I T E M END OF BULLETIN Description 1 CODE REVIEW RESPONSE REVISIONS Revise drawings as noted below. Drawings Reissued Sheet A1.- Plans, Elevations and Schedules Sheet A2 - Details 8 -1/2 x 11 Attachments None Specification Revisions None Scope of Changes Architectural: Provide project and code data, handicap parking, handicap entry ramp and clarify existing hardware. Structural: Add reinforcing for handicap ramp. Mechanical:. No impact. Electrical: No impact. Fire Department Review Control #91 -354 (512) Dear. Sir: 4 car Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 -7661 (206) 575 -4404 Re: Target - 301 Strander Blvd. Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor September 6, 1991 The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 1. The total number of fire extinguishers required for your establishment is calculated at one extinguisher for each 3000 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A, 10 B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (NFPA 10, 3 -1.1) (UFC 10 -1 (3 -1)) Extinguishers shall be installed on the hangers or in the brackets supplied, mounted in cabinets, or set on shelves (NFPA 10, 1 -6.6), and shall be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 5 feet above the floor. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.6) (UFC 10.301) Extinguishers shall be located so as to be in plain view (if at all possible), or if not iri plain view, they shall be identified with a sign stating, "Fire Extinguisher," with an arrow pointing to the unit. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.3) (UFC 10.301) 2. No point in a sprinklered building may be more than 200 feet from an exit, measured along the path of travel. (UBC 3302(d)) Exit doors shall be openable from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge or. effort. (UFC 12.104b) Exit hardware and marking must meet the requirements *ILA r � City OT Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 -7661 (206) 575 -4404 Page number 2 Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor of Uniform Fire Code Sections 12.104 &.10.402(a). Exit signs shall be installed at required exit doorways and where otherwise necessary to clearly indicate the direction of egress. Signs shall be of a contrasting color with the surrounding area and shall have letters not less than six inches high with a minimum letter width of 3/4 ". (UBC 3314) (UFC 12.108) Exits shall be illuminated at any time the building is occupied. An emergency system shall automatically provide exit illumination upon failure of the main . power supply. (UFC 12.107(a)(b)) 3. All modifications to sprinkler systems shall have the written approval of the Washington Survey & Rating Bureau, Factory Mutual Engineering or Industrial Risk Insurers, then by the Fire Department. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #1528) (NFPA 13, 1 -9.1) (UFC 10.307) All sprinkler drawings shall be prepared by companies licensed to perform this type of work. Drawings shall first be approved by the Washington Survey & Rating Bureau, Factory Mutual Engineering or Industrial Risk Insurers, then by the Tukwila Fire Department. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #1528 & NFPA 13, 1 -9.1) (UFC 10.305) Maintain sprinkler protection for all enclosed areas. (NFPA 13, 4- 1.1.1) (UFC 10.302) Contact the Tukwila Fire Department, Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (NFPA 13, 1 -10.2) (UFC 10.305(b)) 4. All modifications to fire alarm systems shall have the written approval of the Tukwila Fire Department. No work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance Page number 3 #1327) (UFC 10.301) Call the Tukwila Fire Department at 575 -4404 for approval of any system shut down. Have job site address, name, and the Tukwila Fire Department Job Number available to confirm shutdown approval. (UFC 10.301) 5. All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NEC 70) (UFC 85.101) All electrical wiring is to be inspected by the State Electrical. inspector, Washington State Department of Labor & Industries. (NEC 70) 6. All required occupancy separations, area separation walls, and draft -stop partitions shall be maintained and shall be properly repaired, restored or replaced when damaged, altered, breached, penetrated, removed or improperly installed. (UFC 10.401) This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. Any overlooked hazardous condition and /or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. Yours truly, I The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau cc; T.F.D. file ncd City di Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 -7661 (206) 575-4404 Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor S •=11111111•11111111111111111. •••••1111111•1•Ik Target Stores 33 South Sixth Strati P.O. Box 1392 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55440 -1392 Telex No. 205812 September 4, 1991 Mr. Robert Benedicto City of Tukwila Department of Community Development Planning Department 6200 Southcenter Boulevard Tukwila, WA 98188 RE: TARGET OFFICES PROJECT /PERMIT #: 91 -354 Dear Mr. Benedicto; In response to item number 1 in your plan review comments, I have been advised that the following detailed information will suffice for purposes of your review (in lieu of the requested site plan) relating to parking. • The entire project, including all requirements, has 783 parking stalls. According to our records, the entire "retail" requirement approved for the site was 386 stalls. The Target store in this center is approximately 116,100 gross square feet, including the mezzanine. Given the City's requirement of 2.5 stalls per 1,000 square feet, we would have been required to provide 290 stalls. Currently, within the Target parcel alone, we have 459 stalls, of which 4 are handicapped, 102 are compact stalls and 353 are standard size. This includes those stalls on the back i. r side of the building. We intend to take 3 of those (standard size) stalls and convert ffC rsur, --- them to 2 handicapped, thereby dropping our total to 458 stalls. This detail should provide the necessary information requested. If not, please let me know. I spoke to Darin Wilson in your planning department today and he, and his associates, have agreed to waive the environmental checklist requirement. We appreciate your cooperation on this matter. Very truly yours, T oif.e A 61.64,44.___ Robb A. Gruman Director Administrative Services Target Stores CC: Mario Racelis - RSP Architects Keith Barrow - W.G. Clark A Division of the Dayton Hudson Corporation SEP0 01991 CITY OF TUKWILA PLANNING DEPT. Ra :un1/a :bened.I TARGET PURCHASING CC21 TEL No.612- 335 -5158 Sep 4,91 9 :36 No.010 P.01 TARGET ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES 4r" r 1 53 Phone # (612)310 -8913 TO: / COMPANY: FAX #: FROM: PHONE: DATE : FAX #: COMMENTS: SEP O,. 1991 1\ (612) 3354158 We are transmitting pages, including this cover sheet If you do not receive all the pages, piease'contact the sender. TARGET PURCHASING CC21 TEL No.612 -335 -5158 September 4, 1991 Mr. Robert Benedicto City of Tukwila Department of Community Development Planning Department 6200 Southcenter Boulevard Tukwila, WA 98188 RE: TARGET OFFICES PROJECT/PERMIT #: 91 -3S4 Dear Mr, Benedicto; In response to item number 1 in your plan review comments, 1 have been advised that the following detailed information will suffice for purposes of your review (in lieu of the requested site plan) relating to parking. s The entire project, including all requirements, has 783 parking stalls. According to our records, the entire "retail" requirement approved for the site was 386 stalls, The Target store in this center is approximately 116,100 gross square feet, including the mezzanine. Given the City's requirement of 2.5 stalls per 1,000 square feet, we would have been required to provide 290 stalls, Currently, within the Target parcel alone, we have 459 stalls, of which 4 are handicapped, 102 are compact stalls and 353 are standard size. This includes those stalls on the back . side of the building. We intend to take 3 of those (standard size) stalls and convert them to 2 handicapped, thereby dropping our total to 458 stalls. This detail should provide the necessary information requested. If not, please let me know. 1 spoke to Darin Wilson in your planning department today and he, and his associates, have agreed to waive the environmental checklist requirement. We appreciate your cooperation on this matter. Target Stores �' ... 33 South Sixth Street P.O. Sox 1392 Minneapolis, Minnesota 65440-1392 Telex No, 205812 Very truly yours, /' Robb A. Grutuan Director Administrative Services Target Stores CC: Mario Racelis - RSP Architects Keith Barrow - W.G. Clark A blvlsion of the Dayton Hudson Corporation Sep 4,91 9:36 No.010 P.02 SEA 0 -' 1991 MEMO TO:'.FILE 91 -3 FROM: R.S.B. DATE: September 3, 1991 SUBJECT: PHONE CONY. W/ MARIO RACELIS, RSP ARCHITECTS REVIEWED COMMENTS ON LETTER OF 27AUG91. FOLLOWING IS THE RESOLVE: ITEM 1. BUILDING OWNER IS SUBMITTING A LETTER THIS WEEK WITH A RECAP OF THE PARKING AVAILABLE ON SITE... AS BUILT. THIS WILL SHOW THAT THERE IS SUBSTANTIAL PARKING AVAILABLE, AND THAT NO NEW PARKING IS REQUIRED TO BE DEVELOPED. THE CONTRACTOR MADE A SITE VISIT AND CONFIRMED THAT THERE IS 34' -8" FROM FACE OF BUILDING TO CURB OF ISLAND, AND THAT THIS DIMENSION IS IN ADDITION TO THE DEPTH OF THE EXISTING PARKING STALLS. THIS PROPOSED RAMP AND LANDING SHOULD LEAVE AN AISLE OF 28' -8" CLEAR FOR THE ACCESS DRIVE. O.K CODE INFORMATION ON COVER SHEET IS COMMING. ITEM 2. THIS ISSUE WILL BE ADDRESSED BY INSTALLING SMOKE DETECTORS AT THIS CORRIDOR AND THROUGHOUT THE OPEN SPACE THAT ADJOINS THIS CORRIDOR. WILL NOTE ON PLANS THAT HARDWARE TO EXISTING PAIR OF DOORS AT FIRE RATED CORRIDOR WILL HAVE THE ORIGINAL SPECIFIED OPERATING HARDWARE, AND THAT THIS MEETS BARRIER FREE REQUIREMENTS. ITEM 3. THIS ITEM HAS BEEN RESOLVED BE DETAIL TRANSMITTED 3SEPT91 (COPY IN FILE) PLANS TO BE REVISED TO SHOW THIS RAMP ACCESS. PLAN REVISIONS TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE END OF THIS WEEK. EXITING ISSUE CAN BE RESOLVED WITHOUT A REVISION TO THE SPACE PLAN. THUS THE PLAN REMAINS AS IS, ROUTE TO F.P.B. FOR REVIEW... THIS DATE. SEP 03 '91 08:16 RSP Architects Ltd. 120 First Avenue North Minneapolis, MN 55401 FAX 612.339.6760 612. ► Facsimile Transmittal From: Rfp 781 P01 C. P-0 Date. 4P� 30, 1 cm Comm. No,: FAX Number: o c o 431.U,4.5' To: �f3 i,.,."SNEDICT•G9 (Cir./ og Ti4. 1L4A___R UILCnING, U ELciAl.. Company; Cil e7UIL.r)I? r. TY 0��li�bl I�—�, � Dea Number of Pages (Including this sheet): ,z MAt,tg? 'r RAC� Ltd Description: PLEA iRSULE14 ERD.f`OW ' f" . I.Cs'w LAsy_ iii _ EOM„ GO LIT I -IC St4T g TA.Rc Iz �'T•© .� C_ T CaF '1C8, Message: _ I LL C ya11 (1.` -r4e&DAy .r.0 • Cc t Roma Ci &u iAbi ,C.Tdt a ) IBS Ti-1 Ptt2 iznt & (Lt. 61, C t„Arzie) • 2 06- 2A2- "71 If there are •any problems with this transnii58ion, or if you wish 10 reply, Contact RSP at 612- 339.0313, proposed handicap ramp stair 4AUG:30 '91 13:35 RSP Architects Ltd.. 120 firsI Avenue North Minneapolis. MN rAY. 612 • 339.6/60 612.339.0313 • Facsimile Transmittal Comm, N octet. 901, k: 0 Date: AUK:• ac:)., Nit FAX Number: DG 43 , 5465 Number .of Payes (Including this sheet): Tv. t5otzt, 6ENwwicro (CITY q r4JK.wI1 ed.11izatio OF '1CJAi. -I Company: crry.. 11tc wIL.A , 14 ILI�IhIC� DEPT: Fram: MARta RACE'. .., . Description: _EL-044E. .ARELVIEJ61.___Di01 'CAP' RAMP/SIAM LAYOUT _FOR ecnaliCENT1=_ Leagrf tDi IC7 QFFICE. If their. are any problems with this trnnsrpirun or If yoo wa t n;rep(y, coritac tRSP at G12.3 �3 031 : J � 11 AUG . 3 a 199a " !" iKV ICIN PL. M ;LING DEPT proposed handicap ramp stair BUILDING DIVISION PLAN REVIEW NO. 91 -354 CONTACT: ROBB A. GRUMAN PROJECT: TARGET STORE, SPOKE REGION DIST. OFFICES. ADDRESS: 301 STRANDER BLVD. August 27, 1991 PREPARED BY: CITY OF TUKWILA DEPARTMENT OP COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT The following corrections and /or clarifications are required to complete the plan review. Please respond to the listed comments in itemized letter form, and submit two copies of corrections or additional information developed. 1. GENERAL. Provide a site plan which will show parking dedicated to the proposed office space. This plan should show that the proposed stairs and railings for the new entry, will not encroach into the required access drive. General Code information is required on the plans. Notes should include but is not limited to Code Edition, Type of construction, Occupancy group, area of construction, etc. ?. EXITING. Corridor 117 is required to provide one hour fire rated construction per U.B.C. Sec. 3305 (g). Consequently, all openings including the access to this egress path must be protected as prescribed in U.B.C. Sec. 3305 (h). Provide details to show how this will be accomplished. Note: pair of doors which lead from corridor 117 to existing exit corridor must be provided with hardware that will comply with Washington State Barrier Free requirements and the provisions of U.B.C. Sec. 3304 (c). Plans do not indicate what type of operating hardware exists at these doors. Please note this information on plans to avoid interpretation during field inspection. 3. BARRIER FREE REQUIREMENTS. Indicate on plans the accessible route of travel for access to this office space. The accessibility should include parking provisions that are independent of those existing for the retail store. Location on site plan must be indicated and provisions for signage detailed. ert Bene icto :17 1 Q"-A kebe- OCCUPANCY LOAD: * BUILDING DIVISION * PLAN REVIEW PLAN REVIEW: 91-354 PROJECT NAME: TARGET STORE, SPOKE REGION DIST. OFFICES DATE: August 26, 1991 OCCUPANCY GROUP: B-2, OFFICE USE (PROPOSED NEW USE IN EXISTING B-2 RETAIL STORE) TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: II—N, SPRINKLERED (UNLIMITED AREA PROVISIONS IN EFFECT) LOCATION ON PROPERTY: N/C, PROPOSED WORK TO BE LOCATED IN NORTHWEST CORNER OF BUILDING, PREVIOUSLY A PORTION OF STOCK ROOM. BUILDING HEIGHT/NO OF STORIES: ONE STORY, N/C FLOOR AREA: 111,909 GSF BLDG.. ADDITION= 98.5 X46.85 = 4615 SF -\),5t4ktc;VA' P - Ax "71Z 5 ROOM AREA O.L.F. OCC. 101 182 100 2 102 153 100. 2 103 284 0 0 104 200 0 0 105 59 0 0 106 569 15 38 107 62 300 0 108 212 100 2 109 140 100 1 110 A,B,C N/A 0 111 119 100 1 112 119 100 1 113 .119 100 1 114 125 100 1 115 87 0 0 116 N/A 117 N/A 118 N/A 119 200 100' 2 120 289 100 3 121 117' 100 1 122 117. 100 1 123 117 100 1 124 970 100 10 TOTAL 67 EXITING REOUIREMENTS: OCCUPANT LOAD = 67 > 30 THEREFORE TWO EXITS REQUIRED PER U.B.C. TABLE 33 -A. LOCATED AT MIN. SEPARATION OF 109/2 ='54.5 FT. PROPOSED SEPARATION = 69 FT. O.K. THREE EXIT DOORS WILL SERVE THIS SPACE. ONE EXITS DIRECTLY TO YARD AT WEST SIDE OF BUILDING, A SECOND EXIT LEADS TO EXISTING ONE HOUR FIRE RATED CORRIDOR, AND A THIRD WOULD LEAD INTO THE RETAIL SALES FLOOR AND THEN OUT THROUGH EXISTING EXITS. HOWEVER, THE DESCRIBED THIRD EXIT HAS DOOR SWING IN OPPOSITE DIRECTION OF EGRESS TRAVEL THEREFORE IT MAY NOT BE CONSIDERED. CORRIDORS: CORRIDOR 105 IS 14 FT. LONG AND SERVES AS REQUIRED EXIT FOR < 10 OCCUPANTS (TOILET ROOMS AND LOUNGE) NO CORRIDOR REQMTS. CONSIDERED HERE. CORRIDOR 110A SERVES AS A PORTION OF A REQUIRED EGRESS PATH FOR ROOM 108 AND 109, IT WILL ALSO (NO DOUBT) BE USED AS AN ALTERNATE ACCESS FROM THE RETAIL FLOOR. AS LONG AS THIS EGRESS ROUTE IS NOT LABELED AS AN EXIT THEN NO CORRIDOR REQMTS NEED BE CONSIDERED HERE. CORRIDOR 117 IS APPROXIMATELY 19 FT IN LENGTH AND WILL SERVE AS.A REQUIRED EXIT FOR MORE THAN 30 OCCUPANTS- THERE WILL BE REQMTS OF SECTION 3305 TO CONSIDER. REVISIONS ARE NECESSARY HERE. DETAILED REQUIREMENTS: OCCUPANCY REQMTS: N /C, NO'SEP.REQD. BTWN. OFFICE AND RETAIL. O.K. TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION REQMTS. MAY CHANGE DUE TO EXITING REQMTS. REF: REVISION REQUESTS. CHAPTER. 23, . ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER HAVE CERTIFIED CUTTING OF HOLE IN EXTERIOR WEST WALL. NO OTHER STRUCTURAL PROPOSALS ARE REQD.' BY THIS APPLICATION. 51-10 WAC: ' BARRIER FREE TOILET ROOMS HAVE BEEN PROVIDED FOR OFFICE STAFF. CHECK CLEARANCES....WSEC REQMTS: LIGHT _FIXTURES . HAVE_NOT__ BEEN _ CLEARLY; KEYED,.. TO.. ESTABLISH .,. :IF_ _THE ._LIGHTING .; ENERGY. BUDGET REQMTS. BEEN ' NET. . REF IN REVISION REQUEST. PREPARED BY: I understand that the Plan Check approval' _e 'wLie Ct to errors a pions does not ads pied c copy of a rr date.... CA/61 Permit No FILE COPY RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA AUti 2 2 1991 PERMITCENTER omissions and appror the violation of any e. Receipt of contractor's knowledged. PROJECT MANUAL for COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION for the construction of TARGET SPOKE REGION DISTRICT OFFICE TARGET STORE T -627 Tukwila, Washington Commission No. 9092.901.02 for TARGET STORES A Division of Dayton Hudson Corporation 33 South Sixth Street Minneapolis, Minnesota 55440 -1392 16 August 1991 RSP ARCHITECTS, LTD. in association with SETTER LEACH 8 LINDSTROM INC. 120 First Avenue North Minneapolis, Minnesota 55401 (612) 339 -0313 REGISTERED / AR I CT 1 l'► A ER RI TER ST OF WASHINGTON 4764 Prepared By: Reviewed By: PROJECT MANUAL CERTIFICATION for COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION for the construction of TARGET SPOKE REGION DISTRICT OFFICE TARGET STORE T -627 Tukwila, Washington Commission No. 9092.901.02 for 16 August 1991 RSP ARCHITECTS, LTD. in association with SETTER LEACH & LINDSTROM INC. 120 First Avenue North Minneapolis, Minnesota 55404: (612) 339 -0313 TARGET STORES A Division of Dayton Hudson Corporation 33 South Sixth Street Minneapolis, Minnesota 55440- 1392 TARGET STORES SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROJECT IDENTIFICATION Document Title 00010 Title Page 00020 Certification Page 00030 Table of Contents /Schedule of Drawings BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Document Title 00120 Instructions to Bidders 00215 Owner Supplied Information Work by Rooftop Unit Manufacturer: 15780 Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Equipment Work by Controls Supplier: 15950 Controls and instrumentation Work by Independent Air Balance Agency: 15993 Air Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 00320 Construction Cost Breakdown 00330 Receipt and Waiver of Lien Rights 00350 Materials Stored Payment Form 00700 General Conditions 00900 Supplementary Conditions SPECIFICATIONS Section Title DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of the Work 01050 Field Engineering 01090 Reference Standards 01120 Alteration Project Procedures 01300 Submittals 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01600 Materials and Equipment 01700 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02050 Minor Demolition DIVISION 3 AND DIVISION 4 Not Used DIVISION 5 - METALS 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 8 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 08100 Rough Carpentry 06400 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07200 Insulation 07600 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07900 Joint Sealing DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames. 08200 Wood Doors 08700 Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 09300 09510 09650 09680 09900 09950 Gypsum Board Tile Acoustical Ceilings Resilient Flooring Carpeting Painting Wall Covering DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10010 Specialties DIVISION 11 THRU DIVISION 14 Not Required DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials 15250 Mechanical Insulation 15300 Fire Protection 15410 Plumbing Piping Systems 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15850 Air Handling 15880 Air Distribution and Methods SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16111- Conduit 16112 Surface Raceways 16120 • Wire and Cable . 16130 Boxes 16141 Wiring Devices 16180 Electrical Connections for. Equipment. 16190 Supporting;Devloes` 16195 Electrical. Identification 16440 Dlsconneot Switches 16450 Secondary Grounding ,16461 Dry' Typo Transformers 16470. Panelboards 16480 Motor. Control 16510 Lighting Fixtures. 16721 Fire'Alarm System 16741 .Telephone Raceway. System 16892 Electric Hand'Dryers SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS... Sheet Title ARCHITECTURAL. TARGET STORES Al Plans, elevations, Schedules. A2 :Details STRUCTURAL. Si Roof Framing Plan MECHANICAL M1 Mechanical.P.lans and Schedules ELECTRICAL E1 ..Power,,Llght Syste�os Plans . S. E2 Electrical Schedules and. Details END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS.`:.;:'. TARGET STORES DOCUMENT 00120 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS 1.1 BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Include instructions to Bidders, sample bidding and contract forms, and the proposed Contract Documents including Addenda Issued prior to receipt of Bids. 1.2 ADDENDA A. Written or graphic Instruments Issued by the Architect prior to receipt of Bids which modify or Interpret Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Addenda will be Issued no later than seven days before Bids are received. 1.3 BID A. A complete and properly signed Bid to do the Work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated, supported by data required by the Bidding Documents. 1.4 BASE BID A. The sum stated In the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described In the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or deducted for sums stated In Alternate Bids. 1.5 ALTERNATE BID (OR ALTERNATE) A. An amount stated In the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bld If the corresponding change in the Work as described In the Bidding Documents Is accepted. 1.8 UNIT PRICE A. An amount stated, in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described In the Bidding documents. Unit prices do not substantially change scope and general character of Work. Unit prices shall be based on labor, material, equipment, and related services necessary for complete Installation of Work described. 1.7 BIDDER A. One who submits a Bid for a contract with the Owner for the Work described in the Bidding Documents. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS DOCUMENT 1.8 SUBBIDDERS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. One who submits a Bid to a Bidder for materials or labor for a portion of the Work. 1.9 OTHER DEFINITIONS A. Definitions set forth In the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION 2.1 BIDDERS AND SUBBIDDERS A. By submitting a Bld, Bidder and Subbidder represents that he has read and understands the Bidding Documents and his Bid Is made in accordance therewith; he has visited the site and has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work Is to be performed, including but not restricted to, those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, roads and uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides or similar physical conditions at the site, the conformation and conditions of the surface and subsurface conditions of the site, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during execution of the Work, and has correlated his observations with the requirements of the Bidding Documents; and his Bid Is based upon materials, systems and equipment described In the Bidding Documents. ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 DOCUMENT USE AND AVAILABILITY A. Subbidders may obtain Documents from Contractor. B. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used In preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. C. The issuing party or Owner, In making copies of the Bidding Documents available, does so only for the purpose of obtaining bids on the Work and does not confer a license for, or grant any other use of, the documents. 00120 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 3.2 INTEPRETATIONS /CORRECTIONS A. Bidders and Subbidders shall promptly notify the Architect In writing of any ambiguity, Inconsistency or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents or of the site and local conditions, codes and regulations. B. Bidders and Subbldders requiring clarification or intepretatlons shall make a written request to Architect, to reach Architect at least ten days prior to date for receipt of Bids. C. Any interpretations, corrections or changes to the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections, or changes made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon such Interpretations, correotions and changes. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Bidders and Subbldders are encouraged to submit requests for approval of substitutions that may have a cost /benefit value for the Project. No action will be taken on these requests during the bidding period. Substitute products, equipment and systems may be submitted In writing to the Owner during the bidding period for evaluation after Bids have been received, or they may be submitted as voluntary alternates In compliance with the provisions of the Bid Form. Comply with procedural requirements and criteria for substitutions as specified In Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. All requests shall be In writing and shall Include pertinent descriptive material, including price differential between proposed substitution and work specified. Only specified products, equipment and systems shall be included In the Base Bid. 3.4 ADDENDA A. Addenda will be delivered to all parties who are known by the Issuing party to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 00120 -2 ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURE 4.1 PRE -BID MEETING A. A "Pre -Bid Conference" may be held by the Owner prior to the Bid date to review the Project, the bidding, the award procedures and to answer questions by the Bidders. B. The location and time, If a meeting Is to be held, will be announced to all Bidders of record. 4.2 FORM OF BIDS A. Submit Bids In duplicate on forms provided. Oral, telephonic or telegraphic bids will not receive consideration. Fill In all blanks on the form with typewriter or Ink using "NA" or "No Bid" in blanks for which a time or sum Is not applicable. Whore required by the form express sums, quantities, and days, In both figures and words. The words shall govern In the event of a discrepancy between the two. B. Any Interllneatlon, alteration, or erasure, must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. Bidders shall make no stipulations on the Bid Form nor qualify a Bid in a manner not specified or provided In the Bid Form. C. Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of Bidder and a statement:.:. that the Bidder Is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation, or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a Contract. A Bid by a corporation shall give the state of incorporation with the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying agent's authority to bind Bidder. 4.3 FORM OF SUBBIDS A. The Owner has pre- selected the Contractor for Complete Construction who will receive subbids. B. Submit Subbids in the form prescribed by Contractor. 4.4 BID OPENING TIME /PLACE 4.5 BID MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL TARGET STORES A. The Contractor for Complete Construction shall determine the time and place to receive subblds. A. A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the 30 day period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and Bidder so agrees In submitting his Bid. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, any Blds submitted may be withdrawn or modified only by notice, to the party receiving Bids at the place designated • for receipt of Bids. The notice shall be In writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; ' If by telegram, written INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • TARGET STORES B. Withdrawn Bids may not be resubmitted. 4.8 CONTRACT ASSIGNMENT A. Bidders for Complete Construction shall, by submitting a Bid, agree to accept as Subcontractors, by contract assignment, the firms to which the Owner has separately awarded Contracts and which may be Identified In the Bidding Documents. 4.7 BONDS confirmation over the signature of Bidder must have been mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids. A. Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond may be required by the Owner. The cost of bonds, If required, will be added to the Bid amount by Alternate. See Section 01030. B. The Owner reserves the right to purchase the Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond from his surety company. 4.8 REJECTION OF BIDS A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and Subbids. 4.9 ACCEPTANCE OF BIDS A. The Owner reserves the right to waive any informality or irregularity In any Bid or Subbid. 4.10 CHANGE ORDER MARK - UPS /MARK -DOWNS A. Percentage amounts quoted In the Bid for mark- up /mark -down on Project Change Orders may be considered In award. ARTICLE 5 - POST -BID INFORMATION 5.1 BIDDER SUBMISSIONS A. The successful Bidder shall submit the following in compliance with the requirements of the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements within ten calendar days (or at earlier times specified elsewhere) after date of the fully executed Contract, Letter of Intent, or Notice to Proceed, whichever Is earliest: 1. A Construction Cost Breakdown on the. Owner's form included In Document 00320. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS DOCUMENT SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 2. A Certification indicating the Contractor has recorded the Contract with any city, county, or state agency, if such action is required by law. 3. A Proposed Construction Progress Schedule. 4. A Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule. 5. A Certificate of insurance Indicating compliance with the Insurance requirements. 6. Subcontractors list, including names, addresses, telephone numbers, and trade classification of each. 7. When required, a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond. END OF DOCUMENT 00120 -3 TARGET STORES DOCUMENT 00215 - OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INCORPORATED INFORMATION A. The following Information Incorporated in the Project Manual Is supplied by the Owner for reference and Is not part of Contract. 1.02 WORK AWARDED SEPARATELY A. The Work awarded separately Includes,.but is not limited to, the following Specification. Sections. which are reproduced on the • following pages for. references, 1. Work by Air- Conditioning Unit Manufacturer: SectIon 15780, Packaged Rooftop Air -Conditioning Equipment.. 2. Work by Controls Supplier: Section 15950, Controls and Instrumentation. Work by Independent Air Balance Agency: Section 15993, Air Systems. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 TARGET STORES SECTION 15780 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING 1QUIPMENT 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnishing of packaged rooftop air conditioning equipment. B. Furnishing of rooftop equipment curbs with burglar bars, and transition ducts within curbs where indicated. C. Delivery of equipment to Job site, freight allowed and prepaid. D. Start -up service, field wiring, operating instruction and service manuals, and warranty. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The following separate contraot work is specified under Bid Pack 3: 1. Section 15850 - Rooftop Equipment installation Work by Contractor. 2. Section 15880 - Contractor. 3. Section 15950, under Section information instrumentation 4. Section 15993, included for reference under Section 00215, Owner Supplied information - Work by Independent Air Balance Testing Agency. 5. Division 16 - Electrical Work by Contractor. 1.03 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL Air Distribution Work by Included for reference 00215, Owner Supplied Controls and A. AIEE, "American institute of Electrical Engineers." B. ARI, "Air- conditioning and Refrigeration institute." C. NEC, "National Electric Code, NFPA -70." D. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturer's Association." E. UL, "Building Materials Directory." 1.04 SUBMITTALS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Comply with requirements of Section 01300, Submittals, of Bid Pack 3 unless otherwise indicated. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Shop Drawings and Product Data shall be complete with pertinent data about equipment including the following in form as required by the Owner: 1. Unit arrangement, dimensions, weight, and other physical features. 2. Roof curb showing arrangement, dimensions, different components and sections In relation to unit, burglar bars, connections to roof structure and unit. 3. Capacities of supply blowers, motor kw and hp, static pressure, available static pressure on discharge duct, fan rpm, velocity, fan sizes, and other characteristics. 4. Overall unit EER. 5. DX coil capacity, rows deep, fin spacing, tube diameter, entering and leaving air conditions, db, wb, and other characteristics. 8. Compressor type, number of compressors, type of capacity control, kw Input at full load, starting and turning amps, and other characteristics. 7. Condenser type, number of condensers, kw Input of condenser fans at full load. 8. Type of refrigerant, total refrigerant charge. 9. Type of heating media, capacity, output /Input, air temperature rise, method of control, and other features. 10. Complete wiring diagrams with written descriptions for control systems as specified. 11. Specify Work to be performed by other trades for a complete installation. C. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: include complete start -up, oiling, cleaning, and servicing data, compiled In clearly and easily understood form. Show serial numbers of each piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, belt data, motor ratings and actual loads. PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT (OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION) 15780 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 D. Submittal Procedures: 1. Submit one reproducible sepia and two prints of roof curb Shop Drawings and Product Data within two weeks after request from Owner's Site Representative (OSR). 2. Submit one reproducible sepia and eight copies of equipment Shop Drawings and Product Data. Submit to authorized purchase agent at Owner's Construction Department. 3. Closeout Submittals: Submit four complete sets of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Operating and Maintenance Manuals to OSR. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of units to site as directed by Owner. B. Ship each unit In one piece, completely wired, piped and charged with refrigerant. C. Protect condenser coils from damage when shipped from factory using plywood, sheetmetal, or other means approved by Owner. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall warrant units against defective materials, labor and workmanship for a period of one year from date of Owner's acceptance. Warranty period shall commence upon acceptance of units by Owner after initial start -up, test report approval by Architect, and satisfactory performance as evidenced by Architect. Letter of starting date shall be sent to OSR by unit manufacturer, acknowledged by ' OSR and returned to sender. B. Defects of any kind, due to faulty work or materials, appearing during the period from shipping through start -up to acceptance by the Owner must be immediately corrected by unit manufacturer at his own expense. C. Initial refrigerant and oil charge for operating units shall be sufficient In quantity to fully charge the system and to leave It In sufficient quantity and satisfactory operating condition. Refrigerant charge or oil that may be lost during the testing operation, start -up, and Owner acceptance shall be replaced by unit manufacturer. On acceptance of units by Owner and during one year warranty period, refrigerant charge or oil lost during operation shall be replaced by the unit manufacturer, without cost to the Owner. D. Unit manufacturer shall provide five years of material warranty on compressors and heat exchanger of which one year Is material and labor warranty provided by unit manufacturer as described above. E. Warranty shall not apply to injuries or damages occurring after Owner acceptance due to "Act of God ", fire, violence, abuse, or carelessness of separate Contractors or Agents of the Owner; however, Owner reserves the right to make temporary repairs necessary to keep equipment In operating condition without voiding unit manufacturer's warranty or relieving unit manufacturer of responsibilities during warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide units as scheduled on Drawings. B. Owner will consider voluntary alternates proposed by unit manufacturer for performance standards and features using the least amount of energy for specified requirements. 2.02 CAPACITY TARGET STORES A. Provide capacity of units as scheduled on Drawings. 2.03 ROOF MOUNTED PREFABRICATED CURB A. Curb insulation: Rigid glass fiber board type with average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.23 (BTU- Inch) /(hour - sq.ft. -deg. F.) at a mean temperature of 75" F Installed Inside curb perimeter. B. Top of curbs to be level with minimum height specified herein. D. Furnish 14" high, 14 gauge steel full Island roof mount factory fabricated curb for each unit. Furnish curbs in sections as required. Design and construct curbs to set directly on bar Joists without additional structural steel support. E. Furnish burglar bar Inserts for connection to unit duct openings, constructed of 3/4" diameter steel bars spaced maximum 9" on center both ways. Provide with 2" x 4" nailer around curb and sealing gaskets for installation on top of curb between sections. 15780 -2 (OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION) PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT TARGET STORES 2.04 CONSTRUCTION OF CABINET A. Provide adequate cabinet space with access doors and panels for service maintenance to various components. B. Construct unit from rigid steel frame, painted for rust resistant protection. C. Construct cabinet of galvanized steel, bonderized and prime coated. Insulated interior with 1" thick neoprene coated fiberglass. Provide 1" thick insulation applied to the underside of bottom panel at condensing unit. Provide quick release type panels for easy access for servicing operating components. D. Design unit for complete Island curb. E. Provide lifting lugs to facilitate overhead rigging. 2.05 FANS A. Supply Fans: Quiet operating, forward curved, Class 1 type, statically and dynamically balanced, and mounted on accurately ground and polished rigid steel shafts In self - aligning permanently lubricated bearings. Rebalance fan wheels In the field during warranty period If found to be vibrating. B. Provide fan bearings with average minimum life rating of 200,000 hours. Design unit for easy access to bearings for service. C. Mount on an adjustable base. D. Fan Drive: V -belt type, designed and rated for 150% of normal capacity. Adjustment during start -up if unit delivers under or over the capacity specified. Change drive assemblies or fans If there Is inadequate adjustment to obtain the correct capacity. 2.06 FILTERS A. Provide filter section with 2" throw away filters, filter racks designed to provide easy removal of filters, and a means for filter removal furnished with or Incorporated Into each unit. Do not exceed 325 fpm filter face velocity. B. Provide access panels on one side of cabinet to facilitate easy access to filters, 2.07 RETURN, OUTSIDE, AND RELIEF AIR SECTION A..Provide factory fabricated and assembled combination outside- return - relief air section complete with weather louvers, motorized return and outside air dampers PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT (OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION) SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 fully Insulated and gasketed, motorized relief air dampers, and insulated return air segment. B. Weather Louvers: Approved weatherproof, rain tight type complete with 1/2" mesh galvanized steel blydscreen secured on inside surface of each louver. Design shall prevent entrance of snow and rain into the unit. Link louvers together at the back to prevent flutter and vibration. C. Motorized Outside and Return Air Dampers: Assembly shall be provided with properly adjusted linkage system and operating motors, capable of handling 0% to 100% outdoor air. Low leakage type (3% leakage factor at 3" static pressure) with vinyl seals on edges and ends. Mount In unit according to damper manufacturer's instruction for an efficient operation. D. Provide field installed power exhaust fan with economizer to exhaust up to 75% of return air to eliminate over - pressurization of building. 2.08 HEATING SECTION - ELECTRIC HEATING COILS A. Construct electric blast coil heaters of 80% nickel, 20% chromium open resistance coils insulated by floating ceramic bushings and supported In an aluminized steel frame. Derate heating elements to a maximum of 35 watts per square Inch. B. Electric heaters shall meet the requirements of the NEC, shall be listed by UL for zero clearance to combustible surfaces, and shall be wired for 460/3/60. C. Provide the following components built In and factory prewired In unit control: 1. Internal wiring Insulated for 105 deg C. 2. Automatic reset thermal cutout for pilot duty. 3. Load carrying replaceable disc type cutouts for each circuit. 4. Magnetic control contactors, one for each circuit, with built -in fuses for each heater circuit larger than 40 amps. 5. 24 volt control voltage transformer with fused primary circuit. 6. Control heating stages with two step controller, which energizes each stage of heater to match space requirement. 2.09 EVAPORATORS 15780 -3 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Provide evaporator section consisting of direct expansion cooling coils complete with thermostatic expansion valve(s) having adjustable superheat control, external equalizer. B. Construct coils of minimum 1/2" outside diameter copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Coils shall be a minimum of four rows with a maximum of ten fins per inch. Circuit coils with respective compressor by face split. Size coils to have 10 deg F superheat at design condition. C. Provide each circuit with liquid line solenoid valve or refrigerant circuit and compressor design which eliminates compressor damage due to slugging. Provide filter drier(s), sight glass, expansion valves, shut -off service valves at condenser outlet. Use In line sight glass on liquid refrigerant line. Provide refrigerant lines complete with flexible connections, supported adequately to eliminate vibration. Insulate suction lines within unit cabinet with Type 0 Insulation. 0. Provide coil capacity as scheduled on Drawings. Do not exceed average face velocity of air through cooling coil of 500 fpm. Guarantee cooling coils for no moisture carry -over. Coll capacities and performance shall be tested and rated according to AR1 Standards. E. Provide a galvanized steel drain pan under coll(s). Pan shall be provided with an adequate pitch to drain It on roof. 2.10 COMPRESSOR - CONDENSER SECTION A. Provide hermetic type compressors, complete with crankcase heaters, lubrication system, oil sight glass, filter- drier, suction and discharge service valves. Mount each compressor on vibration isolators. B. Provide complete separate circuits for each compressor. Selected unit for 45 deg F suction temperature when balancing with evaporator at design conditions. C. Size condenser to operate at 95 deg F ambient. Provide condenser coll(s) of copper - aluminum, continuous fin type construction, having no more than 17 fins per inch. D. Provide direct drive propeller type condenser fans with fan guards. Design fan and motor assembly for outdoor application and adequate support. Seal and protect bearings against moisture and dirt seepage. E. Provide the following safety and operating controls: 1. Set compressors and refrigerant circuits In sequence to work with temperature controls. 2. Maintain automatic head pressure control by cycling condenser fans In response to head pressure on compressor(s). Maintain adequate operational condenser pressure at 50 deg F air temperature operation. Provide manual reset high head pressure control. 3. Time delay between contactors for each compressor operation to prevent compressors starting together, and to prevent short cycling. Provide 5 minute time delay between each cycle. 4. Ambient lockout thermostat (adjustable setting) shall prevent compressor(s) from operating when outside temperature Is at 50 deg F or below. 5. Oil pressure switch for each compressor. 6. High and low head pressure cut -out switch for each compressor. 7. Electrically interlock refrigerant circuits to prevent operation of compressor(s) when heating coil Is on, or blower Is off. 2.11 UNIT CONTROLS A. Provide automatic temperature control system less remote temperature sensors and remote control panel, fully Installed and prewlred at factory, complete with connection facilities for remote operation of each unit from energy management controller. (Sea Controls and instrumentation Section 15950). 2.12 UNIT ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS TARGET STORES A. Provide circuit breakers, power terminal block, control transformers, starters, relays, refrigerant control, fuses, and switches for remote transmission of functions and other miscellaneous electrical control devices required; all Internally mounted within each unit. A non -fused weatherproof disconnect switch mounted on the exterior of each unit is specified In Division 16. B. Magnetic starters for supply fan motors, for each compressor, and for each condenser fan motor shall have UL label and three leg overload protection. Provide motors with separate starters or contactors with 15780 -4 (OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION) PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT TARGET STORES overload protection In each phase. Separately protect each phase against overcurrent. C. Electrical power at the unit shall be 460 volt, three phase, 60 hertz as Indicated on Drawings. Provide 460 volt to 120 volt transformer for Integral control wiring and 24 volt transformer of adequate capacity for control wiring. D. Wiring shall comply with NEC requirements and with local applicable codes. E. Electrical components shall have UL label where applicable and shall be identified with printed labels. F. Wiring including control wiring shall have insulation rated at 600 volts. G. Control wiring shall be color coded, numbered, neatly harnessed and mounted to facilitate servicing. H. Motors: 1. Electrical motors and starter shall comply with AIEE, NEMA, and this specification. 2. Design motors for supply voltages indicated, sized to develop required brake horsepower and operate satisfactorily with a voltage variation of + 10%. Dynamically balance motors and hold to commercial tolerances. 3. For fan motors 5 hp and above, provide high efficiency type with Increased power factor above 85% and nominal energy efficiency of 84% or above. 4. Select motors for satisfactory operation without failure when ambient temperature reaches (40 deg C or 104 deg F) for a period of two hours or more. 5. Provide drip -proof ball bearings. 6. Provide squirrel -cage type motors, drip - proof enclosure, constant speed, across - the -line normal torque designed for quiet operation. Motor shall operate at proper full load and speed continuously without excessive heating In any part. Size at minimum 115% service factor. 7. Equip V -bolt drive with adjustable base and belt guard and motor sheave. 8. Wind motors 1/2 hp and larger for three phase, 60 hertz current unless shown otherwise on Drawings. B. Control Wiring: PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT (OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION) SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MOTORS AND DRIVES A. Install in units as required for complete installation. '3.02 START -UP AND OPERATING INSTRUCTION A. Service Representative: Furnish the services of factory trained and authorized service company, located within the community In which units are Installed. Service representative shall meet with and advise Contractor for Complete Construction on unit rigging and Installation. 1. Review and approve field modifications both In drawing form and in field during job start -up. Warranty shall not be affected by field modifications. 2. Check control components and wiring, dampers, motors, refrigerant circuits and electrical wiring of each unit before initial start -up. 3. Provide parts and labor as necessary to adjust unit rpm as directed by Owner's Independent air balance agency. C. Start -up and instruction: 1. Start -up units and supervise start -up of system with Contractor and OSR. 2. During and after start -up operation, service representative shall instruct Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance of the units, system, controls, and related components. 3. Provide instruction for required maintenance and supervision of equipment for best performance on a daily, weekly, monthly and annual basis. 4. Provide special wrenches and tools required to operate, adjust and repair units. END OF SECTION 15780 -5 TARGET STORES SECTION 15950 - CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and test the following: 1. Energy Management System. 2. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Controls. 3. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Equipment Temperature Controls. 4. Low voltage thermostats. B. Furnish only the following: 1. Lighting contactor cabinets. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The following separate contract work Is specified under Bid Pack 3: 1. Section 15780, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied Information - Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Equipment. 2. Section 15850 - Air handling equipment. 3. Section 15880 - Variable air volume boxes. 4. Section 16485 - installation of Contactor Cabinets. 5. Section 16510 - Lighting Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NEMA, "National Electric Manufacturer's Association ". B. NFPA -70, "National Electrical Code ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS) A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic Corporation (ALC'USA). B. The energy management system (EMS) Is a micro processor based programmable direct digital control (DDC) system capable of scheduled and optimum start /stop of equipment, demand limiting, day /night setback, duty cycling, trend logging, runtime accumulation, reports, and event initiated programs. C. Central Hardware: The central site located In Target Stores' headquarters office shall have Intervention control and shall monitor and compile data from each remote site. D. Remote Site Hardware: SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 1. Remote site hardware to consist of microprocessor based control modules, sensors, contactors, relays and network wiring to operate in a stand -alone configuration. 2. Gateway Control Module: The gateway control module in the EMS central control panel receives alarms and reports from modules In the local network, and communicates with the central site. 3. Control Modules: Control modules, area control modules and zone control modules provide direct digital control of equipment, local network communication, application software execution and calculations. 4. Network Communication Cable: Two conductor, No. 18 AWG, non - shielded with THHN /THWN Insulation. 5. Miscellaneous Devices: Provide all sensors, relays, contactors and devices required to perform all functions and sequences of control listed. 2.02 CONTACTOR CABINETS AND CONTACTORS A. Contactor Cabinets: Wall- mounted NEMA 1 enclosure sized In accordance with NFPA -70 to accommodate contactors scheduled on Drawings. B. Contactors: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Automatic Switch Company b. Square D Company 2. Provide NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held, 3 wire control. 3. Coll Operating Voltage: 120V 60 Hertz. 4. Contacts: 3 pole, 600V, 60 Hertz. Size as Indicated on Drawings with Input and output terminal screws. 2.03 LOW VOLTAGE THERMOSTATS A. Acceptable Manufacturer:. Accustat as manufactured by PSG industries. CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION (OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION) 15950 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 B. Designed for 24 -30 volt system. Maximum load rating to be 1 amp at 24 -30 VAC. Thermostat to be designed for multi -stage heating and have switches located beneath locking cover. 3.01 GENERAL PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Use fire resistive cable or wire In conduit where control wiring occurs In ceiling spaces used for transfer of environmental air. 3.02 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Provide rooftop HVAC unit "Start" and "Stop" control through EMS. B. EMS to determine demand for heating or cooling at zone temperature sensors and then control heating and cooling cycles of HVAC unit to satisfy demand of the sensors. Discharge air sensor allows EMS to sense the leaving air temperature of HVAC unit. C. Shut -off VAV: Microprocessor based zone control module to modulate pressure dependent zone damper assembly to maintain desired zone temperature. EMS to communicate with each zone control module to allow automatic heating and cooling change -over. D. Fan Powered VAV: Microprocessor based zone control module to modulate pressure dependent zone damper assembly to maintain desired zone temperature. EMS to communicate with each zone control module to allow automatic heating and cooling change -over. As space temperature drops, primary airflow decreases. The unit fan Is energized by a minimum position damper switch to supply primary air mixed with plenum air. A further decrease In space temperature energizes electric heat. E. Static Pressure Control: Microprocessor based zone control module to modulate pressure independent by -pass damper assembly to maintain nearly constant evaporator coil air flow. Locate static pressure sensor approximately 2/3 downstream In main supply air duct. F. Duct smoke detector to shut down rooftop HVAC unit when activated. G. EMS to accept Inputs from each HVAC unit for space temperature, discharge air temperature, fan status, common alarm and duct smoke detector. 3.03 CONSTANT VOLUME PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS A. Start and stop rooftop units through the EMS. Space temperature sensor for each unit to send a signal to the rooftop unit control panel Installed In each unit. EMS to stage heating and cooling through rooftop unit control panel as required to maintain desired space temperature setting. B. Duct smoke detector to shut down each system when activated. C. EMS to accept Inputs from each HVAC unit for space temperature, discharge air temperature, fan status, common alarm and the duct smoke detector. 3.04 TOILET /CONFERENCE ROOM EXHAUST A. Control fan through EMS. 3.05 ROOFTOP HVAC UNIT OUTDOOR AIR CONTROL TARGET STORES A. Upon unit start, outdoor air damper opens to minimum position (10% supply air volume). Outdoor air damper closes when unit stops. B. Provide EMS Interface with rooftop HVAC units as follows: 1. EMS to disable rooftop unit supplied enthalpy controllers. 2. EMS to monitor indoor and outdoor temperatures and humidities to control economizers of all rooftop HVAC units from one controller. 3. First stage cooling to be by outdoor air. 4. End switch on outdoor air damper to activate power relief fan. 5. A rise in space temperature to close outdoor air damper to minimum position and activate first stage of mechanical cooling. B. A further rise In space temperature to activate second stage of mechanical cooling where applicable. 7. The outdoor air damper can remain open during mechanical cooling If the outdoor air enthalpy Is less than 26 BTU /lb dry air or the temperature Is between 40 deg F and 70 deg F. 15950 -2 (OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION) CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION , . TARGET STORES .. . SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 '3.08 LIGHTING CONTROL A. Provide EMS Interface with lighting control as follows: 1. EMS to control and monitor :lights at sales floor, • stockroom .and marking /recelving. 2 . EMS to control only, valance lighting, display fixtures andlighting, building. s ecurity lights, building signage °and lighting at general and employee parking lots.,, B:, Sales floor lighting .to. be 100% on during store open .hours and 25x: on'.during night maintenance and stocking Rotate.25% night Operation among all ,sales f.loor. :Ilght fixtures:to allow even lamp wear. All other contacts are :0x or 100%; END OF SECTION CONTROLS AND >INSTRUMENTATI0 OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION 15950 TARGET STORES SECTION 15993 - AIR SYSTEMS TESTING ADJUSTING & 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing for the following heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems: 1. 2. 3. 1.02 RELATED WORK 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 1 - GENERAL Air handling equipment. Air distribution systems. Air exhaust systems. A. The following separate contract work Is specified under Bid Pack 3: 1. Sections 15850 and 15880 - Changes In pulleys, belts, dampers, and other components required to permit correct balancing. 2. Section 15950, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - supplied information - Controls and instrumentation. A. Contractor Qualifications: 1. Firm specializing In balancing and testing of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. Work shall be performed under direct supervision of a qualified heating and ventilating engineer employed by the air balance agency. 2. Submit documentation that air balance agency has successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and scope, and Is currently a certified member of the AABC. Comply with standards set forth by the AABC. 1.04 REFERENCES A. AABC, "Associated Air Balance Council." 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01300, Submittals, of Bid Pack 3 unless otherwise indicated. B. Certification: Submit- experience qualifications under "Quality Assurance ". C. Test Reports: Upon completion of systems to be tested and balanced, compile test data and submit seven complete copies to OSR for evaluation and approval. 1.06 SCHEDULING A. Schedule Work In cooperation with other trades, and comply with Project completion date. B. Alr balance and testing shall not begin until system has been completed and Is In full working order. Put heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment Into full operation and continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Submit, within 15 days after receipt of contract, seven copies of submittal data for the testing and balancing of the air conditioning, heating, and ventilating systems. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide an extended warranty of 180 days, after test and balance submittals have been accepted, during which time OSR, at his discretion, may request a recheck,• or resetting of any outlet, supply air fan, or exhaust fan as listed In test report. Provide technicians to assist OSR. in making tests he may require during this period of time. B. Provide services during warranty period at no cost to Owner. 3.02 TESTING PROCEDURES PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 A. Accurately calibrate and maintain In good working order all Instruments used. A. If requested, provide tests conducted In the presence of the OSR. B. Perform the following tests, and balance system In accordance with the following requirements: 1. Test and adjust blower rpm to design requirements. . Test and record motor full load amperes. AIR SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING A BALANCING (OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION) 15993 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 3 . Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design ofa at fans. 4. Test and record system static pressures at suction and discharge of fan, on both sides of filters and cooling coils, and at supply and return openings of all HVAC units. Provide sketch of unit indicating point of reading and value. 5. Test and adjust and record main supply, return and exhaust air ducts to proper design cfm. 6. Adjust zones to proper design cfm, supply, return and exhaust. 7. Determine and record duct leakage rate. Notify OSR If rate exceeds 5% of design CFM for any system. 8. Test and adjust and record each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design requirements. 9. Identify each grille, diffuser, and register as to location and area. 10. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers shall Include design fpm and actual fpm velocity and design cfm and actual cfm after adjustment. 11. In cooperation with the rooftop unit manufacturer, HVAC contractor, temperature control contractor, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as Indicated. Check controls for proper calibrations and list controls requiring adjustment by temperature oontrol contractor. 12. Set the manual balancing damper In the inlet duct to VAV boxes. Temperature control contractor shall set motorized damper In VAV boxes to full open for this procedure. 13. Provide or adjust minimum positioning linkage for fan powered VAV boxes. Minimum CFM shall be as scheduled. 14. Adjust diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts. 15. Test and adjust exhaust fan, supply fan and transfer fan associated with Food Service grease hood. Test hood enclosures to determine velocities across opening. Record results. 18. Test and adjust exhaust fans, transfer fans, and power roof ventilators to CFM requirements indicated. Record results. END OF SECTION TARGET STORES C. Notify OSR and appropriate trade and /or unit manufacturer's service representative of deficiencies discovered, and verify that corrective measures have been taken. D. After completion of testing, plug all holes drilled in ductwork for CFM measurements. Replace any ceiling tiles damaged as a result of testing procedures. 15993 -2 (OWNER SUPPLIED INFORMATION),AIR TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING TARGET STORES SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 DOCUMENT 00320 - CONSTRUCTION COST BREAKDOWN TARGET STORES A DIVISION OF DAYTON HUDSON CORPORATION 33 SOUTH SIXTH STREET P.O. BOX 1392 MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55440 -1392 PROJECT: CONTRACT: CONTRACTOR: DATE: Contractor: Fill in prices for items relating to this work. Do not leave any space unfilled - mark those not related to your work "NA." CSI CODE DESCRIPTION OF WORK SITEWORK Utility Fees 01063 Other Regulatory Fees 02050 Demolition TOTAL SITEWORK CSI CODE DESCRIPTION OF WORK BUILDING EARTH WORK /SPECIAL FOUNDATION COST COST CONCRETE TOTAL BLDG. EARTH /SPEC. FDN. Rein orce. Bui sing ass 03318 Buildins Sidewalks and Curbs UNIT MASONRY TOTAL CONCRETE I II Unit Masonry TOTAL UNIT MASONRY METALS /STRUCTURAL STEEL 05500 Metal Fabrications TOTAL METALS STRUCTURAL STEEL CONSTRUCTION COST BREAKDOWN 00320 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 CSI CODE DESCRIPTION OF WORK WOOD /PLASTICS 0 Rou ar .entr 06'00 Arc itectura Woo•wor THERMAL /MOISTURE PROTECTION DOORS WINDOWS 08200 08700 08800 093 0 09510 09.51 09680 09900 09956 PLUMBING SYSTEM 15450 00320 -2 TOTAL WOOD /PLASTICS Building Insulation rane Roof in 07210 07500 07600 F as in• S eet Meta 07900 Joint Sea in Mem TOTAL THERMAL /MOISTURE PROTECTION eta Doors Frames Wood and Plastic Doors Hardware Glazin TOTAL DOORS /WINDOWS FINISHES G •sum Boar Ceramic Acoustica Res Ti e Cei in lent F oorin Caret Insta ation Painting WaTT Coverings TOTAL FINISHES SPECIALTIES EQUIPMENT /FURNISHINGS 1 0 Toilet Partitions 10520 Fire Extinguishers 10800 Toilet Accessories TARGET STORES COST TOTAL SPECIALTIES Basic Bui •tn P um•ing Plumbing Fixtures TOTAL PLUMBING SYSTEM FURNISHINGS CONSTRUCTION COST BREAKDOWN TARGET STORES CSI CODE DESCRIP F ORK FIRE PROTECTION Fire Pum HEATING /VENTILATING /AIR CONDITIONING nit Heaters 15780 HVAG Rooftop Unit Installation 15870 Power and Gravity Ventilators 15880 Ductwork System /Air Inlets and Outlets ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .1 1614 Connections to Store Fixtures an DisI ays 6 :0 E ectrica Connections to Equipment 16400 Service /Distribution 16425 Switch•ear /Panels 16 10 Interior Bui 'ing i ting 16520 Exterior Buildin Li.htin 16620 20 16740 16890 SUMMARY 5301 Fire Protection vstem TOTAL FIRE PROTECTION TOTAL HEAT /VENT AIR CONDITIONING Basic Materia s Met oss Generator S Fire A arm S istems Te e• one E ectr ca E ectr c Heaters Dryers T TAL C N TRU stem SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 CT TOTAL ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SITEW RK SUB -TOTAL BUTITUNTSWTOTAL 00500 ONTRA TsR FEE 00600 O NTRACTOR S B NDS 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS HON CONSTRUCTION COST BREAKDOWN END OF DOCUMENT 00320 -3 TARGET STORES SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 DOCUMENT 00330 - RECEIPT AND WAIVER OF LIEN RIGHTS FROM: (Contractor) TO: (Owner) PROJECT: (Name) _(Location) 1. The undersigned does hereby waive, release and surrender any claim, lien or right of lien resulting from labor, skill, and /or materials, subcontract work, equipment or other work, rent, services or supplies heretofore furnished in and for the construction, improvement, alteration or additions to the above described project prior to the date hereof. 2. This release is given for and in consideration of the sum of $ other good and valuable consideration received in hand from and 3. In further consideration of the payment made as above set forth, and to induce the Owner to make said payment, the undersigned agrees to defend and hold harmless the Owner or Lender, and /or the principal and surety from any claims hereinafter made by the undersigned and /or its material suppliers, subcontractors or employees, servants, agents or assigns of such persons against the project. 4. It is acknowledged that the designation of the above project constitutes an adequate description of the property and improvements for which the undersigned has received consideration for this release. 5. This instrument shall constitute a full, final and complete release of all rights and claims of the undersigned, for the work completed to date. DATED this day of , 19 . STATE OF COUNTY OF By ZOf"ficer) Address (Partner The foregoing receipt and waiver of Lien Rights was subscribed and sworn to me this day of , 19, by as T t e)o Company name) as a true and complete act of said 515Tilion. WITNESS MY HAND AND OFFICIAL SEAL. My Commission expires NOTARY PUBLIC, in and for County, END OF DOCUMENT RECEIPT AND WAIVER OF LIEN RIGHTS 00330 -1 TARGET STORES DOCUMENT 00700 — GENERAL CONDITIONS The "General Conditions: of the Contract: for Construction ",,.'A IA Document ; 'Thirteenth Edition, August 1978, Is :part of this Contract and Is incorporated as fuliy >.as If there, set, forth. Copies of the `.General Condit Ions _ may be examined at the off of the Architect/Engineer C OND TARGET STORES DOCUMENT 00900 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, Thirteenth Edition August 1978. Where any Article of the General Conditions Is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph, or Clause thereof Is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph, or Clause shall remain In effect. ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1..1 DEFINITIONS Add the following Subparagraphs: 1.1.5 Bulletins: Written or graphic instruments prepared by the Architect and Issued by the Owner's Site Representative (OSR) after the execution of the Contract. Bulletins modify or Interpret the Contract Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Items of work described In a Bulletin shall become a part of the Contract Documents only upon the Issuance of a Change Order authorizing such changes In the Work. 1.1.6 Protect Manual: The volume or volumes containing the bidding requirements, sample forms and certain of the Contract Documents such as the Conditions of the Contraot and the Specifications. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT Add the following Subparagraphs: 1.2.5 The Specifications contain incomplete sentences. Words which do not contribute to clear and concise directions have been omitted. ( "The Contractor Shall ", "Shall Be" "As Noted on the Drawings ", and similar words). Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by Inference. The words "Shall Be" and "Shall" may be indicated by a colon (:) i.e. "Color: Brown ". The Inferred subject of clauses or sentences starting with a verb shall be the Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier responsible for the Work of the section In which It occurs. 1.2.6 "Provide ", "Provided ", shall mean furnish and Install and includes, without limitation, labor, materials, equipment, transportation, services, and other items required to complete the specified work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 1.2.7 "Install ", "Installed ", shall mean: Unload, unpack, and uncrate materials or equipment; remove packing materials from the Site; store, protect, assemble, move to area of use; set In place and connect to services, unless otherwise specified. ARTICLE 2 - ARCHITECT 2.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Delete the second and third sentences of Subparagraph 2.2.2 and substitute the following: The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner when requested by the Owner. Delete Subparagraph 2.2.3. Delete Subparagraph 2.2.8. Change Subparagraph 2.2.7 to read as follows: 2.2.7 When requested by the Owner, the Architect will be the Interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and advise the Owner In evaluating the performance thereunder by both the Owner and the Contractor. Delete Subparagraph 2.2.8. Change the second sentence of Subparagraph 2.2.10 to read as follows: In his capacity as Interpreter and advisor, he will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both the Owner and the Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for the result of any interpretation or decision rendered In good faith in such capacity. Change Subparagraph 2.2.11 to read as follows: 2.2.11 if the Owner concurs, the Architect's decisions In matters relating to artistic effect will be final If consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Change Subparagraph 2.2.12 to read as follows: 2.2.12 Any claim, dispute or other matter In question between the Contractor and the Owner referred to the Architect, except those relating to artistic effect as provided In Subparagraph 2.2.11 and except to those which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided In Subparagraphs 9.9.4 and 9.9.5, shall be subject to arbitration upon the written mutual agreement of both parties. 00900 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 Change the first sentence of Subparagraph 2.2.14 to read as follows: 2.2.14 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon those Contractor's submittals so indicated in Section 01300, such as Shop Drawings and Product Data, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and the information given in the Contract Documents. Delete Subparagraph 2.2.15. Change Subparagraph 2.2.16 to read as follows: 2.2.18 The Architect, when requested by the Owner, will assist the Owner In conducting inspections to determine the date of Substantial Completion and Final Completion. Change Subparagraph 2.2.18 to read as follows: 2.2.18 The Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as the Owner's representative during construction as set forth In the Contract Documents will not be modified or extended without written consent of the Owner and the Architect which will be shown to the Contractor. Add the following Subparagraph: 2.2.20 All instructions, interpretations and decisions of the Architect shall be forwarded to the Contractor through the OSA. ARTICLE 3 - OWNER 3.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER Delete Subparagraph 3.2.1. Add the following clauses to Subparagraph 3.2.3.: .1 The Owner will secure and pay for the general building permit for the Project including work of separate contractors, permit fees, plan check fees, and other fees customarily charged for the general building permit. .2 The Owner will pay for the Certificate of Occupancy for the Project. Add the following Paragraph: 3.5 OWNER'S SITE REPRESENTATIVE (OSR) 3,5.1 The Owner will provide a Site Representative . who shall represent the Owner. The Owner's and Architect's Instructions to the. Contractor will be issued through the OSR. 00900 -2 TARGET STORES 3.5.2 The OSR will at all times have access to the Work wherever It Is In preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access. 3.5.3 The OSR will approve the Contractor's Application for Payment as provided In Subparagraph 9.5.1. 3.5.4 The OSR will have authority to reject work which does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever, in his opinion, he considers It necessary or advisable for the implementation of the Intent of the Contract Documents, he will have authority to require special Inspection or testing of the Work In accordance with Subparagraph 7.7.2 whether or not such Work be then fabricated installed or completed. However, neither the OSR's authority to act under this Subparagraph 3.5.4, nor any decision made by him In good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority, will give rise to any duty or responsibility of the OSR. to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any of their agents or employees, or any other person performing any of the Work. 3.5.5 The OSR will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and with the Information given In the Contract Documents. Such action will be taken with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The OSR's approval of a specific Item shall not Indicate approval of an assembly of which the item Is a component. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples for Owner - supplied equipment will be forwarded to the Contractor by the OSR. Refer to Section 01300 for submittal procedures, and Section 01600 for additional Information regarding Owner - supplied material and equipment submittals. 3.5.6 The OSR will issue Change Orders In accordance with Article 12, and will have authority to order minor changes In the Work as provided In Subparagraph 12.4.1. 3.5.7 The OSR will schedule and conduct periodic project meetings at the site with the Contractor. 3.5.8 The OSR will conduct Inspections to determine the dates of Substantial Completion and Final Completion, will receive written warranties . and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor and will approve the Contractor's final Application for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 9.9. SUPPLEMENTARY'CONDITIONS TARGET STORES ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACTOR 4.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Change the second sentence of Subparagraph 4.2.1 to read as follows: 4.2.1 The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or the Architect for any damage resulting from any such error, inconsistency or omission In the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs, delays and damages resulting from his failure to immediately report any such errors, Inconsistencies or omissions that he may discover. 4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Change Subparagraph 4.3.3 to read as follows: 4.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved from his obligations to perform the Work In accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of the Architect in his administration of the Contract, by the activities or duties of the OSR, or by Inspections, tests or approvals required or performed under Paragraph 7.7 by persons other than the Contractor. 4.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES Change Subparagraph 4.7.1 to read as foliols: 4.7.1 Except as provided In Subparagraph3.2.3, the Contraotor shall secure and pay for construction permits other than the general building permit, and for all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and Inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required at the time the bids are received. 4.10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE Change Subparagraph 4.10.1 to read as follows: 4.10.1 The Contractor with the assistance of the Owner shall develop and maintain a Construction Progress Schedule consisting of a computer generated network schedule or another scheduling method approved by the Owner, and shall update and distribute the schedule as required to Inform all parties of the status of the Project. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 4.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE Change Subparagraph 4.11.1 to read as follows: The Contractor shall maintain at the Site for the Owner, one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, In good order, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to the Architect and the Owner and shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 4.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES Add the following to Paragraph 4.12.5: The Contractor for Complete Construction shall obtain from the Owner, Shop Drawings and Product Data of all Owner - supplied equipment. He shall review and return a copy to the Owner Indicating comments and approval. Approval shall represent that field conditions have been, or will be, coordinated to receive the Owner supplied equipment. Change Subparagraphs 4.12.6, 4.12.7 and 4.12.8 to read as follows: 4.12.6 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's or OSR's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples under Subparagraphs 2.2.14 or 3.5.5 unless the Contractor has specifically Informed the Architect or OSR in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Architect or OSR has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions In the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Architect's or OSR's approval thereof. 4.12.7 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or noted on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect or OSR on previous submittals. 4.12.8 No portion of the Work requiring submission of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by the Architect or OSR as provided In Subparagraphs 2.2.14 and 3.5.5. All such portions of the Work shall be In accordance with approved submittals. SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 Add the following to Paragraph 4.12: 4.12.9 The Contractor shall furnish copies of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and samples to other separate contractors and Subcontractors as may be necessary to coordinate their Work, or upon their request. 4.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK Change Subparagraph 4.14.1 to read as follows: 4.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or make its several parts fit together properly, except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. Add the following to Paragraph 4.14: 4.14.3 Cutting shall be accurately located and neatly done. Unnecessary cutting shall be avoided. 4.14.4 Patching shall be done by skilled mechanics experienced In the particular type of work Involved. Patching work shall conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, and where not specified, Work shall conform to the highest standards of the trade. Finished patching work shall be acceptable to the contractor whose work has been patched. 4.14.5 The Contractor shall leave all holes, chases and other openings In his work required by other Contractors for the installation of their work, provided such openings are accurately located by the party requiring them before the execution of the construction work. The Contractor shall afford other Contractors a reasonable opportunity to locate such openings. 4.16 COMMUNICATIONS Change Subparagraph 4.16.1 to read as follows: 4.16.1 Except as directed otherwise, the Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Product Data directly to the Architect. The Contractor shall direct all other communications to the Architect or the Owner through the OSR. 4.18 INDEMNIFICATIONS TARGET STORES TARGET STORES ARTICLE 6 - WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY Change the first sentence of Subparagraph 8.2,2 to read as follows: 6.2.2 If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the Work of the Owner or any other separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the Work, promptly report to the OSR any apparent discrepancies or defects In such other work that render It unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Change the second sentence of Subparagraph 6.2.5 to read as follows: If such separate contractor sues or initiates an arbitration proceeding against the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Contractor's expense, and If any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy It. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP Change Subparagraph 8.3.1 to read as follows: 6.3.1 if a dispute arises between the Contractor and separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up as required by Paragraph 4.15, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the contractors responsible therefore as the OSR shall determine to be Just. ARTICLE 7 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND Change Subparagraph 7.5.1 to read as follows: 7.5.1 The Owner shall have the right, prior to the execution of the Contract, to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder. If such bonds are required, they shall be written In the form of Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond, AIA Document A311, February 1970 edition, and each bond shall be written In the full amount of the Contract Sum. 7.5.2 The bonds shall be written with such sureties secured through the Contractor's usual sources as may be agreeable to the parties. In addition, the sureties shall be authorized to conduct surety business In the state In which the Project Is located, and the sureties and any reinsuring companies shall be listed In the current Department of the Treasury Circular No.570 with an underwriting limitation equal to or greater than the penal sum of the bonds to be furnished. 7.5.3 The Contractor shall require the Attorney -in -Fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of his power of attorney. 7.7 TESTS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 Delete Subparagraphs 7.7.1, 7.7.2, 7.7.3 and 7.7.4 In their entirety and substitute the following: 7.7.1 If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any portion of the Work to be Inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the OSR timely notice of its readiness so the OSR may observe such Inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such Inspections, tests or approvals conducted by publio authorities. Except as otherwise provided, the Owner will engage an independent testing agency and bear all costs of other inspections, tests, and approvals required by the Contract Documents. .1 Where proof of compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents such as manufacturer's certificates, manufacturer's and fabricator's tests, Independent laboratory tests and inspections, and other data is required by the Contract Documents before materials, products or equipment may be used In the Work, the Contractor shall bear all costs for such certificates,tests, inspections and other data. The Owner will bear all costs of soils engineering services. .2 Where preliminary tests and Inspections for design purposes such as concrete mix designs are required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs for such tests and inspections. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00900 -5 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 .3 Where initial test or Inspection reveals a failure of the Work to comply with requirements of the Contraot Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs of additional tests and Inspections necessary to determine compliance, Including compensation for Architect's additional services made necessary by such failure. 7.7.2 If the OSR determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing, or approval which Subparagraph 7.7.1 does not Include, he will instruct the Contractor'to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give notice as provided In Subparagraph 7.7.1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay all costs thereof, Including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such failure; otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 7.7.3 Reports of tests, inspections and approvals performed by the independent testing agency engaged by the Owner will be submitted to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor directly from the testing agency. All other required certificates of Inspection, testing or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered by him to the OSR. 7.7.4 if the OSR Is to observe the Inspections, tests or approvals required by the Contraot Documents, he will do so promptly and where practicable, at the source of supply. 7.7.5 The Contractor shall make all arrangements, furnish all samples and materials to be tested, and perform, all related work necessary for the Inspections, tests and approvals of the Work required to be paid by the Contractor under Subparagraphs 7.7.1 and 7.7,2. 7.7.8 The Owner will furnish all samples and and perform all related Inspections, tests and required to be paid Subparagraphs 7.7.1 and 7.8 INTEREST Delete Paragraph 7.8. make all arrangements, materials to be tested, work necessary for the approvals of the Work by the Owner under 7.7.2. 7.9 ARBITRATION TARGET STORES Add the following to Subparagraph 7.9.1: However, this agreement to arbitrate shall be specifically limited to only those matters in question to which both the Owner and the Contractor mutually agree to submit to arbitration. Add the following to Subparagraph 7.9.2: 7.9.2 Delete the period In the last line and add: ", as determined pursuant to Subparagraph 8.1.3." Add the following Paragraph 7:10 to Article 7: 7.10 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 7.10.1 The Owner shall have the:right to install his furnishings and equipment within the Project prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Such installation shall not constitute occupancy or use by the Owner. 7.10.2 The Owner shall have the right to use or occupy the Project, or .a portion thereof, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work under the following conditions: .1 The Owner shall give the Contractor. at least ten days prior written notice of his Intention to use or. occupy the Project, or a portion thereof. Prior to use or occupancy, { the. OSR accompanied . by the Contractor: will conduct an Inspection of the area to be used or occupied; and ' based .r on this inspection, the OSR. will prepare a list of Work to be completed or corrected. Prior to use or occupancy, the Owner and the Contractor shall agree In writing'on their Individual responsibilities for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the ':Work and insurance for the area to be used or occupied. .2 The insurance company or companies providing the property insurance required by Paragraph' 11.3 shall consent to the use or occupancy by ,endorsement prior to such use'or occupancy. After occupancy, the Owner will allow the Contractor reasonable 'access to the occupied area to complete and Correct the Work. TARGET STORES .4 Any claims for an adjustment In the Contract. Sum or an extension of the Contract Time because of the Owner's use or occupancy shall be made In writing to the OSR prior to such use or occupancy. .5 The Contractor shall not be held responsible for any damage to the occupied part of the Project resulting from the. Owner's use or occupancy. .6 Use or occupancy by the Owner shall not -be deemed to constitute a waiver of existing claims In behalf of the Owner or Contractor against each other. ARTICLE .8 - TIME 8:1 DEFINITIONS Add the :following Clause to Subparagraph 8.1.3: '8.1.3.1 Pursuant to 'Subparagraph 8.1.3.as " supplemented hereinafter as between the Owner and the Contractor: as to all acts or failures . to act occurring prior to the relevant Date of' 'Substantial Completion; any applicable statute . of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued'ln any and all. events not later than such Date of Substantial Completion; as to all acts or failure to aot occurring subsequent to • the' relevant Date of Substantial Completion, • any .applicable statute .of limitations shall commence to, run and any 'alleged cause of action .shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than „'the date of Issuance of the final Certlficate'for Payment. 8.2 'PROGRESS'AND COMPLETION Add the following to Subparagraph 8.2.2:. The Contractor shall schedule and perform his Work In 'accordance • with the Construction' Progress Schedule established .Joint,ly with the Owner as provided In Paragraph 4.10. SOUTHCENTER SR/DO T-627 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME Change Subparagraphs 8.3.1 and 8.3.2 to read as follows: 8.3.1 If the Contractor Is delayed at any time In the progress of' the. Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or the Architect, or by any•employee of either, or by.'any•separate • contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes •. ordered In the Work, 'or by .labor disputes, :fire, unusual delay in transportation, adverse ••• weather conditions not reasonably • ..anticlpatable, unavoidable casualties or.any •causes'beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay- authorized .by -the • Owner pending arbitration, or by any other cause which.the Owner determines may Justify the delay,•then the Contract Time ••shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as.the OSR may determine: 8.3.2 Any claim for extension of time shall be made In writing to the OSR not more than twenty days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. In the case of a continuing delay only one claim Is necessary. The Contractor shall provide an estimate on the probable effect of such delay on' the progress . of the Work. Add the following Paragraph 8.4'to Article 8: 8.4 DAMAGES FOR DELAY 8.4.1. The Contractor shall bo responsible for damages Incurred by the Owner and any separate contractors for delay, resulting from the Contractor's, fallure to complete the Work within the Contract Time or resulting from the progress of the Work failing "to conform to the Contractor's Progress Schedule. SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Change Paragraph 9.2 to read as follows: 9.2.1 The Contractor shall prepare a Schedule of Values for his work including quantities, when required, and submit two copies to the Owner for approval within 10 days of the date of the fully executed Contract, Letter of Intent, or Notice to Proceed, whichever Is earliest. The Schedule of Values shall be submitted on the Owner's form, "Construction Cost Breakdown," a copy of which Is Included In this Project Manual as Document 00320. The Contractor shall submit such data as required to substantiate the correctness of the schedule. The Contractor's fee shall be listed separately. Round off figures to the nearest ten dollars. The total of all values on the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract Sum. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Change Subparagraph 9.3.1 to read as follows: 9.3.1 Prior to date for each progress payment established In Owner /Contractor Agreement, the Contractor shall submit to the OSR a rough draft of the Itemized Application for Payment, supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner may require, and reflecting retainage, if any. The Application for Payment shall be made on Application and Certificate for Payment, AIA Document G702, and Continuation Sheet, AIA Document G703, April 1978 Edition, and shall contain the same Items and sequence as the Schedule of Values. Submit three notarized copies. Add the following Paragraph: 9.3.4 The Contractor shall submit his lien waiver covering prior payments with the second and each subsequent Application for Payment. Also, the Contractor shall submit lien waivers from Subcontractors and major material suppliers covering prior payments with the third and each subsequent Application for Payment. The lien waivers shall be on the Owner's form, a copy of which Is bound In this Project Manual In the Document 00330 series of forms. 00900-8 . . 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT TARGET STORES Change Subparagraph 9.4.1 to read as follows: 9.4.1 The OSR, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, shall either approve the Application for Payment for such amount as the OSR determines Is properly due or notify the Contractor In writing his reasons for withholding his approval as provided In Subparagraph 9.8.1. A copy of the approved Application for Payment shall be given to the Contractor. Delete Paragraph 9.4.2. 9.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS Change Subparagraph 9.5.1 to read as follows: 9.5.1 The Owner will make payment to the Contractor within 30 days after receipt from and in the amount approved by the OSR, less any retainage. Change Subparagraph 9.5.3 to read as follows: 9.5.3 The OSR may, on request and at his discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, If practicable, Information regarding the percentages of completion or the amounts applied for by the Contractor and the action taken thereon by the OSR on account of Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.8 PAYMENTS WITHHELD Change Subparagraph 9.6.1 to read as follows: 9.6.1 The OSR may decline to approve the Contractor's Application for Payment In whole or In part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, and he shall notify the Contractor in writing of his action.' The OSR may also nullify the whole or any part of any Application for Payment previously approved to such extent as may be necessary in his :opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: .1 defective Work not remedied, .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment, .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance, of the. Contract Sum, .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TARGET STORES .6 reasonable evidence that tho Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work In accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT Change Subparagraph 9.7.1 to read as follows: • 9.7.1 If the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established In the Contract Documents any amount approved by the OSR or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days written notice to the Owner, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Change Subparagraphs 9.8.1 and 9.8.2 to read as follows: 9.8.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a designated portion thereof which Is acceptable to the Owner, Is substantially complete as defined In Subparagraph 8.1.3, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the OSR a list of items to be completed or corrected. The failure to Include any Items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the OSR on the basis of an Inspection determines that the Work or designated portion thereof Is substantially complete, he will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion, shall state the responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall complete the Items listed therein. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided In the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and the Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them In such Certificate. 9.8.2 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and approval by the OSR, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment In retalnage, If any, for such Work or portion thereof, as provided In the Contract Documents. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 9.9 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT Change Subparagraph 9.9.1 to read as follows: 9.9.1 Upon receipt of'written notice that the Work Is ready for final Inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the OSR assisted by the Architect will promptly make such Inspection and when the OSR finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the OSR will promptly approve the Contractor's final Application for Payment. Change the first sentence of Subparagraph 9.9.2 to read as follows: 9.9.2 Neither the final payment nor the remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the OSR (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other Indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or his property may In any way be otherwise satisfied, (2) consent of surety, If any, to final payment and (3), If required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and In such form as may be designated by the Owner. Change Subparagraph 9.9.3 to read as follows: 9.9.3 if, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof Is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by the Issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected Is less than the retalnage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and If bonds have been furnished as provided In Paragraph 7.5, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the OSR prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that It shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 00900 -9 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Delete Subparagraphs 11.1.1 thru 11.1.4 and substitute the following: 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, In a company or companies licensed to do business In the state in which the Project is located, such insurance for worker's compensation, comprehensive general liability and automobile liability In accordance with Subparagraph 11.1.2 below. Such Insurance shall protect the Contractor from claims which may arise out of or result from the operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than any limits of liability stated, or required by law whichever Is greater, Including contractual liability insurance as applicable to the Contractor's obligations herein, and specifically endorsed to include coverage for indemnity agreement In Paragraph 4.18. Each Contractor shall maintain the following Insurance coverage and minimum limits of liability with amount of all coverages Indicated on the certificates which are to be filed In duplicate with OSR and Owner: A. 1. Workmen's compensation statutory. 2. Employer's liability $100,000 per accident. B. Comprehensive general and automobile liability: Bodily Injury $1,000,000 per occurrence. Property damage $1,000,000 per occurrence. 1. Independent contractors contingent liability or, Owner's protective liability. 2. Products /completed operations coverage to be kept In force two years after acceptance of Work by the Owner and Architect or throughout guarantee periods, whichever Is longer. 3. "XCU" hazard endorsement covering building collapse, damage, blasting, explosion, underground hazards, etc. 4. Contractual liability endorsement to cover indemnity agreement as under Paragraph 4.18 and Subparagraph 11.1.2. 6. "Personal Injury" endorsement. 8. "Broad Form" property damage endorsement. 11.1.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for approval, before commencing the Work, evidence of the above required insurance, In duplicate, on Owner's form Certificate of Insurance. This form will be furnished by the Owner and will contain Certification by the insurance companies that such Insurance shall not be cancelled, non - renewed, or materially changed without 30 days prior written notification to Owner. If the Owner Is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such Insurance and to so notify the Owner, the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE TARGET STORES Delete Subparagraphs 11.3.1 thru 11,3.9 and substitute the following: 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner will purchase and maintain property Insurance upon the entire Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall Include the Interests of the Owner, the Architect, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub - Subcontractors In the. Work and shall insure against the perils included In a standard "All Risk" policy. The policy deductible will be assumed by the Owner. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the Work stored off the site or In transit: when such portions of the Work are to be Included In an Application for Payment under Subparagraph 9.3.2. 11.3.2 The policy will cover 100% of the building Insurance value, Including Items of labor and materials connected therewith, whether In or adjacent to the structure Insured, materials In place or to be used as part of the permanent construction, Including surplus materials, shanties, protective fences, bridges, or temporary structures, miscellaneous materials and supplies Incident to the Work, and such scaffolding, stagings towers, forms, and equipment as are not owned or rented by the Contractor, the cost of which Is included in the cost of the Work. 11.3.3 Thls Insurance does not cover any tools owned by the mechanics, any tools, equipment, scaffolding, stagings, towers, and forms owned or rented by the Contractor, the capital value of which Is not Included In the cost of the Work, or structures erected for housing the workmen. 00900 -10 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TARGET STORES 11.3.4 Any Insured loss Is to be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the Owner as trustee for the Insureds, as their Interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any Insurance monies received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall require each Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub - Subcontractors in similar manner. 11.3.5 The Owner will furnish.a certificate of Insurance to the Contractor upon request. ARTICLE 12 - CHANGES IN THE WORK 12.1 CHANGE ORDERS Change Subparagraph 12.1.1 to read as follows: 12.1.1 A Change Order Is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner, Issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change In the Work or an adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement herewith, Including the adjustment In the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Add the following to Subparagraph 12.1.4: The cost of a change determined under the methods in clauses 12.1.3.1, 12.1.3.3 and 12.1.3.4 shall Include all costs direotly related to the change, and the Contractor shall Itemize these costs and provide appropriate supporting data as may be necessary to establish their correctness. All Indirect costs whether Incurred on or off site shall be Included In the Contractor's overhead. Add the following to Paragraph 12.1: 12.1.8 In the case of Work authorized under clauses 12.1.3.1 and 12.1.3.3, when applicable and accepted by the Owner a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit shall be the percentage fees proposed by the Contractor In his .Bid and Included in the Agreement. 12.3 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST: SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 Change Subparagraphs 12.3.1 and 12.3.2 to read as follows: 12.3.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an Increase in the Contract Sum he shall give the OSR written notice thereof within twenty days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the. Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work except in an emergency endangering life or property In which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Paragraph 10.3. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. If the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree on the amount of the adjustment In the Contract Sum, It shall be determined by the Architect. Any change In the Contract Sum resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order. 12.3.2 If the Contractor claims that additional cost Is Involved because of, but not limited to, (1) any order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Paragraph 3.3 where the Contractor was not at fault, (2) any written order for a minor change In the Work Issued pursuant to Paragraph 12.4, or (3) failure of payment by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 9.7, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Subparagraph 12.3.1. 12.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK: Change Subparagraph 12.4.1 to read as follows: 12.4.1 The OSR will have authority to order minor . changes In the Work not involving an adjustment In the. Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by Owner's field directive, and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. ARTICLE 13 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK Change Subparagraph 13.1.1 to read as follows: 13.1.1 If any portion of the Work should be covered contrary to the request of the OSR or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, It shall, If required In writing by the OSR, be uncovered for his observation and shall be replaced at the 'Contractor's expense. SUPPLEMENTARY. CONDITIONS 00900 -11 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 Change the first sentence of Subparagraph 13.1.2 to read as follows: 13.1.2 If any other portion of the Work has been covered which the OSR has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, the OSR may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. Change Subparagraph 13.2.1 to read as follows: 13.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by the OSR as defective or as falling to conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, • Installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work. Change Subparagraph 13.2.5 to read as follows: 13.2.5 If the Contractor does not proceed with the correction of such defective or non- conforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the OSR, the Owner may remove It and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may upon ten additional days written notice sell such Work at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs that should have been borne by the Contractor. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which the Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR Change Subparagraph 14.1.1 to read as follows: 14.1.1 If the Work Is stopped for a period of thirty days under an order of any court or other public authority having Jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government, such as a declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of the Contraotor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor, or If the Work should be stopped for a period of thirty days by the Contractor because the Owner has not made payment thereon as provided In paragraph 9.7, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days written notice to the Owner, terminate the 00900 -12 Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, Including reasonable profit and damages. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER Change Subparagraphs 14.2.1 and 14.2.2 to read as follows: 14.2.1 If the Contractor Is adjudged bankrupt, or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or If a receiver Is appointed on account of his Insolvency, or If he persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time Is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or If he falls to make prompt payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having Jurisdiction, or otherwise Is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract Documents, then the Owner may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his surety, If any, seven days written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work Is finished. 14.2.2 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or to the Owner, as the case may be, shall survive the termination of the Contract. END OF DOCUMENT TARGET STORES SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TARGET STORES SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF THE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Project Identification and Contract summary. B. Work awarded separately. C. Owner - supplied material and equipment. D. Project scheduling and coordination. E. Contractor use of premises and existing facilities. F. Owner occupancy. G. Inspections, testing, and approvals. 1.02 PROJECT A. Project consists of construction of: 1.03 OWNER TARGET SPOKE REGION DISTRICT OFFICE TARGET STORE T -627 Tukwila, Washington A. Owner of Project Is Target Stores, a Division of Dayton Hudson Corporation, 33 South Sixth Street, P.O. Box 1392, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55440 -1392. 1.04 ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS A. Architects and Engineers for Project are RSP Architects, Ltd. in association with Setter, Leach, & Lindstrom, Inc., Architects, Engineers, and Planners, 120 First Avenue North, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55401; Telephone (612) 339 -0313. 1.05 CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Owner will award a Contract for Complete Construction to Include General, Mechanical, and Electrical Construction Work. 1.08 WORK AWARDED SEPARATELY A. Contract documents for work awarded separately may be examined at the office of Target Stores. B. Work which will be executed prior to, or In conjunction with, work under these documents may be included for reference in Section 00215, Owner Supplied information. SUMMARY OF THE WORK 1.07 FUTURE CONTRACTS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Owner reserves the right to award future separate contracts for Project. 1.08 OWNER SUPPLIED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 01600, Material and Equipment, and individual Specification Sections for Owner supplied items affecting each unit of Work. B. Certain Owner supplied items require installation as Work of this Contract. C. Certain other items furnished and installed by Owner are not in Contract, but have requirements In Specification Sections and Drawings for related work, including hook up, rough -in services, blocking, preparatory work to receive items, or anchorage devices. D. Drawings may show items furnished and Installed by Owner requiring no work under this Contract except for cooperation with Owner's workers or separate contractors. 1.09 OWNER'S PROJECT MILESTONE DATES A. Project Milestone Dates will be determined and announced by the Target Project Manager prior to bid due date. 1.10 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES A. Refer to Document 00900, Supplementary Conditions, Articles 3 and 4, for securing and payment of permits and fees. 1.11 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Schedule periodic coordination meetings to discuss progress, coordination between Contractor and Owner's separate contractors, and problems that may have arisen. Each contractor performing Work at Site shall attend each meeting. Subcontractors and material suppliers shall attend upon request of OSR. Subcontractors, material suppliers, and other interested parties may attend. 1.12 INSPECTION OF WORK NOT IN CONTRACT A. Inspect work not In contract which Is to receive or Is adjacent to work of Contract before commencing Work. Do not proceed until conditions which would result In an inferior installation are satisfactorily corrected. Commencing Work: shall be construed as acceptance of work not In Contract as satisfactory to receive Work. SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 1.13 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner and Store Manager. Confine operations and storage of material to areas assigned by Owner. B. Conduct operations to permit public access to existing attached and /or adjacent businesses occupied or under construction during the term of this contract. C Cooperate with Owner and Store Manager In scheduling, executing Work and Site usage. Notify Owner and Store Manager as far as possible In advance of commencing Work which may Interfere with use of attached and /or adjacent buildings. D. Maintain public walks, driveways, and entrances In safe condition, free of equipment, material, and debris. 1.14 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner will occupy exiting store and Intends to remain in full operation during this Work. B. Refer to Document 00900, Supplementary Conditions, Article 7, for requirements for Owner use or occupancy prior to Substantial Completion of Project. C. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. 1.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. Remove, cut, fit, and /or patch old work as required to join new Work to existing attached and /or adjacent construction. B. Remove and replace existing construction to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced as a result of Work and Is unsuitable for use intended. C. Patch existing defective or Incomplete surfaces caused or exposed by work to match adjacent materials. Perform patching using skilled mechanics experienced In type of Work Involved. Conform to standards of Contract Documents where applicable; where not specified, conform to highest standards of the trade. D. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, underpinning and support during demolition, cutting, remodeling and new construction as necessary for execution of the Work and protection of persons and property. Provide protective coverings and enclosures necessary to prevent damage to existing construction to remain. 01010 -2 TARGET STORES E. Salvage and material not specifically designated otherwise shall become property of Contractor, and shall be removed promptly from Site. Remove trash, debris and other waste material promptly from Site. 1.16 WORK ON OTHER PROPERTY A. Correct damage to existing property on or adjacent to Site, including, but not limited to, lawns, walks, pavement, roadways, structures, and utilities cut or damaged by construction and not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement during construction. B. Construct Work occurring on public property according to governing laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of public authorities having jurisdiction. 1.17 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND APPROVALS A. Required Inspections, tests, and approvals for the Work are described In Specification Sections affected. B. Whore Contract Documents require inspections, tests, or approvals of Work by an Independent testing agency, laboratory, or professional consultant engaged by Contractor, the agency, laboratory, or consultant shall be satisfactory to Owner. C. Submit reports of Inspections, tests, and approvals as specified in Section 01300, Submittals. One copy of test results and reports, Including those which the Owner does not pay for, shall become the property of the Owner. D. Refer to Document 00900, Supplementary Conditions, Article 7, for payment and arrangements for inspections, tests, and approvals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION ENO OF SECTION SUMMARY OF THE WORK TARGET STORES SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Owner will employ services of a land surveyor to lay out Project. Surveyor will be registered In the state In which Project . is located, and will perform the following: 1: Locate and mark property lines of Site. . Locate and lay out exterior corners and boundaries, of buildings. . Establish finished floor elevation, . referenced to a convenient benchmark. 4 Establish temporary monument for finished floor elevation in protected location near building. 5: Remove temporary monument upon Project completion. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Bench marks, control base line, and property lines may have been established on or adjacent to site. Replace monuments, - property corners, • or reference points disturbed or destroyed during Work by employing a registered Professional Civil Engineer or ` registered Land Surveyor, without additional•expense to Owner.- - B. Lay out and maintain reference points and additional bench :marks necessary to accomplish Work. Lay out partitions and openings In partitions for use 'of ail: 'trades. •Provide .adequate reference points' at all, stages of construction to permit accurate placement of Work of trades.. Each Subcontractor shall lay out his own Work And be responsible for damage to his Work or Work of others caused by his errors'or failure to check properly and verify measurements. • C. At time of • layout, verify locations and elevations of existing utilities at point of connection with new services, by employing a registered Professional Civil Engineer or .registered Land Surveyor, without additional . expense to Owner. FIELD ENGINEERING, SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 1.03 PENETRATION AND ATTACHMENT PROVISIONS A. Make suitable preparations for installation of Work. Include penetration, embedment, and attachment of piping, conduit, hangers, inserts, anchors, grounds, supports and similar Items in concrete and masonry walls, floors, partitions, or structural members. Provide and install sleeves, boxes, receptacles, chases, and other openings or recesses to ' receive Work. Locate penetration and attachment provisions accurately and secure firmly in place before erecting masonry or placing concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) ENO OF SECTION TARGET STORES SECTION 01090 - REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Applicability of reference. standards. B. Provision of reference standards at Site. C. Acronyms used in Contract Documents for reference standards, and source of standards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Documents 00700 and 00900 - General and Supplementary Conditions requirements related to compliance with governing regulations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, Federal Standards, or other reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by governing regulations. B. Where no specific date Is specified, the date of the standard is that in effect as of the Bid date, or date of Owner - Contractor Agreement when there are no bids. C. When required by individual Specification Sections or otherwise needed for proper performance of Work, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy of standard at Site during submittals, planning, and progress of . the affected work, until Substantial Completion. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES A. The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced In Contract Documents are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to ohange, and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate as of date of Contract Documents: AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Avenue Northwest Washington, D.C. 20008 202/862 -5100 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1000 Vermont Avenue Northwest Washington, DC 20005 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 AAMA American Architectural • Manufacturer's Association 2700 River Road, Suite 118 Des Plaines, IL 312/699 -7310 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol St., Suite 225 Washington, DC 20001 202/624 -5800 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Detroit, MI 48219 313/532 -2600 AGA American Gas Association 1515 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22209 703/841 -8400 AIA American institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue Northwest Washington, DC 20740 301/277 -4258 AIEE AISC American institute of Electrical Engineers (merged with IEEE) American institute of Steel Construction 400 N. Michigan Avenue 8th Floor Chicago, IL 60611 312/670 -2400 AISI ' American Iron and Steel institute 1000 16th Street Northwest Washington, DC 20038 202/452 -7100 AITC American Institute of Timber Const. 333 W Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 303/781 -3212 AJCHN American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature (See AAN and USDA; committee convenes intermittently.) AMCA Alr Movement and Control Association 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 312/394 -0150 ANSI American . National Standards Institute . 1430 Broadway 'New York, NY 10018 212/354-3300' REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 ANSI/ Builders' Hardware. Manufacturers BHMA Association 355 Lexington Avenue; 17th Floor New York, NY 10017 212/861 -4261 APA American Plywood Association P.O. Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 208/565 -6600 ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1501 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22209 703/524 -8800 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tuille Circle Northeast Atlanta, GA 30329 404/838 -8400 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 212/705 -7722 ASPE American. Society of Plumbing Engineers 3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., *210 Westlake, CA 91382 805/495 -7120 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1918 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 215/299 -5400 AWI Architectural Woodwork institute 2310 South Walter Reed Drive Arlington, VA 22208 703/671 -9100 AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau P.O. Box 8058 2772 South Randolph Street Arlington, VA 22208 703/931 -8180 AWS American Welding Society P.O. Box 351040 550 Le Jeune Road Northwest Miami, FL 33135 305/443 -9353 American Water Works Assooiation 6668 West Quincy, Avenue Denver, Co 80235 303/794 -7711 TARGET STORES BIA Brick institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Dr.; Suite 300 Reston, VA 22091 703/620 -0010 BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators international 4051 W. Fiossmoor Road Country Club Hills, IL 60477 312/799 -2300 CABO Council of American Building Officials 507 Three Skyline Place 5201 Leesburg Pike Fails Church, VA 22041 703/931 -4533 CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government"Printing Office; ' Washington, DC ' 20402 ' (usually first. published in"Federal Register) CISPI ' Cast Iron Soil Pipe'institute 1499 Chain Bridge Road; Suite 203 McLean, VA 22101 703/827 -9177 CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 1111 18th Street Northwest , Washington, DC 20207 . 202/634 -7700 CRSI. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute' 933•.Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL X60195 312/490 -1700 DHI " Door and Hardware institute` 7711 Old Springhouse Road McLean, VA 22102 703/556 -3990 FCC Commercial Standard of NOS (U.S. Dept. of Commerce) :Government Printing 'Office; Washington,' DC 20402 Environmental Protection Agency 401 M Street Southwest Washington, DC 20460 202/829 -3535 Federal Communications Commission. 1919 M Street Northwest' Washington, DC 20554 202/632 -7000 FGMA• Flat Glass Marketing Association White Lakes Professional Building` 3310.Harrison 'Topeka, KS 68611 913/266 -7013 . • t • f • r,, TARGET STORES • . ' FM Factory Mutual System 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike Norwood, MD 02082 617/762-4300 FS. Federal Specification (General Services Administration) Obtain from your Regional GSA • Office, or purchase from GSA Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Streets Southwest Washington, DC 20406 • 202/472-2205 or 2140 GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrington Avenue Evanston, IL 60201 312/491-1744 Imp international Conference of Building Officials 5830 So. Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90801 213/699-0541. IEEE institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 212/705-7900 IESNA illuminating Engineering Society of North America 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 212/705-7926 • IGCC insulating Glass" 'Certifloation, ,Council Route 11; industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 IRI • Industrial Risk Insurers Suite 1500 North 300 South Riverside Plaza Chicago, IL 60806 312/648-2255 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry 5203 Leesburg Pike; Suite 502 Falls Church, VA 22041 703/998-7998 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60801 312/348-1600 ' National Builders Hardw Association (Now Part of OHO, • REFERENCE STANDARDS NEC _ . NEMA • SOUTHCENTER SR/DO T-627 NBS National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Department of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234 301/921-1000 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association P.O. Box 781 Herndon, VA 22070 703/435-4900 NCPWB National Certified Pipe Welders Bureau 5410 Grosvenor Lane, Suite 120 Bethesda, MD 20814 301/897-0070 National Electrical Code (by NFPA) National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2101 L Street Northwest Washington, DC 20037 202/457-8400 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02269 617/770-3000 N.F.P.A. National Forest Products Association 1619 Massachusetts Avenue Northwest Washington, DC 20036 202/797-5800 NSF National Sanitation Foundation P.O. Box 1468 3475 Plymouth Road Ann Arbor, MI 48108 313/769-8010 OBBC Ohio Basic Building Code Ohio Board of Building Standards 2323 W. Fifth Ave. Rm. 2120 P.O. Box 825 Columbus, OH 43216 814/644-2613 OSHA Occupational Safety &. .Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 • PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wells' Street • Chicago, IL 60608 • 312/348-4071 PS Product Standard of NBS .(U.S. Dept of Commerce) . Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 - 01090-3 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 SBC Standard Building Code (See SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. 900 Montclair Road Birmingham, Alabama 35213 SDI Steel Deck institute P.O. Box 3812 St. Louis, MO 83122 314/965 -1741 S.D.I. Steel Door institute (o /o A.P. Wherry and Associates Inc.) 712 Lakewood Center North Cleveland, OH 44107 216/228 -7700 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1703 Parham Road, Suite 204 Richmond, VA 23229 804/288-3071 SMACNA Sheet Metal and, Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association P.O. Box 70 Merrifield, VA 22116 703/790 -9890 Steel Structures Painting.Council 4 5th Avenue Pi PA 15213 412/578 -3327 Tile Council of America P.0. : Box 328 - Princeton, NJ 08540 609/921 - 7050 Thermal Insulation . Association. '7:Klrby Plaza Mount :Kisco, NY 10549 914/241 -2284 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not.Used) TARGET STORES 01090 -4 SSPC TCA TIMA Manufacturers UBC Uniform Building Code_ (See ICBO) UL. . Underwriters Laboratories 333'.Pfingsten Road Northbrook, IL' 60062 .312/272 -8800 . USDA United • States Department of Agriculture independence Avenue between 12th and 14th. Streets, Northwest' Washington, DC: 20250 202/447 -4929: ' REFERENCE: STANDARDS TARGET STORES SECTION 01120 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedural requirements. B. Rehabilitation and renovations of existing spaces and materials. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling: 1.03 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verification of existing conditions and construction documents. B. In the event of coordination conflicts, unclear Instructions, dimensional discrepancy, discrepancies between the Construction documents and actual conditions, etc. the Contractor shall document the discrepancy and contact the Owner's Representative and the Architect for clarification prior to proceeding with the effected work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK A. New Materials: As specified In individual Sections. B. Match existing products and work for patching and extending work. • C. Determine type and quality of existingi products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of existing as a standard. Presence of a product, • finish, or type of work, requires that . patching, extending, or matching shall be . performed as necessary to make Work complete and consistent with specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work. B. Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES A. Cut, move, or remove Items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace and restore at completion. B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace materials as specified for finished work. C. Remove debris and abandoned Items from area and from concealed spaces. D. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes. E. Close openings In exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas. 3.03 INSTALLATION 3.04 TRANSITIONS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to accommodate Owner occupancy. B. Project rooms shall be complete In all respects including operational mechanical and electrical systems. C. Remove, cut, and patch work In a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products and . finishes to specified condition. D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes. E. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures, restore existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning and electrical systems. F. Install products as specified In individual Sections. A. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, make a smooth and even transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work In texture and appearance. B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect. SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 TARGET STORES: 3.05 ADJUSTMENTS A. Where removal of 'partitions ,results in: adjacent spaces becoming one, rework f loors, walls, ' and :ceilings to a', smooth r plane: without breaks, steps, or, bulkheads. 'Where: :. a change.: Of plane of 1/8 Inch or more . occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth" transition for Architect review. B: Trim existing .doors as necessary to clear new fioor.finlshes; refinish trimmed areas: it ,work :at penetrat of surfaces . 3 06. REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged:,. I'Ifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections :; B. Repair' substrate' prior to patching finish. 3.07 .FINISHES A. Finish surfaces as . specified. In Sections B: Finish patches .to produce` uniform :f Inish' textu re,, over entire .area. Wh f inish .:.: cannot : matched, ' ref in I sh antIre.. surf ace to : n earest . Intersect ions:. 3,08 CLEANING A:Clean daily the Owner-occupied areas of work . dally,, In which 'Contractor, is working or traversing. • 01120:- END,. OF SECTION:. LTPRAT ION` 1119ACTr;P'ROCED RE TARGET STORES SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Procedures and review action. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule. D. Submittals to the Architect. E. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, test reports and mix designs, certificates, and. calculations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Documents 00700 and 00900 General and Supplementary Conditions for progress schedule and submittals. B. Section 01600 - Product substitution submittals and Owner - supplied equipment and material submittals. C. Section 01700 - Contract closeout submittals. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Refer to Article 4 of General Conditions for additional Information. B. Prepare a preliminary Construction Progress Schedule for Work and submit two copies for review to OSR within ten days after date of fully executed Contract, Letter of intent, or Notice To Proceed, whichever is earliest. Relate schedule to Work of entire Project. C. Develop schedule using Contractor's proposed plan of action, sequence of construction, and activity duration times. Comply with Owner's Project Milestone Dates. D. Upon approval by Owner and Contractor, preliminary schedule will be the final Construction Progress Schedule. E. Contractor shall issue two copies to OSR, and perform the following: 1. Maintain the Construction Progress Schedule. SUBMITTALS 2. Provide pertinent information related to status of Work of Subcontractors for construction progress meetings. . Submit schedule updating reports to OSR In two copies upon request. 1.05 SUBMITTALS TO THE ARCHITECT 16470 Paneiboards SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 1.04 PROCUREMENT AND SHOP DRAWING SCHEDULE A. Prepare a Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule and submit two copies to OSR and one to Architect within ten days after date of fully executed Contract, Letter of Intent, or Notice to Proceed, whichever Is earliest. B. Promptly revise Procurement and Shop Drawing Schedule to meet Project completion date and to conform to the current status of the Work. Furnish two revised schedules to OSR and one to Architect. A. Make submittals for the following specification sections directly to Architect with a copy of transmittal to OSR: 05500 Metal Fabrications: (Shop drawings only, for the following): A. Shop Drawings for structural review of roof openings 15300 Flre Protection (only the following): A. Shop Drawings for structural review of hanging loads B. Make other submittals directly to OSR or Owner's Project Architect as indicated herein. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit Shop Drawings to Architect or OSR as required. B. For Work by separate contractors not assigned to Contractor, OSR will review and submit Shop Drawings to Contractor. Refer to Section 01800 for additional requirements related to Owner - supplied material and equipment. C. Shop Drawings submitted by Contractor not bearing Contractor's review action will not be reviewed and will be returned to Contractor for review and resubmission. D. Clearly identify Shop Drawings as to Project, Contractor, Manufacturer, Specification Section and Item submitted. NOTE IN WRITING DEVIATIONS FROM REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT. DOCUMENTS. E. Submit Shop Drawings In the form of one reproducible transparency and two prints of each drawing, unless 'otherwise specified. 01300 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 Each drawing shall have a clear spare of not less than 20 square Inches on the right hand side. Transmit transparencies In mailing tubes without folding. F. Make submissions of Shop Drawings of related Items or Individual Items of an assembly In a package to permit coordinated review. Shop Drawings will be reviewed In the sequence submitted unless written request Is submitted to the contrary, or submittals are components of an assembly not submitted as a package. Wiring diagrams shall•be complete composite drawings specially prepared for Project, showing color coding, terminal markings and locations. Manufacturer's typical wiring diagrams will not be accepted, unless specified otherwise. G. After Architect or OSR has reviewed Shop Drawings he will retain at least one Shop Drawing print for his record and will return transparency to Contractor. Architect will send a copy of transmittal and a Shop Drawing to OSR. For Shop Drawings returned requiring a resubmlttal, Contractor shall make revisions and submit one new transparency and two prints marked "Resubmlttal" to Architect or OSR. 1.07 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit five copies of Product Data to Architect or OSR as required. B. Submittals to OSR: OSR will review, retain one copy for hie record, and return remaining copies to Contractor. C. Submittals to Architect: Architect will review, retain one copy for his record, return one copy to OSR, and return remaining copies to Contractor. Submit one additional copy of Product Data for structural, mechanical, and electrical work for engineering department's records. D. Clearly mark eaoh copy of Product Data as to Project, Contractor, Manufacturer, Specification Section and Item being submitted. NOTE IN WRITING DEVIATIONS FROM REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA REVIEW A. Submittals will be reviewed with following actions: 01300 -2 1. Approved (No Exceptions): Indicates authorization to proceed with fabrication. 2. Approved as Noted (Corrections as Noted): Indicates authorization to proceed with fabrication subject to 1.09 SAMPLES TARGET STORES noted corrections, If corrections are accepted without an Increase In Contract Sum or Time. 3. Revise and Resubmit: Indicates submittal must be revised, resubmitted, and approved before fabrication Is authorized. 4. Rejected: Indicates unspecified material, Insufficient Information, unapproved system or similar inadequacies. Additional Information must be submitted and approved before fabrication Is authorized. B. Direct specific attention In writing to deviations from Contract Documents and to revisions 'of resubmitted Shop Drawings and Product 'Data other than those revisions .requested by Architect or OSR on.prevlous submittals. A. Refer to Article 4 of General Conditions for addltlonal Information. B. Submit, unless otherwise specified, two samples of each Item required to Owner's Project Architect with a transmittal to OSR. Do not use samples In Work. One approved sample will be retained by Owner's Protect Architect, and other approved sample will be forwarded to OSR to be retained at Site. Where Contractor requires approved samples to be returned, submit addltlonal samples as required. C. Clearly Identify samples as to product, . type, color range, texture, finish, and other pertinent data. Submit with samples a Letter of Transmittal indicating Contraotor's approval and other supporting Information as may be necessary, with a copy to OSR, 0. Provide mock -ups and field .samples of finishes at Protect as required by individual Specification Sections.. Install sample complete and finished. Acceptable samples In place may be retained In completed Work If use Is approved by OSR. 1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Submit Operating and Maintenance Manuals as specified In Section 01700, Contract Closeout. TARGET STORES SOUTHCENTER SR/DO T-627 RT 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) TARGET STORES SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Temporary Tight and power system. B. Use of permanent heating, ventilating, electrical, and water service systems. C. Sanitary facilities and drinking water. D. Telephone service. E. Field office. F. Protection of persons and property. G. Moisture and weather protection. H. Cleaning facilities. 1. Temporary signs. 1.02 HEAT AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS A. Construction Heat: 1. Contraotor shall provide, operate, and maintain, temporary systems for heating each enclosed area of building. System shall consist of temporary unit heaters, radiators, or other devices required to maintain temperatures specified for individual units of work and as follows: a. Maintain enclosed buliding at . minimum temperature of 60 deg F. . When taping and finishing of drywall or installation of ceramic tile, quarry tile, or similar work Is started, maintain the minimum temperature of 85 deg F. o. During placing of interior wood and plastic doors, millwork, casework, resilient flooring, acoustical ceilings, painting, and similar finish materials, and continuing until Owner assumes responsibility for heating buliding, maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. . Contractor shall remove temporary heating system when no longer required. PART 1 - GENERAL B. Construction Venttlatlon: SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 1. The Contractor shall ventilate enclosed building as necessary to protect materials and finishes from damage due to humidity and condensation within building and to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. C. Construction Heating and Ventilation Costs: 1. Contractor shall pay all costs related to construction heating and ventilation systems, Including enclosures, devices, fuel and other services. 1.03 USE OF PERMANENT AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS A. Requirements for Use: 1. Contractor may request use of permanent air handling systems for construction heat and ventilation from the Owner. Approval for system use Is at the option of the Owner. Request should Include the following verifications: a. That installation of air handling systems Is sufficiently complete for Intended use, including utility connections, safety devices, control devices and unit filters. b. That general building construction is sufficiently complete to assure minimal system exposure to dust and dirt. Contractor shall give written notice of intention to use permanent air handing systems to Owner and Electrical and Mechanical Subcontractors at least 30 days prior to Intended start of use. Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors shall complete installation of systems as soon as reasonably possible thereafter. 3 . If system will be used prior to final acceptance, Contractor must supply temporary filters for use In lieu of Owner supplied permanent filters. Permanent filters should be Installed at time of final acceptance. 4. Permanent air handling systems may be used at earlier stages.of construction than specified above, upon Owner approval together with the following . verifications: a. That return air ductwork Is completely blocked off at each alr Inlet throughout buliding. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 TARGET STORES b. Final connection of return air ductwork to equipment Is left open, and return air Is filtered at this point with 2" low efficiency filter . media. c . That required electrical service Is available to power permanent air handling systems. . Replace temporary filters at least every two weeks, and more frequently as necessary to prevent dust and dirt from entering equipment. Vacuum duct work If dirty. Contractor for Complete Construction shall operate and maintain equipment, replace filters and perform final Cleaning of system. B Permanent Heating and Ventilation Costs: 1. Contractor for Complete Construction shall pay all costs related use of permanent. heating , and ventilation systems prior to Substantial Completion Including fuel, system maintenance and utl11ty charges.. Owner will assume responsibility and pay costs for heating and ventilating the Project on date of •Substantial Completion of Project'. • C, Warranties: Use of permanent heating and ventilating equipment prior to date of Substantial 'Completion of Work shall not: alter terms of the Avarranty required by.the .General. Conditions of the Contract for: Construction; Special' _warranties, if any._ specified In Contract. Documents; or correctlon'period required. by. :the General. Conditions. 1.04 POWER AND LIGHTING SYSTEMS A. As soon as possible after Contract award, coordinate with Owner used of building power service for construction use. 3. Verify that power service Is adequate for intended temporary use. 4. Temporary service is not sized to.power mechanical RTU's. B. Power Distribution: Provide power for construction operations; including wiring, connections, and protection for temporary and permanent equipment for environmental control, for temporary use of electrically operated equipment, and for testing. 1. If required, Install temporary power panel and minimum of eight 20 amp, 120 volt, weatherproof, GF1 .grounding, duplex receptacles at location of work. Circuit each outlet separately. . Looate to limit maximum extension cord length to 100 feet. Temporary branch circuits may be used for portable tools, portable lights, and other small power loads. Each separate contractor or Subcontractor shall furnish thole own extension cords and supplemental lights. C. Lighting: Provide lighting for construction operations. 1. Temporary Lighting shall consist of '> minimum one 150 watt 'incandescent lamp, or equivalent for each 500 square feet of floor area with minimum one Ilght In each room (excluding closets and utility chases): Provide additional' lights In corridors and stairwells to provide adequate illumination; ` for proper performance of Work. 2 Provide lamps for temporary lighting system: 9 • i 01500 -2 kVA 2. If work of separate contractors , ar ' subcontractors require' three phase power'` or, voltage ex6eed1ng:120 :volts for :tools o equipment,. that ,contractor. or CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS'.:, .D. General Maximum lndlvidual load,conneoted to the system shall be as follows: Voltage- Phase Maximum Load 120.volt, 1 phase 1 5 i. Do not use temporary light and power, system for eleotrlo heating," welders or:; .for tools requiring larger than :maximum Toads speolfied :above. I l l 1. 1 1 1 1 I I TARGET. STORES • • subcontractor with additional power requirements shall provide required temporary distribution system. 3. Each separate contractor and subcontractor shall make arrangements for electrical service, lighting and power for their field office, storage sheds and other temporary buildings. 4 . Remove temporary Tight and power system when no longer required. Salvaged materials shall become property of Electrical Subcontractor. E. Power and Lighting Costs: 1. Owner will pay for energy use costs during construction Incurred from use of the protect power and lighting systems within the limits specified herein. 2, Each separate contractor, or subcontractor shall pay for energy use costs associated with operation and maintenance of their field office, storage sheds and other temporary buildings. If power and lighting Is drawn through meter designated for general construction, proportional costs shall be determined by Contractor for Complete Construction. 3. Each separate contractor or subcontractor who requires power In excess of limits specified above and Is required to provide a separate distribution system for use of that power, shall pay all costs assoolated to that power system and energy usage. 1.05 USE OF PERMANENT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. When installation of permanent electrical service, lighting and distribution system Is sufficiently complete to be operated safely, system may . be used to provide construction light and power, and testing and operation of permanent equipment. Contractor for Complete Construction shall replace equipment damaged or rendered Inoperative during construction. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION WATER SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 A. Permanent water service system may be used to supply construction water. Temporary distribution system may be connected to permanent water service or temporary hose bibbs may be connected directly. Coordinate with Store Manager and Owner Representative for use of building water. B. Each separate contractor and Subcontractor shall furnish his own hoses. C. Contractor for Complete Construction shall remove temporary system when no longer required. D. The Owner will assume responsibility and pay costs of water used on date of Substantial Completion of Protect. 1.07 DRINKING WATER A. Contractor for Complete Construction shall provide drinking water for entire Protect during construction. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION TOILET FACILITIES A. Contractor for Complete Construction shall provide and maintain adequate toilet faollities for use of entire Protect during construction. Maintain toilets In clean and sanitary condition, B. Temporary toilets shall be enclosed, portable chemical toilets furnished and serviced by a company specializing In required service. C. Do not use existing building toilets during construction unless authorized by the Owner's Representative and the Store Manager. 1.09 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE A. Contractor for Complete Construotion shall provide telephone service to his field office for his own use as he may require. 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE A. Contractor for Complete Construction shall provide and maintain area In the building as a field office. Coordinate location with Owner's Representative. Remove field office when no longer required. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 -3 01500-4 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 'AND TEMPORARY- CONTROLS SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 1.11 .TEMPORARY BUILDINGS AND SHEDS A. Each separate contraotor and Subcontractor. • shall provide and maintain trailers; 'sheds, and other temporary buildings. on site required for storage of materials, tools,. and equipment and other purposes, In conjunction With his work. Coordinate location with Owner's Representative. B. Remove temporary buildings when no longer required or directed by . the. Owner's Representative. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Comply with .provislons of Article General Conditions. Where by' governing regulations, , Contraotor.for. Complete Construction shall provide temporary portable fire extinguishers. 1.13 MOISTURE AND WEATHER PROTECTION A: Each separate contractor and Suboontractor shall protect excavations, trenches, other temporary work, the building, and other work of Project from damage from water, Including. ground water; rain, water, backing, up of sewers.and drains, and ice and snow. Each separate contractor and Subcontraotor shall keep his excavations and trenches free from, water during progress of Work, and provide temporary enclosure, pumps and equipment and perform grading, pumping, bailing or :other work necessary to Insure protection. B. Each separate contractor and Subcontraotor shall 'provide protection ::Against wind, storms, frost, rain, -snow, heat, and cold tc prevent damage to : material In' transit,. stored aaterlal, and work In place 1.14 CLEANING PUBLIC AND,EXISTING FACILITIES A. Each separate contraotor and;Suboontraotor shall. keep existing `bulidtng, public sidewalks and streets surrounding Work free from 'dirt, waste materials, and rubbish caused by hie operations. Avoid interference with trafflo. 1.15 TEMPORARY SIGNS A only billboards, advertisements, or slallar signs authorized , by; Owner In writing. (Not Used) TARGET STORES SECTION 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Products. B. Transportation and handling. C. Storage and protection. D. Product options. E. Owner - supplied material and equipment. F. Substitutions. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00120 - Requests for substitutions during the Bidding Period. B. Document 00700 - Quality of substitute products and change of costs In substitutions. C. Document 00900 - Supplementary Conditions for Owner - supplied material and equipment submittals. D. Section 01010 - Contractor's use of premises for storage of materials and equipment. E. Seotlon 01090 - Reference standards. F. Section 01300 - Submittal of manufacturer's certificates and product data. G. Section 01700 Operating Instructions and maintenance manuals. 1.03 PRODUCTS A. Products Include material, equipment, and systems. B. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. C. Components required to be supplied In quantity within a Specification section shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport produots by methods to avoid product damage; deliver In undamaged condition In manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry, with labels Intact. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 B. Arrange deliveries of products according to construction progress schedule. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at Site, work of separate contractors, and Owner's use of premises. Do not deliver products subJect to damage until required In Work, or until suitable storage facilities are available at Site. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, Including those provided by Owner, by methods to prevent soiling or damage. D. Promptly Inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store products according to manufacturer's Instructions, with seals and labels Intact and legible. Store sensitive products In weather -tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. Protect finished surfaces from scratching and similar damage. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports over ground. Cover produots subject to deterioration with Impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation. C. Store looso granular materials on solid surfaces . In a well - drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter. D. Arrange storage to provide access for Inspection. Periodically Inspect to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions. E. Verify and coordinate all storage locations with Owner. 1.06 OWNER - SUPPLIED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Designate submittals and delivery date for each product In Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. Submit to Owner with notification of any observed discrepancies or problems anticipated due to non - conformance with Contract Documents. Refer to Article 4 of. Document 00900 for additional Information. Receive and unload products at Site. 01600 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 4. Inspect deliveries, record shortages, and damaged or defective Items. 5. Handle products at Site, Including uncrating and storage. 8. Protect products from damage, and from exposure to elements. 7. Assemble, Install, connect, adjust, and finish products as indicated In Contract Documents. 8. Provide Installation Inspections required by public authorities, and other testing required by Contract Documents. 9. Repair or replace Items damaged by Contractor. 1.07 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Specification Options: 1. Products specified by Reference Standards or by Performance and Descriptive Requirements only: Provide any product meeting those standards or requirements. 2. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substltutlons: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named. 3 . Products specified by naming several manufacturers and, where applicable, sample products: Provide products of named manufacturers meeting specifications; no options, no substltutlons allowed. 4. Products speclfied by naming only one manufacturer: No options, no substitutions allowed. B. Options Incorporated in Work: Products shown on Drawings may be typical of the style and model of one specified manufacturer. Perform changes In Work required to accommodate actual Installed products of other acceptable manufacturers, at no additional cost to Owner. 1.08 LIMITATIONS ON SUBSTITUTIONS A. During Bidding period, Instructions to Bidders govern action on requests for substitutions, submitted under requirements specified In this Section. B. Requests for substitutions of products will be considered only within 15 days of Owner- 1.09 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS TARGET STORES Contractor Agreement. Subsequent requests will be considered only In case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor. C. Substitutions will not be considered when Indicated on Shop Drawings or Product Data submittals without separate formal request, when requested directly by subcontractor or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. 0. Substitute products shall not be ordered or Installed without written acceptance. E. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substltutlon Is not accepted, provide specified product. F. Owner's Representative will determine acceptability of substitutions. A. Submit separate request for each substltutlon. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substltutlon with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Identify product by Specifications section and Article numbers. Provide manufacturer's name and address, trade name of product, and model or catalog number. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate. C; Attach Product Data as specified In Section 01300. D. Give Itemized comparison' of proposed substltutlon with specified product, listing . variations, and referenco to Speclflcatlons section. and Article numbers. E. Give quality and performance ,';comparison between proposed substitution: and the specified product. F. Give cost data comparing proposed substltutlon with specified product, and amount of net change to Contract Sum. G. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials. H. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required In other work or products. 01600 -2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT TARGET. STORES SOUTNCENTER SR /DO.;T -627 1.10 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Request for substitution 'constitutes. a representation • that Contractor has Investigated proposed • product • and has determined that It IS equal to'or superior In all respects to specified product, Of that the cost reduction offered is ample Justification for acceptiny.the offered substitution. B. Contractor wIli provide. • same lwarrantY Joe. •.substitution as for spec ifled product: • C .Contractor wilI coordinate Installation of accepted. subst1tute, making such•changes as maybe requI red .for Work: to be complete In aII respects. D Contractor ,certlfIes that cost data presented Is complete and .Includes I `.'aII • related: costs under this Contract,` but • excludes costs under separate contracts • Contraotor' waives claims for additional. costs related "to` substitution which may later become apparent 1'.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES FOR SUBSTITUTIONS • A. Submit :two f copies of request: substitution. B .- Owner's. Representative (OR) review Contractor's requests for subst1 tut IOns with reasonab promptness: C DUr Incr the bIdding'perlad, no action w ill be taken on requests for substitut D .Af .award of `Contract',. OR - wi l l' not Contractor;: in writing, ;. of :deoleIon to. :accept or `reJeot requested subst.l hit ion w i thin :30 days. • E For accepted products, submIt Shop Drawings • ,. Produot Data, and Samples under • provis ions;, of Sect ion 01300; PART 2 — PRODUCTS' .(Not Used) ,PART ,3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION, MATERIAL AND EQU 01600 TARGET STORES SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Operating instructions and manuals. B. Final cleaning. C. Substantial completion and final completion. D. Final payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Documents 00700 and 00900 - General and Supplementary Conditions for Contract Closeout. 1.03 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A. Prepare and submit operating Instructions and maintenance manuals, as required by Speolflcatlon Sections, and Instruct Owner's personnel In use and maintenance of operating equipment. B. Operating instructions: Permit OSR and maintenance personnel to observe and familiarize themselves with equipment during assembly and Installation. After Installation Is complete, arrange to meet and Instruct Owner's designated personnel in use, operation, care, and cleaning of equipment. Instructions shall be given only by qualified personnel, thoroughly familiar with use and maintenance of equipment. C. Operating Manuals: Prior to Substantial Completion, submit operating and maintenance manuals for equipment to OSR In duplicate unless otherwise specified. Neatly edit manuals with similar equipment grouped, pages tabbed and Indexed, material printed or typewritten, and individual pages set Into plastic page covers. Include the following Information: 1. Complete operating Instructions and recommendations for fuel and other materials to be used with each item. 2. Manufacturer's complete data sheets. 3. Complete cleaning instructions Including recommended cleaning materials. 4. Complete lubrication data and schedules. S. Maintenance, repair, and adjustment data Including manufacturer's Instructions. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.04 FINAL CLEANING SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 6. Parts list with numbers, recommended parts to stock, and nearest parts depot and service organization. 7. Assembly drawings, wiring diagrams, mechanical diagrams, Installation diagrams, and Instructions. D. Maintenance Tools: Provide special tools furnished with equipment for adjustment during Installation, such as closer wrenches. A. Refer to Article 4 of General Conditions for additional information. B. immediately prior to Inspection for Substantial Completion, remove waste materials and rubbish from building and Site. Remove protective coatings, barriers and other protective devices, temporary work, and surplus materials. C. Clean the building and Site. Leave building In neat and orderly condition, ready for occupancy and use by Owner. Wash and polish glass on both faces. Oust and vacuum finished spaces; wash and otherwise clean as necessary to remove stains, dust, and dirt. Leave mechanical rooms and similar unflnlshed spaces "Broom Clean ". 0. Clean and sterilize plumbing fixtures. E. Dust, vacuum, wash and otherwise clean heaters, grilles and registers, and other . mechanical work. In finished spaces to remove stains, dust, and dirt. Dust equipment, ducts, pipes, and other mechanical work in mechanical rooms and similar 'unfinished spaces. Remove construction dirt and debris from Interior of ductwork and air handling. equipment. Replace filters for air handling equipment or clean thoroughly according to manufacturer's Instructions. F. Dust, vacuum, wash and otherwise clean light fixtures and other electrical work In finished spaces to remove stains, dust, and dirt. Electrical Subcontractor shall remove protective plastic covering from Owner furnished Tight fixtures, as directed by OSR. Dust electrical equipment In mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and similar unflnlshed spaces. Replace burned out lamps. G. Dust, vacuum, wash and otherwise Olean all owner supplied and Installed fixtures In finished spaces t� remove stains, dust, and dirt. 01700 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 H. Maintain Work In clean condition until OSR determines Work to be Substantially Complete. 1. Upon Completion of Work, remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from premises. 1.05 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL COMPLETION A. Refer to Article 9 of General Conditions for additional Information. B. When Work approaches Substantial Completion, submit to OSR a written request for a preliminary inspection for Substantial Completion, Including a list of Items to be completed or corrected. Submit request approximately 21 days prior to scheduled date for Substantial Completion. If OSR considers Work to be sufficiently complete, OSR will establish a date for preliminary Inspection to be held approximately 14 days prior to scheduled date for Substantial Completion or occupancy. C. The OSR, accompanied by Contractor, will conduct preliminary Inspection for Substantial Completion. Based on preliminary inspection, OSR will prepare a Punch List for Substantial Completion, Indicating items which shall be completed or corrected before Work will be determined to be Substantially Complete. Complete and correct items on Punch List before scheduled occupancy date. D. When items on Punch List for Substantial Completion have been completed or corrected, return Punch List to OSR Indicating In writing action taken for each item. Include Items completed, Items not complete, and reasons for not completing remaining Items. After returning Punch List, submit to OSR a request for inspection for Substantial Completion. OSR will establish a date for Inspection. E. The OSR, accompanied by Contractor, will conduct Inspection for Substantial Completion. If OSR determines Work to be Substantially Complete, OSR will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion as provided In Article 9 of General Conditions, and a Punch List for Final Completion of Items remaining to be completed or corrected before Work will be determined fully complete and ready for acceptance. F. When Items on Punch List for Final Completion have been fully completed or corrected, submit to OSR a written Indication of action taken for each Item, and request Final Inspection. OSR will establish a date for inspection. 01700 -2 1.06 FINAL PAYMENT TARGET STORES G. The OSR, accompanied by Architect and Contractor, will conduct Final Inspection. If OSR determines Work Is acceptable under Contract Documents and Contract fully performed, OSR will notify Contractor In writing. A. Refer to Article 9 of General Condltlons for additional information. B. Upon receipt of written notification from OSR that Work 1s acceptable under Contract Documents and Contract fully performed, prepare and submit to OSR a Final Application for Payment with the following attachments, In two copies: 1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA Document G706; Most recent edition. 2. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A; Most recent edition. 3. Contractor's Lien Waiver In full amount of Contract Sum. 4. Lien waivers from all Subcontractors, Sub- Subcontractors, and major material suppliers who have furnished material for Work under contraot with Contractor or Subcontractor. Lien waivers shall total full amount of Contract Sum. 5. Guaranty /Warranty Certifications for Products and Equipment specified with special warranties In the Protect Manual: 6. Consent of Surety to Final Payment, AIA Document G707; Most recent edition. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT TARGET STORES SECTION 02050 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Remove designated building equipment and fixtures. B. Remove designated partitions and components. C. Cap and Identify utilities. D. Temporary partitions to allow building occupancy. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Work sequence Owner occupancy. B. Section 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures: Re- Installation of removed materials. C. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary barriers and enclosures; Security; Cleaning during construction. D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following Materials and Equipment submittals under provlslons of Section 01300: 1. Demolition and removal procedures and schedule. B. Submit the following Closeout submittals under provlslons of Section 01700: 1. Protect record drawings. 1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Convene a preconstructlon conference one week prior to commencing work of this Section B. Require attendance of persons directly Involved with the work of this and related Sections. C. Review schedule of demolition, demolition procedures and conditions, and coordination with related work. MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS 3.02 EXECUTION PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Conduct demolition to minimize Interference with adjacent building areas. Maintain protected egress and access at all times. B. Provide, ereot, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 3.01 PREPARATION A. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings as specified In Section 01500. B. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, fumes, noise, and smoke to provide for Owner occupancy. C. Protect existing Items which are not Indicated to be altered. D. Disconnect, remove, and cap designated utility services within demolition areas. E. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify and Indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents. A. Demolish In an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing foundation, supporting structural members and existing building components to remain. B. Except where noted otherwise, Immediately remove demolished materials from site. C. Remove materials to be re- Installed or retained In manner to prevent damage. Store and protect under provisions of Section 01600. D. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin Infested, or dangerous materials encountered. E. Do not burn or bury materials on site. F. Remove demolished materials from slte as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave areas of work In clean condition. 02050 - 1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 G. Remove all Items indicated on`Orawings H. Remove .. all architectural; 'structural, mechanical and electrical appendages, accessories, conduit,; piping, equipment or any other addition to the building :structure that Is not :Intended to remain, ar that will not, as deternlned` by Architect; serve any useful purpose to the proposed Project. :TARGET STORES 1.01 WORK INCLUDED TARGET STORES SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal Items, galvanized or prime painted, Including but not limited to the following: 1. Structural framing for roof openings. 2. Steel supports and hangers at bulkheads. 3. Burglar bars and duct guards. 4. Fasteners necessary for connection of metal fabrications. 5. Loose angles. 6. Other Items of miscellaneous Iron and steel Indicated on Drawings and not speolfled under other. Sections. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09900 - FIeId painting. B. Division 15 - Burglar bars factory - supplied with roof curbs. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings ", November 1, 1978. B. ASTM A36 -81a, "Spec for Structural Steel." C. ASTM A53 -83,, "Spec for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc- Coated Welded and Seamless." D. ASTM,A167 -82, "Spec for, Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium- Nickel. .Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip." E. ASTM A312 -83, "Speo for Seamless and Welded Austenitlo Stalnless Steel Plpe." F. ASTM B32 -83, "Spec for Solder Metal." G. AWS "Structural Welding Code ", 01.1 -1984. H. FS QQ-F-461C, "Floor Plate, Steel, Rolled." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit for approval. METAL FABRICATIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. New, of best .commercial quality for purpose Intended, and free from defects Impairing strength, durability, and appearance. 2.02 STEEL SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Provide steel for miscellaneous structural framing and non - structural purposes as follows: 1. Structural Steel: ASTM A36. 2. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type material and finish as supported members, unless otherwlse indicated. 3. Expansion Anchors: Kwik -Bolts as manufaotured by HlltI; ICBO #2156. 2.03 ACCESSORIES Cold Galvanizing: 1. Norfolk "ZRC" 2. Welco "Cold Galy" Grout: Non - shrink, non - metallic; 1. Euclid "Euco N -S Grout" 2. Grace "Non - Metallic Grout" 3. Master Builders "Masterflow 713 Grout" 4. Sonneborn "Sonagrout" 5. US Grout Company "Five Star Grout" C. Bituminous Coating: Cold applied asphalt mastic, SSPC Paint -12, compounded for 30 -mil thickness. A. B. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Metal fabrications In finished spaces shall be considered ornamental metal. Metal shall be smooth and free of surface blemishes Inoluding roughness, pitting, roller and seam marks, and rolled trade names. B. Provide members with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles. C. After shearing and punching, leave clean, true lines and surfaces. 05500 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 D. Shop weld headed studs according to manufacturer's instructions. E. Detail Joints to maintain strength and rigidity of adjoining members. Generally, weld shop Joints using concealed welds where possible. Locate exposed welds In least conspicuous place, and weld continuously. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. F. Bolt shop connections, where detailed, and field connections using bolts or machine screws of adequate slze. Use countersunk, Phillips, flat, or oval - headed machine screws for exposed bolted connections In finished spaces. G. Provide neat, halrllne Joints with matching surfaces at exposed Joints. H. Shop assemble work ready for erection Insofar as possible. Where field Joints are required, completely shop assemble work to assure accurate fit and then disassemble for shipment. 2.05 REINFORCING A. Provide as required at connections, hardware locations, and as necessary to make sections rigid and substantial. Perform mortising, drilling, punching and tapping required for attachment of hardware or attachment to other work. 2.08 ANCHORS, CLIPS, BRACKETS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Provide as necessary for erection of work and attachment of work of other trades. 2.07 WELDING A. Comply with appropriate AWS references. B. Weld behind flnlshed surfaces to minimize distortion and discoloration on flnlshed side. Remove weld splatter and welding oxides from finished surfaces by descaling and grinding. Grind and polish weld beads on exposed surfaces to match and blend with finish on adjacent parent metal. 2.08 FINISH A. Galvanized Steel: Shop applied cold galvanized after fabrication. Apply In conformance with manufacturer's directions for Intended use. B. Shop Primed Steel: Shop prime steel Items not Indicated to be galvanized. Remove loose mill scale and rust from structural steel, and remove mill scale and rust from ornamental metal. Thoroughly clean to remove oil, grease, dirt and other foreign 05500 -2 2.09 ROOF OPENING FRAMING 2.10 PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS TARGET STORES material, and apply one shop coat of rust - inhibitive primer containing at least 50% rust - Inhibitive pigments. Carefully apply paint to provide smooth and even surface. A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide frame for roof openings 12" by 12" or larger In size. Drill frame angles for 3/8" diameter bolts spaced not over 18" on center to secure blocking, unless detailed otherwise. A. Fabricate from standard weight steel or stainless steel plpe as indicated, nominal 1 -1/2" O.D. unless otherwise Indicated. B. Provide continuously welded connections with welds ground smooth. Cope joints between rails and posts and weld. Rails may be bent at corners provided bend Is uniform and cross section of rail Is not distorted. C. Provide posts spaced as Indicated, but not over eight feet on center. D. Provide pipe sleeves for posts set In concrete, except where core drilling Is Indicated. Provide sleeves having an inside diameter at least 1/2" larger than outside diameter of posts, at least 6" long, and having bottom closed with a steel plate at least 1" larger than sleeve. E. Provide flanges, fittings, anchors, and closures. for Interconnections of pipe and attachment to other work. F. Shop prime exterior railings, handrails, and accessories, except where stainless steel Is Indicated. 2.11 BURGLAR BARS A. Provide for duct, vent, louver, and similar openings, 8" by 8" or larger, In exterior walls and roof duet exhaust. Construct with 3/4" diameter steel bars spaced not over 9" on center both ways and secured In a steel frame, unless otherwise Indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION OF METAL FABRICATIONS A. Erect metal fabrications using skilled mechanics experienced In erection of ornamental metal. B. Erect work plumb, true, square, and securely attached to supporting construction. Field Joints shall be neat, hairline Joints with METAL FABRICATIONS r 1 TARGET STORES adjoining surfaces in alignment. Completed Installation shall be secure and rigid with sufficient strength to support loads. C. Frames for equipment mounted on roof or hung from JoIsts shall Impart loads to JoIsts at top chord panel polnts only, unless Indicated otherwise. D. Where railings are shown anchored In sleeves preset In concrete, Install posts In sleeves and grout solld. Where core drlilIng Is indicated, drill holes not less than 5" deep and 3/4" larger than outside diameter of posts. Clean holds, Install posts and grout solid. Apply grout according to manufacturer's instructions. For installations exposed to water or exterior, seal exposed grout according to manufacturer's InstruotIons. E. Where poste or rail ends are to be .flange anchored, weld ends to steel oval or round flanges. Secure flange to supporting surface by welding, bolting, or expansion anchors as required. F. Install handrails to support a minimum Toad of 200 lb applled at any point In any direction. G. Coordlnate erection of entry soffit supports and hangers wlth erection of cold formed metal framing. H. Immediately after erection, clean welds, scratches and other abraded spots and touch up with the same paint used for the prime coat. Touch up galvanized surfaces with cold galvanizing. SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 TARGET STORES SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Dimensioned lumber, plywood and accessories. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 18 - Electrical equipment mounting panels. 1.03 REFERENCES A. APA, "American Plywood Association ". B. AWPB LP -2, "Standards for Soft Wood Lumber, Timber, & Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservative for Above Ground Use ", March 1980. C. N.F.P.A., "Manual for House Framing - WCD *1 ". D. PS 1 -83, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood." E. PS 20 -70, "American Softwood Lumber Standard ". F. UL, "Building Materials Dlreotory ". 2.01 LUMBER PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Conform to requirements of PS20. Provide lumber bearing grade and trade mark of appropriate grading association. Provide new, sound, and thoroughly seasoned lumber. B. Do not exceed 19% moisture content of dimension lumber at time of Installation. Do not exceed 14% moisture content of finish lumber. Dress lumber S4S, unless otherwise specified. C. Provide grades and species as follows: 1. Non -Load Bearing Studs: Stud grade, Douglas Fir - larch, Hem -fir, Western Hemlock or Southern Pine. 2. Load Bearing Studs: Douglas Fir - Larch No. 1 or better for dry service conditions. 3. Joists: Douglas Fir-Larch No. 1 or better for dry service conditions. ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.04 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 4. Miscellaneous Blocking, Hailers, and Framing Lumber: Standard Light Framing grade, Douglas Fir - larch, Hem -fir, Western Hemlock or Southern Pine. 5. Boards: No. 2 Common Ponderosa Pine, Sugar Pine or Idaho White Pine. 2.02 SOFTW00D PLYW00D /SHEATHING A. Conform to requirements of PS 1. Provide panels bearing appropriate APA grade and trade mark. Provide exterior grade plywood where any face or edge Is permanently exposed to the weather. B. Provide grades, types, and thicknesses as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Interior Partition Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, C -D, Exposure 1. Minimum 24/0, 1/2" thick. 2. Security Platform: APA Rated Sheathing, C -C, Exposure 1. Minimum 48/24, 3/4" thick. 2.03 HARDBOARD A. Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered service grade. 1. KC Metals (ICBO *2894) 2. Silver Metal Products (ICBO *2039) 3. Simpson Company (ICBO *1258) 4. Union Steel Connectors (ICBO *1540,3969) 5. Substitutions: Submit product literature under provisions of Section 01600. B. Provide hangers and other connectors, and accessories of proper size, type and strength for intended use and material to be fastened, as Indicated on Drawings. Drawing Indications reference Simpson Co. products. Use non - corrosive, non - staining rough hardware for exterior applications. C. Provide anchors indicated on Drawings or otherwise required to attach wood members to masonry and concrete. D. Expansion. Anchors: Kwik Bolts as manufactured by Hlltl; ICBO RR *2158. 06100 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 2.05 POWER DRIVEN FASTENERS A. Acceptable Products: 1. Pnuetek, Inc.: Pneumatically driven fastener with shank diameter of .143 ", head diameter of .315" and head thickness of .073" installed with 1 -1/2" wide 18 guage galvanized steel strap, ICBO *3447. Contact local Pnuetek representative or Pnuetek, Inc.; Hudson, N.H.; 803/883 -1860. 2. Hllti: "DH" powder driven fastener with 1 -7/16" diameter by .080" thick washer, ICBO *2388. B. Performance: Fastener shall be at least as strong as 10d nails used In diaphragm nailing. 2.06 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Pressure Impregnate lumber In the following locations with a waterborne preservative In accordance with AWPB Standard LP -2. Dry lumber to moisture content of not more than 19% after treatment. Fabricate lumber Insofar as possible before treatment. 06100 -2 1. Lumber used for nallers, and other locations In contact with roofing. 2. Lumber used for blocking at openings In exterior walls. 3. Lumber used for plates In contact with concrete or masonry. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Accurately construct work square, true, to required levels and line, and adequately fastened and anchored to produce a rigid system of sufficient strength to support loads. Conform to N.F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing" as a minimum standard of construction and assembly, unless otherwise indicated. Conform to APA recommendations for plywood application, unless otherwise Indicated. 3.02 FRAMING A. Space framing members 24" on center, unless otherwise indicated. Cut framing members accurately with full, square bearing surfaces. Fit members neatly and set plumb to required lines and levels. Do not shim bearing surfaces. Fasten members securely In place at bearings and connections. TARGET STORES Conform to the following minimum requirements unless otherwise Indicated: 1. Double studs at openings. 2. Single sole plates and double top plates. 3. Double 2 by 4 headers set on edge for openings loss than three feet wide, and double 2 by 8 headers for openings from three feet to four feet wide. 4. Space framing, at walls to receive merchandising flxturing, to provide proper support for flxturing inserts. 5. Where framing extends to roof structure above, allow for roof deflection. 3.03 BLOCKING A. Install wood blocking, bucks, nallers and similar Items securely to receive intended work. Shim blocking as necessary to provide a true and level surface. B. Install wood curbs and blocking at roof, and other work In conjunction with roofing and sheet metal, to meet approval of roofing and sheet metal installers. C. Space blocking and furring, at walls to receive merchandising flxturing, to provide proper support. D. Attach blocking to wall panels with expansion anchors or power driven fasteners as indicated. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Cover wood curbs and blocking with a temporary waterproof covering securely fixed In place. Maintain coverings until permanent flashing Is Installed. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY TARGET STORES SECTION 08400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Standing and running trim, and miscellaneous finish carpentry Items. B. Special fabricated cabinet units and hardware. C. Countertops. D. Prefinlshed surfaces. E. Prepared for utilities and fixtures. F. Shelving. G. Closet rod and shelf. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09900 - Back- priming of millwork and trim. B. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and Guide Specifications," 1984 Edition. B. NEMA LD -3 -1980, "High Pressure Decorative Laminates." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for approval. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not Install architectural woodwork until Interior concrete work, and other wet operations are complete, building Is adequately ventilated, and proper temperature and humidity conditions can be maintained during and after Installation. 2.02 PLASTIC LAMINATE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded In accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of 11 percent; speoles and grade as follows: Item Species Cut Cabinet Frame Pine No.2+ Concealed A. Conform to requirements of the NEMA LO-3, Type I, Class 1, General Purpose grade. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Exxon "Nevamar ". 2. Formica Corporatlon "Formica ". 3. Ralph Wilson Plastics "Wilson Art ". C. Color shall be selected by the Owners Representative from manufacturer's standard colors and patterns. 2.03 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 A. Custom grads conforming to AWI Section 200 and 400 as applicable. B. Construct of 3/4" plywood or particleboard, unless otherwise Indicated. Edge with paint grade birch. C. Provide backsplash with edge and face covered with .050" thick plastic laminate. D. Provide backer grade plastic laminate of equal thickness on all unexposed back surfaces. 2.04 FABRICATION CASEWORK A. Fabricate plastic laminate finished casework using "Flush. Overlay" style, "Custom" grade, as defined by AWI standards. B. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site In units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. C. Flt doors and exposed edges with matching plastic laminate edging. Use full length pieces only. D. Fit shelves with matching plastic edging. Use full length pieces only. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 08400 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 E. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 Inch thick. F. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and slto cutting. G. Apply plastic laminate finish In full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Make corners and Joints hairline. Slightly bevel arrlses. H. Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern. I. Mechanically fasten splashbacks to countertops with steel brackets at 16 Inches on center. J. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. K. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, Inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. 2.05 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Custom grade conforming to AWI Section 300. B. Material to be paint grade birch unless otherwise Indicated. 2.06 UTILITY SHELVING A. Economy grade conforming to AWI Section 600. 2.07 HARDWARE A. Cabinet Hardware Standards: ANSI A 156.8, Type 2 Institutional quality; US ?8 brushed chrome finish; unless otherwise noted. B. Drawer and Door Pulls: 4" wire -pull type; Stanley, *4484. C. Drawer Slides: 20" extension, 75 Ib., self - closing type; Knape and Voyt, *1320. D. Countertop Connectors: Concealed type; Knape and Voyt, *516. E. Magnetic Catches: 1. Pull Type: Knape and Voyt, *916. 2. Touch Type: Americl *CM- 32301 -41; Lamp Sugatsune ML -80 F. Pivot Hinges: Concealed pivot type; Stanley, *331. 06400 -2 G. Concealed Hinges: Conc casework type, self - closing from 10"; Stanley, *1510 Series. H. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: Steel, nickel plated, 5/8" wide x 3/16" deep; Knape and Voyt Mfg. Co., *255NP standards with *258 supports. I. Shelf Standards: Knape and Vogt No. 255ZC, adjustable, with No. 258 shelf support clips. J. Fasteners: Size and type for application. 2.08 CLOSET ROD AND BRACKET A. Coat Rod Bracket: Size and type for application indicated. B. Coat Rod: Commerical grade chrome plated rod, 1" dia, with end flanges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Install architectural woodwork using experienced finish carpenters. C. Do not Install millwork and trim until back - priming Is completed. D. Erect architectural woodwork plumb, true and square, In a substantial manner. Install work neatly, free of silvers, open joints and hammer or tool marks. E. Blind nail finish work Insofar as possible, and set surface nails. Securely fasten work to nailing blocks, grounds and furring. Drill hardwoods for nails. Miter moulding and trim on external corners and cope on internal corners. TARGET STORES ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK I TARGET STORES F. Use purpose designed fixture attachments at concealed locations for wall mounted components. G. Use threaded steel concealed Joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. H. Carefully scribe casework which Is against . other building materials, leaving, gaps of 1/16 Inch maximum. Do not use additional 'overlay trim for this purpose. . 1: Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 ,ARCHIT W00DWORi( 06400-3 J. Counter -sink anchorage. devices at exposed locations used to wall mount components. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust .doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures: and other moving or operating parts to fuhotlon smoothly and correctly. : B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures. END OF SECTION 1.01 WORK INCLUDED TARGET STORES SECTION 07200 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL A. Board Insulation, furring and vapor barrier at •exterior wall. B. Batt Insulation and vapor barrier In exterior wall construction. C. Batt Insulation for filling crevices In exterior wall. D. Fire safing Insulation. E. Sound attenuation blanket product specifications. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 06100 - Wood blocking. B. Section 09250 - (INSUL -4) installation of sound attenuation blankets. C. Division 15 - Mechanical system insulation. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with applicable codes for Class I (Class A) flame /smoke ratings of 25 or less /450 or less for Insulation types when tested according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Materials of this Section shall provide a continuous thermal and vapor barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 -84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials." B. ASTM C665 -86, "Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing ". C. FS HH- I -524C, "Insulation Board, Thermal, (Polystyrene)'. D. FS HH- I- 1252B, "Insulation, Thermal, Reflective (Aluminum Foil) ". INSULATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers: SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 (INSUL -3) POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded Polystyrene: Extruded polystyrene Insulation boards conforming to FS HH -I- 524C, Type IV, 1.6 pcf density min., 20 psi compressive strength min., k -value of 0.20, water absorption 0.3% max., water vapor transmission 1.1 perm -Inch max.; Dow Chemical Styrofoam SM or TG. 2.02 (INSUL -4) SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS 1. Owens- Corning "Fiberglass Noise Barrier Batts ". 2. US Gypsum "Thermafiber Sound Attenuating Blankets." B. Unfaced mineral /glass fiber batt insulation conforming to ASTM C665 -84 Type 1. 2.03 (INSUL -5) FIRE SAFING INSULATION A. US Gypsum "Thermafiber Safing Insulation." 2.04 (INSUL -6) WAGED BATT INSULATION A. Unfaced glass fiber batt insulation conforming to ASTM C665 -84 Type I, K -value of 0.32 maximum. 2.05 (INSUL -7) GLASS FIBER BOARD INSULATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Manville Corporation, Commercial Wall insulation CWI 225 FSK. 2. Owens- Corning, CW -225 FSK Insulation. B.•FS HH -I -558, Form A, Class 1, semi -rigid glass fiber type; density of 2.25 paf, faced one side with mesh reinforced aluminum foil; square edges. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Barrier: Flame retardant polyethylene sheets, 4 mil minimum thickness. B. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturers. C. Z- Furring Channels: Metal USG type Z, 24 gage minimum, galvanized steel furring channels. D. Polypropylene Tape: Flame retardant self - adhering type, 2" wide. 07200 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 E. Foil Tape: Flame retardant pressure - sensitive type recommended by Insulation manufacturer for application, 2" wide minimum. F. Fasteners: As recommended my manufacturer of specified Item. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Provide thickness of insulation and related materials to meet required R values and Installation requirements. 3.02 POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION A. Install (INSUL -3) polystyrene board Insulation with Z- furring channels according to manufacturer's installation Instructions and as indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide minimum "R" value of 3.4 per inch. B. Securely anchor furring members to provide adequate support for gypsum board and other finish materials. C. Shim and level furring members and insulation as required to provide a true and even surface for gypsum board application. D. Provide corrosion- resistant sheet metal minimum 0.18" thick, or other material approved by local authorities, as a fire barrier at all exposed edges of insulation. 3.03 FIRE SAFING INSULATION A. Install (INSUL -5) fire safing insulation according to manufacturer's instructions as indicated on Drawings. 3.04 INSULATION OF CRACKS AND VOIDS A. Install (INSUL -8) to fill cracks and voids around framing and blocking, other voids In exterior walla, and voids around wood cants, curbs, and blocking In and about the roof. Wedge In place, completely filling voids. 3.05 GLASS FIBER BOARD INSULATION A. Install: (INSUL -7) glass fiber board insulation at exterior walls not covered with gypsum board. Install using mechanical fasteners. Comply with insulation manufacturer's Instructions for mechanical . fastener pattern and spacing. B. Install with vapor barrier facing toward warm side (winter season). Repair punctures In facing with foil tape. Seal edges and butt Joints with tape to provide continuous vapor barrier. 3.08 VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION END OF SECTION TARGET STORES A. Install vapor barrier on warm side (winter season) of Insulation applied to exterior walls beneath gypsum board. Vapor barrier In locations not covered by gypsum board Is part of Insulation specified. B. Seal edges, Joints, punctures and tears with polypropylene or foil tape. 07200 -2 1.1 gl TARGET STORES SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Roof fleshings and counterflashings. B. Installation of Joint sealants. C. Miscellaneous flashing work not specified as work of other sections. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 07900 - Sealant product specifications. B. Section 09900 - Painting. C. Division 15 - Flashing flanges for roof top units, and equipment. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AA, "Aluminum Construction Manual: Aluminum Sheet Metal Work and Building Construction." B. ASTM A526 -80, "Spec for Steel Sheet, Zino - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality." C. ASTM B32 -83, "Spec for Solder Metal." D. ASTM B209 -83, "Spec for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate." E. FS SS -C -153, "Cement, Bituminous, Plastic." F. SMACNA, "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 2.01 GALVANIZED IRON PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Phosphatized, galvanized, copper bearing steel sheet conforming to ASTM A526, Coating Class G90. B. Fasteners: Galvanized steel or stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers at exposed locations. 2.02 BITUMINOUS PLASTIC CEMENT A. Conform to FS SS -C -153, Type I. Verify compatibility with roofing membrane. 2.03 SOLDER A. 50% lead - 50% tin solder conforming to ASTM B32; commercial soldering flux. 2.04 PLASTIC UNDERLAYMENT 2. Coping, and roof flashing with an exposed vertical face of 8" to 10 ". 3. Hook strips and keepers. 4. Other sheet metal work. 2.07 FABRICATION SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. York Manufacturing "Wascoseal ", Type 20. 2. B.F. Goodrich "BFG Vinyl Water Barrier ". 3. Rubber and Plastics Compound Co. "Nervastral Seal -Proof H -D ". 4. Sandell "Nu -flex PVC Flashing." B. 20 mil thick, polyvinyl chloride sheeting. 2.05 SEALANTS A. Sealant SLNT -1 specified in Section 07900. 2.08 GAUGES OF SHEET METAL A. As Indicated on Drawings. Where not indicated, use galvanized Iron of minimum gauges as follows: 1. Coping, and roof flashing with an exposed vertical face of 8" or less. 24 gauge 22 gauge 22 gauge 24 gauge A. Accurately form .flashing work with brakes, straight, true, and sharp, free from waves and buckles. Match profiles at connections. Bead or return exposed edges for strength and appearance. Provide ribs, cleats, and reinforcement necessary to make sections rigid and substantial. Allow for expansion and contraction. B. Fabricate cap /coping from aluminum to profiles indicated on Drawings or to comply with Industry standard details. C. Overlap seams in direction of flow with finished width of lock seams and soldered lap seams not Tess than 1 ", and finished width of unsoldered lap seams not less than 3 ". Do not lock seam aluminum flashing. D. Generally provide shop Joints single locked and soldered, or lapped, riveted and soldered; and field Joints designed to permit expansion. At field Joints provide Joint covers or lapped Joints with "S" clips, and do not solder. E. Provide Internal corners and external corners lapped, riveted and soldered: Locate field Joints not less than one foot SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR/00 T-827 nor more than three feet from actual corner. Shortest length dimension of any corner piece leg shall not be less•than one foot. F. Provide miscellaneous Items 'of'sheet metal work Indicated on Drawings and not specified under • other Sections. • Fabricate as Indicated. Where specific details are not shown, fabricate according. to SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and AA "Aluminum Construction Manual." 2.08 SOLDERING A. B. 07800 -2 Pretln edges of sheet metal to be soldered with solder on both sides. Width of pretlnning to be not less than 1 -1/2 ". Solder slowly with well heated coppers. Thoroughly heat sheets and completely sweat solder through full width of seam. Use ample solder to provide seams which show not less than 1" of evenly flowed solder. Wherever possible solder work In a flat position. Solder seams with a slope greater than 45 deg a second time. 3.01 COORDINATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. .Coordinate work with roofing and other trades. Furnish metal fleshings and other work required to be bullt into roofing and flashing promptly, so roofing operations may be performed continuously' to completion • without delay.: 3.02 INSTALLATION Install sheet metal work neatly and securely anchor,, In, place. Anchor work. and fora Joints properly to permit expansion and contraction. Overlap seams In direction of flow and slope horizontal surfaces for drainage. Finished work shall be water and , weathertlght. B. Install expansion Joint . In accordance with m anufacturer's instructions. C. Do not place dissimilar metals In•contact or In position where drainage will occur across them. 3.03 PLASTIC UNDERLAYMENT A. Install at expansion Indicated on Drawings. TARGET STORES 3.04 SEALANT A. Seal flashing with specified sealant as Indicated on Drawings. Clean and prime surfaces and Install sealant according to sealant manufacturer's Instructions, and requirements of Section 07900. END OF SECTION t i l! r TARGET STORES SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Cleaning and preparation of Joint surfaces. B. Sealant and backing materials. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 07600 - Installation of polyurethane SLNT -1 related to sheet metal flashing and trim. B. Section 08800 - Glazing tapes C. Section 09250 - Installation of acrylic latex SLNT -3 and acoustical SLNT -6 for gypsum board partitions. D. Section 09300 - Installation of self- leveling polyurethane SLNT -2 in the floors. E. Division 15 - Installation of silicone sanitary SLNT -4 between plumbing fixtures and walls. F. Division 15 - Sealant and caulking of mechanical sleeves and piping above and below grade. G. Dlvslon 18 - Sealant directly related to electrical work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C790, "Recommended Practices for Use of Latex Sealing Compounds ". B. ASTM C804, "Recommended Practice for Use of Solvent - Release Type Sealants ". C. ASTM C834, "Latex Sealing Compounds ". D. ASTM C920, "Elastomerlo Sealants." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit sealant manufacturer's technical data. Include manufacturer's recommendations for Joint size; Joint preparation; back -up material; sealant storage, mixing and application instructions; and specific Instructions for use of primer on this Project. C. Samples: Submit color samples of sealants exposed In finished work for approval. JOINT SEALING 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 A. Do not apply Joint sealing materials at temperatures above or below manufacturer's recommendations, during rain or snow, or to damp or frosted surfaces. 2.01 (SENT -1) POLYURETHANE TWO -PART A. Two -part polyurethane sealant with movement capability of + 50 percent and conforming to ASTM C920, Typi M, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Mameco international, "Vulkem 922". 2. Pecora Corporation, "Dynatrol II ". 3. Sonneborn Building Products, "Sonolastic NP2 ". 4. Tremco "Dymerlc Pius ". B. Color: Custom Color to match color of adjacent finish material to be selected by Owner's Protect Architect. 2.02 (SLNT -2) SELF - LEVELING, TWO -PART POLYURETHANE A. Self - leveling, two -part polyurethane sealant with + 25 percent maximum movement capability and conforming to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. 1. Mameco International, "Vulkem 245 ". 2. Pecora Corporation, "Urexpan NR -200 ". 3. Tremco, "THC- 900 ". 4. Sonneborn Building Products, "Sonolastic SL2 ". B. Color: To be selected by Owner's Protect Architect. 2.03 (SLNT -3) ACRYLIC LATEX A. One -part, non -sag, palntable acrylic latex polymer caulk capable of + 7.5 percent movement and conforming to ASTM C834. 1. Pecora Corporation, "AC -20 Slllconlzed ". 2. Sonneborn Building Products, "Sonolac ". 3. Tremco, "Acrylic Latex 834 ". 2.04 (SLNT -4) SILICONE SANITARY A. Silicone rubber base sanitary sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Dow Corning Corporation, "786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant ". 2. General Electric Company, "GE Silicone Sanitary 1700 Sealant" 07900 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 2.05 (SLNT -6) ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Non - hardening, non - drying, non - bleeding, non - staining sealant. 2.06 (SLNT -7) PRECOMPRESSED EXPANDING FOAM A. Precompressed open cell polyester polyurethane foam Impregnated with neoprene rubber suspended In chlorinated hydrocarbons, In self - adhesive rolled tape form. Provide tape width and thickness recommended by manufacturer for Joint conditions. 2.07 (SLNT -8) FIRE RATED SEALANT A. Provide UL- listed foamed silicone elastomer compound: 2.08 PRIMER A. As recommended by sealant manufacturer for Intended use, including environmental and other conditions affecting bond of sealant. 2.09 JOINT BACKING A. Provlde pre - formed, non- staining, closed cell, expanded polyethylene foam rod except where alternative backing Is recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific application. B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Dow "Ethafoam ". C. Do not use Joint backing Impregnated with oil, tar, or asphalt. Furnish with round edge In thicknesses required. At wall panels with Joints up to 1/2" wide, the rod or tube shall equal width of Joint plus 1/8 "; larger Joints shall be equal to the Joint width plus 1/4 ". If Joint depth Is such that Joint backing cannot be Inserted, use bond breaker tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2.10 SOLVENTS AND CLEANING AGENTS A. As recommended by sealant manufacturer. 07900 -2 1. Tremco, "Acoustical Sealant". 2. United States Gypsum, "Acoustical Sealant ". 1. EM -Seal Corporation, "Gray - Flex ". 2. Ilibruck /USA "Will -Seal Tape Type 150 ". 1. GE "PensiI 851" 2. Dow "3 -6548 RTV Foam" 2.11 MIXING A. Prepare and mix caulking materials and sealants according to manufacturer's Instructions. Do not thin or adulterate materials. 2.12 WORKING TIME TARGET STORES A. Use two - component sealants within maximum period of time after mixing recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific material and Job conditions, and discard sealant not used within this time. 3.01 PREPARATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Prior to caulking or sealing surfaces shall be sound, thoroughly dry, clean and free of oil, grease, Iaitance, rust and other foreign material that would prevent proper adhesion. Concrete and mortar shall be thoroughly cured. B. Complete masonry cleaning and similar operations before surface preparation is begun. C. Clean and prepare Joints and surfaces to receive sealants according to sealant manufacturer's Instructions. D. Rake and clean out Joints to full depth and width. E. Clean concrete, masonry and other porous materials by brushing, grinding, sand blasting or other mechanical means as necessary to provide a sound, clean surface. Remove .dust, dirt and loose particles resulting from mechanical cleaning by vacuuming Joints or blowing out Joints with compressed air. F. Clean glass, metal and other non- porous surfaces. Remove protective coatings on metal using a solvent that leaves no residue. Use olean white cloths or Tintless paper towels to apply solvent, and wipe surfaces dry with dry cloths or paper towels. Do not allow solvent to air dry without wiping. G. Mask Joints as necessary to protect adjacent surfaces and to assure clean, sharp line along the Joint. Apply masking tape In continuous strips and carefully align with edge of Joint. Remove masking Immediately after Joints have been sealed and tooled. JOINT SEALING TARGET STORES 3.02 APPLICATION OF SEALANTS A. Install Joint backing according to manufacturer's Instructions In Joints to receive sealant. Use proper size and shape pieces so Installed Joint backing Is compressed approximately 30% and face of foam Is at required depth. Do not twist or braid rod stock. Do not puncture skin of rod stock. Carefully roll rod stock into Joint without stretching. B. Prime surfaces according to sealant manufacturer's instructions. C. Apply sealant according to manufacturer's Instructions and in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants; C790 for latex base sealants. D. Gun -apply sealant unless otherwise noted, using a nozzle of sufficient size to fill Joint completely. E. Caulk wide Joints with three passes. Run a bead at each Inside corner, and fill Joint with a third pass. F. Tool Joints Immediately after application of material to Insure full contact with adJacent surfaces. Strike off excess material. Provide finished bead flush with adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise Indicated on Drawings. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded material, ridges, and sags. H. Remove masking, excess material and smears as the work progresses, and leave adJacent surfaces clean and free of sealant and primer. I. All Joints shalt be watertlght. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF SLNT -1 A. Use SLNT -1 where indicated on Drawings, for Joints subJect to movement, similar conditions and for other sealant work subJect to movement not otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein. Typical areas Include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Exterior wall Joints 2. Masonry control Joints 3. Door frames 4. Non - sleeved mechanical and electrical penetrations In exterior walls above grade. JOINT SEALING SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 B. Joints to receive SLNT -1 shall be not Tess than 1/4" and not exceed 1/2" In width. Depth of sealant shall be as follows: Joint Width Min. Depth Max. Depth 1/4" to 1/2" 1/4" Equal to Width C. Apply one coat of primer when recommended by sealant manufacturer to masonry and concrete surfaces prior to sealing. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF SLNT -2 A. Use SLNT -2 for horizontal surface Joints subJect to foot or vehicular traffic where indicated on Drawings and as specified. Typical areas Include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Sidewalks and stoop adJacent to building 2. interior exposed Joints In slabs subJect to foot or vehicular traffic 3. Interior exposed perimeter joints In slabs abutting walls and other vertical surfaces. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF SLNT -3 A. Refer to Section 09250 for SLNT -3 installation requirements In gypsum board partitions. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF SLNT -4 A. Use SLNT -4 where Indicated on Drawings, and for Joints around counters, fixtures, and walls In toilet rooms and food court area requiring sanitary sealant. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF SLNT -8 A. Refer to Section 09250 for installation requirements In gypsum board partitions. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF SLNT -7 A. Use SLNT -7 where Indicated on Drawings, including roof coping. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF SLNT -8 A. Use SLNT -8 At penetrations through .fire rated assemblies. END OF SECTION 07900 -3 1 TARGET STORES SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Non -rated and fire rated steel doors, panels, and frames. B. Interior sidelite frames. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08700 - Hardware. B. Section 08800 - Glass and glazing. C. Section 09900 - Field painting. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of S.D.I. -100. 1.04 REFERENCES A. DHI, "Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors In Wood Frames, and Builders Hardware ". B. S.D.I. -100, "Standard Steel Doors and Frames ". C. S.D.I. -105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames ". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for approval. Include details of field splices and anchorage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Ceco B. Curries C. Kewanee 0. Masker E. Pioneer F. Republlo G. Steelcraft 2.02 WELDED ONE PIECE HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Steelcraft "F" series (2" wide face unless otherwise indicated), or comparable frames of other acceptable manufacturers. B. Construct of 16 gauge (interior frames) and 14 gauge (exterior frames) cold rolled steel with one piece, welded, unit type construction. Factory assemble frames in largest sections possible. C. Accurately form breaks true and sharp with corners square and in alignment. Fully miter and continuously weld corners Including fixed stops on the back side, with faces ground to hairline Joints. Finished work to be smooth and free from warps and buckles. D. Construct removable glazing stops of 16 gauge steel. Factory fit and Install stops. Form neat hairline Joints. Install stops using screws not over 16" on center with at least two screws per piece. E. Provide stiffeners and reinforcing Indicated on Drawings or otherwise necessary to insure a rigid and secure Installation. F. Provide floor clips for frames. Provide Jamb anchors spaced not over 30" on center for frames. Furnish temporary spreader bars and bracing. G. Thoroughly clean, phosphate treat, and apply one coat of rust Inhibitive primer containing at least 50% rust Inhibitive pigments. Prime frames under removable glazing stops and prime back side of removable stops. 2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Flush: SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 1. Steelcraft "L" series doors, or comparable doors of other acceptable manufacturers. Provide 18 gauge cold rolled steel, 1 -3/4" thick, of full flush hollow metal construction, with two formed steel sheets laminated to an Impregnated kraft honeycomb core. 3. Form vertical edges with continuous, mechanical Interlocking Joints. 4. Reinforce top and bottom edges with a 14 gauge channel welded to face sheets. 5. Close top of exterior doors with rigid vinyl or steel cap to form watertight closure. B. Provide door undercut as follow: 1. Interior 1/2" 2. Exterior 1/8" 3. Verify undercut with thickness of final floor finish material. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 C. Provide for glazing as Indicated on the Drawings. Construct glazing stops of not less than 18 gauge steel. Fit and Install stops In the factory. For neat hairline Joints. D. Thoroughly clean, phosphate treat and apply one coat of rust- Inhibitive primer containing at least 50% rust Inhibitive pigments. 2.04 PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE A. P,ropare doors for hardware scheduled In Section 08700. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap for mortised hardware, and reinforce for surface applied hardware: Mortise to hairline accuracy with no oversized punching. B. Reinforce 'doors and frames with 8 gauge steal'plate at each butt. C. Reinforce for lock front and strike with 18 gauge steel. Reinforce frames for closers with 12 gauge steel plate, and reinforce doors with 12 gauge steel channel. Other reinforcing to be not less than 12 gauge steel. D. Cover mortises In frames with pressed steel mortar 'boxes. E. Furnish at least three rubber door silencers for each frame for single doors and two silencers for each frame for pairs of doors. Drill frames for door silencers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Install- frames according to S.D.I. -105. Erect: frames plumb, square and true to line. B. Install doors according to DHI. Install with uniform margins at Jambs and head. C. Install transom panels securely as detailed. D. After erection, clean frames and doors and touch up scratches and other abraded spots with same paint used for prime coat. END OF SECTION TARGET STORES TARGET STORES SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wood doors. B. Prefltting and premachlning for hardware. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110 - Steel frames. B. Section 08700 - Hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glass and glazing. D. Section 09900 - Finishing of doors. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of AWI "Quality Standards" as specified. B. Furnish listed doors from acceptable manufacturers as appropriate to maintain rated assembly using hardware specified In Section 08700. 1.04 REFERENCES A. AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and Guide Specifications ", 1984 Edition. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for approval. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not Install doors until Interior concrete work, masonry, plastering and other wet operations are complete, building Is adequately ventilated and proper temperature and humidity conditions can be maintained during and after Installation. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Algoma Hardwoods 6. Eggers C. Weyerhauser WOOD DOORS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.02 SOLID CORE DOORS SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 A. 1 -3/4" thick, 5 ply, particleboard core, for Interior use, Custom Grade conforming to AWI Section 1300 Type PC -5 for stain and varnish finish. B. Face Veneer: Plain Sliced Honduras Mahongany. C. Crossbands: Not Tess than 1/16" thick hardwood. Combined thickness of crossbands and face veneer shall be not less than 1/12 ". D. Edge Strips: Closed -grain hardwood glued to core. Stile edge strips not less than 1 3/8" thick, top and bottom rails not less than 1 -1/8" thick. 2.03 PREPARATION A. Profit doors at factory, and premachlne for hardware. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install wood doors using experienced finish carpenters, In conformance with. manufacturer's requirements and AWI quality standards. B. Trim and fit doors ready to receive finish hardware with door to frame and floor clearances as follows: Top Rall and Sides 1/8 Inch. Bottom Rall 1/2 Inch. C. Prepare doors to receive finish hardware according to AWI requirements. D. Work carefully to avoid damage to door. Completed work shall be neat, free of tool marks with exposed surfaces undamaged. E. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced movement. END OF SECTION 08200 -1 TARGET STORES SECTION 08700 - HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Hardware for wood and hollow steel doors. B. Thresholds and gasketting. C. Where Items of hardware not definitely or correctly specified are required for completion of work, direct attention of discrepancy In writing to Owner, prior to award of Contract, for clarification by addendum; or, furnish such items In the type and quality established by this specification, and appropriate to the service Intended. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Owner will furnish oonstruotlon and permanent cores for hardware applications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier's Qualifications: Hardware shall be supplied by an experienced builder's hardware supplier authorized by hardware manufaoturers to sell the respective items of hardware furnished for Protect. Except where specified In the Hardware Schedule, furnish products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Hardware mounted on doors required to have a UL label or 20 minute rating shall be listed by UL to conform with requirements for class of opening scheduled. Where UL requirements conflict with Drawings or Specifications, UL requirements shall have precedence. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI A115.2 - 1982, "Spec for Standard Steel Door and Frame Preparations for Bored Cyllndrloal Locks for 1 -3/8" and 1 -3/4" Doors ". B. OHI, Door and Hardware Institute. C. FS FF- H -106a, "Hardware, Builders; Locks and Door Trim - Standard Finishes for Builders' Hardware ". D. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. HARDWARE B. Hardware Schedule: 2.01 HARDWARE 2.02 FINISHES PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 1. Submit Hardware Schedule for approval. 2. Clearly Indicate on Hardware Schedule the manufacturer of each Item proposed, Including those Items listed In these specifications. Schedules which do not comply will be returned for correction before checking or approval. 3. Upon request, furnish Owner's separate contractors with copies of final Hardware Schedule. C. Keying Schedule: Keying will be determined by Owner directly with lock manufacturer. D. Samples: Upon request, submit samples of selected hardware for approval. Samples shall Indicate hardware Item, base metal, finish, manufacturer's name, type, number, and Intended location. E. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each trade where mortising, tapping, reinforcing or similar preparatory work during fabrication is required to receive hardware. Furnish templates Immediately after hardware schedule Is approved. F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish special Installation and adJustment tools and manufacturer's written Installation and adjustment Instructions for Items of hardware. A. New, free from scratches, mars and other defects. Furnish hardware complete with accessories of proper size and design required for the purpose Intended, including screws, shields, and other anchorage devices necessary for complete Installation. A. As follows, unless otherwise specified: 1. Butts: a. Exterior Doors: US320 b. Interior Painted Doors: USP 2. Locks: US26D 3. Closers: AL 4. Overhead Stops and Holders: AL 5. Wall and Floor Stops: US26D 6. Kick Plates: US32D 7. Weatherstrlps....Clear anodized aluminum 8. Thresholds: MIlI aluminum 9. Miscellaneous Hardware: US26D 08700 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 2.03 BUTT HINGES, MISCELLANEOUS HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Acceptable manufacturers of butt hinges and respective product numbers: HAGER LAWRENCE McKINNEY STANLEY BB1199 BB5151A T4B3388 FBB199 BB1279 BB4101 TB2714 FBB179 1279 4181 T2714 F179 2080 NOTE: Provide flat button tips at butts. 2.04 CLOSERS A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective product numbers: B. Size closers according to manufacturer's recommendations for Individual door sizes and locations. C. Supply adapter and drop plates as required to suit mounting conditions. Where wall conditions and specified closers permit, doors shall swing 180 degrees. D. Provide closer mounting templates, revised as required, to assure that doors Iooated In back to back, or Individual conditions, do not strike each other, or other store features, when fully opened. E. Maximum effort to operate doors shall not exceed 8.5 pounds for exterior doors and 5 pounds for Interior doors. 2.05 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS A. Manufactured by Best. B. Cylindrical Locks: 83K heavy duty series. C. Lever Handle Trim: D. Strikes: Provide ANSI A115.2 type for hollow metal doors and frames. Provide wrought box type for Inactive leaf of pairs of wood doors. Provide lip length sufficient to protect trim, frame, or Inactive leaf. 08700 -2 LCN 4041 4040 Cush 8750 NORTON 7500BF 1. Marshall 9A for 83K Series cylindrical locks 2. Manufacturer's Tactile Trim Option AL Abrasive Lever. 2.06 PERMANENT CYLINDERS AND CORES A. Furnish Best "Universal Locking System" cylinders for use with six and seven pin tumbler Interchangeable cores. B. Provide standard and crush -proof cylinder rings as specified and /or required for proper Installation with cylinders. C. The Owner will furnish Best Interchangeable cores for permanent Installation. 2.07 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION CORES A. The Owner will furnish temporary construction cores and keys during construction as required. B. Coordinate with Owner for exchange of construction cores for permanent cores at the completion of the project. 2.08 FLUSH BOLTS AND DUSTPROOF STRIKES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective product numbers: DOOR GLYNN- DESCRIPTION IVES CONTROLS JOHNSON Manual F.B. 458 FB8 Dust Proof Strike 488 80 DP -1 ' Auto. F.B. 559 842NH FB -7 Constant Latch F.B. 357 FB -9 B. Locate oenter line of top bolt not more than 78" from finished floor. 2.09 KICK PLATES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Brookline 2. Curran Engineering Company 3. Hiawatha 4. Wilkinson TARGET STORES B. Kick Plates: Provide 0.050" thick x 10" high stainless steel plates with four edges beveled unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Width for single doors shall be 2" less than door width on stop side and 1" less than door width on face side. Width for pairs of doors shall be 1" less than door width on both sides. HARDWARE TARGET STORES 2.10 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers and respective product numbers: GLYNN RIXSON DESC: JOHNSON QUALITY IVES FIREMARK Wall: Convex 50W W302 408 Concave 60W W307...406- 1/2... - -- Stops: Overhead....0J560 55 B. Provide either a wall, floor or overhead stop at all doors unless otherwise indicated In Hardware Schedule. Where type Is not specified, provide 60W or 50W wall stop as applicable. If wall stops are unsuitable, furnish GJ560 overhead stops. 2.11 SWEEPS, WEATHERSTRIPS, AND JAMB GASKETS A. Manufacturers and respective product numbers: NATIONAL GUARD PEMKO REESE HARDWARE 200N PF181 B. Provide jamb gaskets as required by code at all rated openings. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. Reese No. S245A or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 315 -N 323 S88 797 3.01 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE A. install according to hardware manufacturer's Installation Instruotlons and warranty requirements using experienced finish carpenters. Install hardware on labeled openings to maintain label. B. Completely fit hardware before final coat of paint or other finish Is applied, and then remove until final finish coat Is applied. Perform mortises and cutting neatly, and conceal evidence of cutting In finished work. Permanently Install hardware after finishing operations are complete and dry. Protect from scratching or other damage. SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 C. Mount door hardware as follows unless otherwise Indicated on Drawings. For Items not listed, conform to recommended mounting locations of OHI: 1. Look and Latch Sets: Center knob or lever 38' above floor. 2. Door Holders and Closers: As recommended by the manufacturer for the degree of opening. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, stair side of stairway doors, and Interior side of exterior doors, unless otherwise Indicated. 3. Kick Plates: Mount on push side of door except where Indicated for both sides of doors. 4. Door Stops: As near the strike edge of door as possible, or as recommended by manufacturer. Do not mount on cabinets, casework, equipment, or furnishings. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At final completion, adjust and test hardware for function and performance, and leave In good operating condition. Clean to restore original finish. PART 4 - SCHEDULES 4.01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE - GENERAL GROUP 1: 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 DOOR NUMBER: 106A, 106B & 107 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 1 -1/2 pair butts F179 4- 1/2x4 -1/2 1 latchset 83K -ON9A 1 stop 50W GROUP 2: 111111111111111111111111111111 11I111!!IlItIltIltIt DOOR NUMBER: 108, 111, 112, 113, 120, 121, 122 & 123 111 111111111111111111111111111111111111IIIItIlllI1 1 -1/2 pair butts F179 4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2 1 lockset 83K -6AB9A 1 stop 60W 08700 -3 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 GROUP 3: 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 DOOR NUMBER: 115 & 118 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 1 -1/2 palr butts FBB179.4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2 1 Iockset 83K-609A 1 stop GJ560 Note:: Provide tactile hardware. GROUP 4: 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 DOOR NUMBER: 102, 103, 104, & 114 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 1 -1/2 palr butts FBB179 4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2 1 latchset' 83K -ON9A 1 closer 4041 1 klckplate Manufacturer's standard 1 stop 50W GROUP 5: 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 DOOR NUMBER: 101 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 1 -1/2 palr butts FBB199 4 -1/2 x.4 -1/2 NRP 1 Iockset 83K -8C9A 1 closer 4041 Cush 1 klckplate Manufacturer's standard 1 threshold S245A 1 sweep 323 1 set weatherstrip 797 GROUP 6: II "II II IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII "Ii I DOOR'NUMBER 1106 b;118 1 11, 1111111111111111111111111111111 .1111.111111111111 3 pair butts 2080 _Spring. Hinge) 4 -1/2 x 4 -,1/2 1 Iockset • 83K -8D9A (Blank side) 1 set flushbolts 458 (Inaotive'.Isaf) 2 stops • 60W GROUP 7: 11111111111IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII .IIIIII111:1111111 DOOR NUMBER 110C 1111111111.1111111111111111111111111111111111111111 3 pair butts 2060 Spring Hinge 4 - 1/2 x 4 -1/2 2 magnetic oatohes SP45 2 sets wire pulls 4486 2 stops 60W 08700 -4' END OF SECTION TARGET STORES 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.04 REFERENCES TARGET STORES SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL A. Glass and glazing as Indicated on Drawings Including, but not limited to the following locations: 1. Hollow metal sidelltes. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01700 - Final cleaning of glass. • B. Section 10010 - Mirror -shelf combination. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to FGMA Glazing Manual for glazing Installation methods. B. Comply with safety glazing requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR -1201. A. ANSI Z97.1 -1975, "Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used In Buildings ". B. CPSC 16CFR -1201, "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials". C. FGMA, "Glazing Manual ", 1980 Edition. D. FS DD- G -451D, "Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Flgured (Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses) ". E. FS DD -G -1403, "Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet, Flgured, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered) ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glass: 1. ASG Industries 2. Hordis Bros., Inc. 3. Libby -Owens -Ford 4. PPG Industries B. Glazing Materials: 1. Dow Corning 2. General Electric 3. Tremco SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 2.02 TINTED LAMINATED GLASS (GL -1) A. Laminated, Neat- Stronthened Glass; Two layers 3/16" thick, ASTM C1048; Type 1, Class 1, q3 quality, Kind HS laminated with 0.060" medium gray polyvinyl butryal Interlayer. 2.03 TEMPERED CLEAR GLASS (GL -2) A. 1/4" thick; Class 1. FS DD -G -1403, Type I, q3 quality, Grade B, horizontally tempered, clear float glass. B. Provide where required by "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materlals" and where indicated on the Drawings. 2.04 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Provide colors of glazing materials exposed to view In the finished work as selected from the manufacturer's standard colors. B. Provide glazing materials as follows: 1. Glazing Tape: Tremco 440 Tape. 2. Setting Blocks: Neoprene with a Shore A hardness of 70 -90 durometer. Setting blocks shall be not Tess than 3" long nor more than 8" long. Length shall be such that loading Is 15 psl. Setting blocks shall be full width of rabbet where possible. 3. Spacer Blocks: Neoprene with a Shore A hardness of 40 -50 durometer, 1" to 3" long. 3.01. INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Conform to requirements of references. B. Accurately cut glass to flt actual openings while maintaining proper clearances. C. Set glass over 8 square feet In area using two setting blocks. Locate setting blocks at quarter points where possible. Where not possible, move both blocks equally toward the edges. Locate setting blocks not closer to edge than 1/8 the glass width or 6 ", whichever Is greater. D. Set glass using spacers to Insure proper edge clearance and uniform beads of compound. Conform to clearances required by the FGMA "Glazing Manual" and the glazing material manufacturer's recommendations. Center glass In glazing rabbets. GLAZING 08800 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 E. Clean sash rabbets and stops before glazing.: Prime rabbets as required by glazing material manufacturer. F. Apply glazing materials according to manufacturer's Instructions. G. Install exterior glazing watertight. 3.02 INTERIOR FRAMES A. Glaze Interlor hollow metal borrowed Ilte frames using glazing tape onr'both sides. Firmly glaze in place with cracks sealed, free of rattles: 3.03 CLEANING A. Upon completion of glazing, clean glass and leave free of traces ' :of'glazing material. Final cleaning of glass Is specified In Section 01700. END OF SECTION TARGET STORES TARGET STORES SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Light gage metal framing and furring for interior non -load- bearing wall and ceiling framing. B. Installation of acoustical Insulation. C. Gypsum board. D. Taped and sanded Joint treatment. E. Installation of Joint sealants. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 06100 - Wood framing, blocking, and furring. B. Section 07200 - Acoustloal Insulation product specifications. C. Section 07900 - Joint sealant product specifications. D. Section 09900 - Surface finish. E. Divisions 15 and 16 - Sealing of mechanical and electrical penetrations of fire -rated partitions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct gypsum drywall partition. and ceiling systems according to gypsum board manufacturer's current • printed specifications. B. Provide products of one manufacturer for each major product type, such as gypsum board or steel studs. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Where a fire resistance rating Is required, construct to achieve required fire resistance rating according to applicable UL listed assemblies. 2. Where lateral support of partitions and suspended ceilings Is required for seismic bracing, construct the Work as specified herein and to meet applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations. GYPSUM BOARD 1.04 REFERENCES SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 A. ASTM A525 -83, "Spec for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process ". B. ASTM A588 -83, "Spec for General Requirements for Steel, Carbon and High- Strength Low - Alloy Hot - Rolled Sheet and Cold - Rolled Sheet ". C. ASTM A641 -82, "Spec for Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire'. D. ASTM C36 -84, "Spec for Gypsum Wallboard ". E. ASTM C475 -81, "Spec for Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction ". F. ASTM C557 -73 (1978), "Spec for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing ". G. ASTM C630 -84, "Spec for Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Board ". H. ASTM C645 -83, "Spec for Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board ". I. ASTM C1002 -83, "Spec for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board ". J. FS QQ- W -461H, "Wire, Steel, Carbon, Round, Bare and Coated ". K. GA - 218, "Recommended Specs for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard ". L. UL, "Fire Resistance Directory ". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Samples: 1. OSR will designate one permanent gypsum board surface as a sample surface. Surface shall be full height, approximately 12 feet wide, and contain at least two vertical Joints, Including one control Joint. Tape, finish and paint sample surface. 2. Do not proceed with gypsum board application and finishing until sample surface Is approved by OSR. Approved sample surface shall be a standard for remainder of Work. 09250 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not tape and finish Interior gypsum board when temperature Is below 60 deg F. Malntaln the temperature of the room at not less than 60 deg F for 48 hours before taping and finishing Is begun. Maintain 60 deg F minimum temperature during and after Installation. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excess moisture. B. Do not tape and finish exterior gypsum board soffit when air or surface temperature is below 45 deg F. Malntaln 45 deg F minimum temperature during and after Installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL .STUDS AND FURRING MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dietrich industries, Inc. 2. Gold Bond Building Products Division of National Gypsum. 3. Unlmast Corporation (formerly United States Gypsum. B. Design Is based on the products specified herein. Products of other specified manufacturers are acceptable only where the material and section properties meet or exceed the specified products. C. Provide minimum 25 gage, non -load bearing galvanized steel studs, runners, and furring channels for screw application of gypsum board, conforming to ASTM C645. Provide studs with cutouts for pipe and conduit. D. Where product type, size, or gage Is not specified, conform to manufacturer's current printed specifications and local code requirements for limiting criteria. E. Drywall Furring Channels: 7/8" deep, hat - shaped sections with a 2 -9/16" wide back and a 1 -1/4" face, screw -type steel conforming to ASTM A568, with hot -dip galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A525. F. Clips, Screws and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard type for attachment of steel studs, runners and drywall furring channels. G. Cold - Rolled Channels: 3/4 ", 1 -1/2" or 2" cold - rolled steel channels. Minimum weight per lineal foot shall be 0.3001bs for 3/4" channels, 0.475 Ibs for 1 -1/2" channels and 0.590 Ibs for 2" channels. Coat channels with rust - inhibitive paint after forming. 09250 -2 H. Strap Bridging: 3 -5/8" wide 24 gage steel, unless otherwise Indicated, with hot -dip galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A525. 1. Tie Wire: Galvanized steel wire, soft annealed, minimum 18 gage. J. Hanger Wire: Galvanized steel wire, soft annealed, prestretched conforming to ASTM A841, minimum eight gage, unless otherwise Indicated. Provide zinc coating not less than FS QQ- W -461H, Class 1. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD A. Acceptable Manufacturers: TARGET STORES 1. Domtar Gypsum, Inc. 2. Gold Bond Building Products Division of National Gypsum 3. United States Gypsum B. Minimum Lengths of Material: Provide material that exceeds ceiling heights as Indicated on Drawings. If ceiling height exceeds length produced by acceptable manufacturers, provide maximum length available. C. Gypsum Board: 5/8" thick unless noted otherwise, 48" wide wallboard with tapered edges conforming to ASTM C36. Provide Type X for fire resistive rated assemblies, and where indicated. D. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: 5/8" thick unless noted otherwise, 48" wide backing board with tapered edges conforming to ASTM C630. E. Corner Bead: US Gypsum 'OUR-A -BEAD' F. Exterior Casing Bead: U.S. Gypsum No. 801 -B Metal Trim. G. Casing Bead: US Gypsum No. 200 4 Metal Trim. H. Control Joint: US Gypsum No. 093 Control Joint. I. Fasteners: Screws, clips, ties and other fasteners as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. Screws shall conform to ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated on Drawings for metal framing, provide 1TW Bulldex "TEK" screws, or comparable products of Atlas or USG. J. Adhesive: Non - bituminous base adhesive as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for type of installation and material to receive gypsum wallboard. Adhesive for fastening to wood members shall conform to ASTM C557. GYPSUM BOARD A 1 TARGET STORES K. Joint Treatment System: Perforated tape and Joint compound system recommended by gypsum board manufacturer and conforming to ASTM C475. For exterior Joints provide US Gypsum 'DURABOND' Joint compounds as recommended by manufacturer. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Acoustical Insulation: INSUL -4 as specified in Section 07200. B. Acoustical Sealant: SLNT -8 as specified In Section 07900. C. Acrylic Latex Sealant: SLNT -3 as specified In Section 07900. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install steel studs, runners, furring material, gypsum wall board, glass fiber reinforced gypsum shapes, miscellaneous materials, accessories, and related materials according to manufacturer's recommendations and GA -216. B. Align partltlons accurately according to Drawings. Coordinate with work of other trades. 3.02 STEEL STUD PARTITIONS - GENERAL A. Construct steel stud partltlons as indicated on Drawings In accordance with code requirements and manufacturers current printed specifications. B. Space studs 24" on center, unless otherwise Indicated. C. Provide minimum 25 gage studs to limit deflection to L/240 at minimum 5 psf lateral force applied perpendicular to partltlon. Provide bracing as required at maximum unsupported lengths as recommended by the stud manufacturer to achieve specified maximum deflection. D. Extend steel stud partltlons to structure (beam bottom or roof deck) above unless Indicated otherwise. Securely attach top leg runner to structure not over 24" o.c, Inset top channel runner Inside leg runner to allow for roof deflection. E. Provide lateral bracing for partltlons not extending to structure above. Brace with opposing splayed hanger wires, minimum 12 gauge, at 8' -0" on center maximum. GYPSUM BOARD SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 F. Secure floor runners to floor with concrete stub nails or power driven anchors spaced not over 24" on center. G. Install studs for partltlons 18 feet or less In height full height without splices. Where splices are required, lap studs by nesting at least 8" and screw together with two screws In each flange. Securely attach studs to floor and top runners. H. Place studs directly against Jambs of hollow metal frames, abutting partltlons, Internal partltlon corners, and similar locations. Anchor studs to runners with screws or other positive fasteners. 1. Securely anchor studs to Jamb and head anchor clips at hollow metal frames with screws or bolts. Install a runner with web and flanges bent down at each end across head of hollow metal frames, and screw each flange to vertical studs. Install Jack studs above frame. 3.03 FIRE RATED AND ACOUSTICAL PARTITIONS A. Extend fire rated partitions and partltlons having acoustical Insulation to structure (beam bottom or roof deck) above, unless Indicated otherwise. Install 1 -1/2" minimum thickness acoustical Insul -4 tightly fitted between studs where Indicated on Drawings. Attach acoustical Insulation to gypsum board by stapling through paper grommets or over nails to prevent settling. 3.04 PARTITION REINFORCING A. Reinforce partitions as necessary to support fixtures and other Items to be mounted on the walls. Provide 25 gage minimum galvanized sheet metal plate reinforcing for attachment of light Items to partitions. Refer to Section 06100, Carpentry, for wood blocking. 3.05 SUSPENDED CEILINGS A. Securely attach hanger wires to structure above. Space hangers along direction of main runner cold - rolled channels not over four feet on center, and locate hangers not more than 6" from ends of runners. B. Space 1 -1/2" main runner cold - rolled channels not over four feet on center. Locate main runners within 8" of parallel walls. Keep ends of main runners at least 1" away from walls. Install main runners level, true to plane, and at the required elevation with hangers saddle tied. C. Where hanger spacing must exceed four feet on center, use hangers spaced not over five 09250 -3 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 D. Where main runners are spliced, lap ends not less than one foot with channel flanges Interlocked, and tie each end of lap with double loops of 16 gauge wire. E. Space cross runner drywall furring channels not over two feet on center. Saddle tle to main runners with strands of 16 gauge wire at each crossing, or use manufacturer's standard clips. Locate cross runners about 2" from parallel walls, and hold ends at least 1" away from walls. F. Where main runners or cross runners are Interrupted by Ilght fixtures, grilles and registers, or other openings, Install additional runners to frame openings. Reinforce framing as necessary to support Ilght fixtures, grilles, registers, and other Items mounted In the ceiling. Maximum allowable deflection shall be 1/360 of the span. G. Do not suspend ceiling framing from metal deck, conduit, ductwork or piping except where indicated on Drawings. Where hanger spacing and spans exceed specified spans, use hangers with a larger capacity, larger main runners or additional reinforcing members, hangers, stiffening, or bracing as necessary to support the loads, without exceeding the specified deflection. H. Where ceilings return to a higher ceiling, form vertical surfaces with metal studs suspended from structure above or as detailed on Drawings. Space studs not over 24" on center. Brace studs with diagonal bracing spaced not over four feet on center. 3.06 FURRING OF MASONRY AND CONCRETE WALLS A. Install drywall furring channels vertically and spaced not over 24" on center. Shim as necessary. Secure channels with anchors spaced not over 24" on center and staggered on opposite flanges. Make splices by nesting at least 8", and securely anchor with two anchors In each flange. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD - GENERAL A. 5/8" thick applied over studs and 1/2" thick elsewhere, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. Install gypsum board vertically with and Joints over supports on walls and partitions In finished spaces. Use the longest board possible to minimize butt end Joints. 09250 -4 feet on center and 2" main runner cold - rolled channels spaced not over three feet on center. TARGET STORES C. Install gypsum board on ceilings and soffits with end Joints over supports, to minimize butt end Joints. Stagger end Joints of adjacent boards at least 12 ". D. Construct walls and chases containing plumbing with water resistant gypsum board to four feet above the floor. Provide full height water resistant gypsum board In toilets, Janitor closets, walls to receive ceramic tile, and other locations subject to moisture damage. E. Install gypsum board with true even surfaces and straight sharp corners. Install gypsum board on ceilings bofore walls using full length boards where possible. Stagger end joints on the same side of a wall. Do not allow end joints on opposite sides to occur over the same support. Do not locate normal end joints at edge of openings. Form Joints neatly. Butt boards together but do not force Into place. Do not place butt ends against tapered edges. Allow no Joint gap greater than 1/4 ". F. Fasten gypsum board beginning at the center and work toward the outer edges. Hold board firmly against supports while fastening. Locate fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends and edges. Locate fasteners 3/8" to 1/2" from edge of board. G. Construct Internal corners with floating Interior angles. Install corner reinforcing at external corners, and Install casing beads where gypsum board abuts other materials. H. Accurately locate and neatly cut openings for electrical devices, piping, grilles, and registers, so openings closely fit the devices and are completely covered by plates and escutcheons. 3.08 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. Install gypsum board using screws, except where adhesive Installation Is Indicated on Drawings. B. Space screws according to the rated design for fire resistive partitions and ceilings. C. Screw gypsum board to wood framing with screws spaced not over 12" on center. D. Screw gypsum board to steel framing and furring as follows: For walls with gypsum board applied vertically, space screws 8" on center, maximum, along edges and 12" on center, maximum, In the center. For walls with gypsum board applied horizontally, and ceiling construction, space screws 12" on center, maximum. GYPSUM BOARD v 1 TARGET STORES SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 3.09 CONTROL JOINTS A. Install control Joints In walls and partitions not over 30 feet on center, at each change of substrate, and above each door Jamb as Indicated on Drawings except as follows: 1. Control Joints are not required In walls which will not be taped, or taped and finished. B. Locate Joints not Indicated on Drawings above door frames whenever possible. 3.10 SEALING A. Apply acoustical SLNT -6 In concealed locations. B. Apply acrylic latex SLNT -3 In exposed locations. C. Seal partition perimeter Joints where fire rated and acoustically Insulated partitions are shown on the Drawings. Seal Joints In backer board occurring behind control Joints. D. Seal around pipes, ducts, conduit, and other Items penetrating non -rated gypsum board partitions. Seal backs and sides of electrical boxes. E. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for sealing of mechanical and electrical penetrations In fire -rated partitions. F. Seal Joints, cut edges, nail and screw heads, and punctures In water resistant gypsum board with a waterproofing sealant recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. 3.11 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape and finish gypsum board surfaces exposed to view In finished work. Apply tape only (no finishing) on fire resistive and sound rated partitions occurring above suspended ceilings, and gypsum board surfaces to receive ceramic tile. B. Apply materials strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations. Fill Joints with Joint compound, embed perforated tape, and apply a skim coat of Joint compound over tape. Apply two additional coats of Joint compound allowing at least 24 hours between each coat. Fill dimples and Imperfections with three coats. Sand each coat, keeping sanding to a minimum to avoid raising nap on drywall board. C. Finish Joints to achieve uniformly smooth, true and satisfactory surface to receive paint or other scheduled finish material. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD 09250 -5 TARGET STORES SECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Installation of Owner - furnished ceramic floor, base and wall tile. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Owner will furnish floor, base, and wall tile. B. Section 07900 - Joint sealants and Joint backing product specifications. C. Section 09250 - Wall substrate surface. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.4, "Ceramic Tile Installed with Water - Resistant Organic Adhesives ". D. ANSI A108.5, "Ceramic Tile Installed with Portland Cement Mortar ". C. ANSI A118.4, "Latex - Portland Cement Mortar ". D. ANSI A136.1, "Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile ". E. ASTM C144 -81, "Spec for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ". F. ASTM C150 -84, "Spec for Portland Cement ". G. TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation ". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Samples: Submit samples of ceramic tile and grout colors for selection by Owner's Representative. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating according to manufacturer's Instructions. TILE PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 2.01 CERAMIC PAVER TILE (CT -1 AND CT -2) A. CT -1 Toilet Room Paver Tile: American Olean Tile Company, Size 2" x 2 ", Ceramic Mosaics Floor Tile, Price Group 2, Color to be selected by the Owner's Representative. B. CT -2 Reception Area and Lounge Paver Tile: American Olean Tile Company, 8" x 8" Milano Glazed Tile, Color to be selected by the Owner's Representative. 2.02. GLAZED CERAMIC WALL TILE A. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile: American Olean Tile Company, matte glazed ceramic wall tile, Size: 4 -1/4" x 4 -1/4", Color to be selected by the Owner's Representative. 2.03 GLAZED CERAMIC WALL BASE A. Glazed Ceramic Wall Base: American Olean Tile Company, matte glazed ceramic wall tile, Size: 4 -1/4" x 4 -1/4", Color to be selected by the Owner's Representative. 2.04 PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, gray or white. B. Sand: ASTM C144, washed, clean and graded. Fine sand shall pass a No. 16 sieve. C. Water: Clean, potable and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, and organic materials. 2.05 LATEX - PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT A. ANSI A118.4. 2.06 ACRYLIC LATEX ADDITIVE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 2.07 GROUT 1. H.B. Fuller/ Acrylbond No. TA -865 2. Upco/ Hydroment Multi- Purpose Acrylic Latex Mortar Admixture and Grout Additive 3. US Rubber/ Laticrete No. 3701 or No. 4237 A. Provide Upco " Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout ", latex- portland cement type as recommended by manufacturer for specific typo of tile and method of Installation. B. Latex additive to be 'field mixed using products specified in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 09300 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 C. Grout Colors: To match TEC Inc., standard colored grouts for floors and walls as selected by the Owner's Representative: 2.08 ORGANIC ADHESIVE A. ANSI A136.1. 2.09 JOINT SEALANTS A. Provide sealants as specified In Section 07900, Color to match adjacent grout color in following locations: 1. Floor Expansion Joints: SLNT -2. 2. Wall Joints: SLNT -4. 2.10 MIXES A. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar: Job mixed portland cement -sand mortar mixed with acrylic latex additive, or prepared dry -set portiand cement mortar mixed with acrylic latex additive. Job mixed mortar shall be one part Portland cement to one part fine sand. Mix mortar strictly according to additive manufacturer's Instructions. Do not dilute latex additive. B. Latex- Portland Cement Grout: Acid resistant grout, mixed with acrylic latex additive. Mix grout strictly according to additive manufacturer's instructions. Do not dilute additive. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install tile according to TCA "Handbook ", ANSI A108.4, and ANSI A108.5. B. Ceramic Tile Floors: Install ceramic paver tile on concrete floors by thin -set method using a latex - portland cement mortar; TCA Method F113. Lay the in stack bond pattern with 1/4" wide Joints, unless otherwise Indicated. C. Ceramic Tile Walls: Install ceramic wall tile on gypsum board surfaces by thin -set method using an organic adhesive; TCA Method W223 or W242. Lay tile horizontally In stack bond pattern with 1/8" wide Joints, unless otherwise Indicated. D. Ceramic Tile Base: install ceramic tile base on gypsum board surfaces by thin -set method matching Joint width to that of adjacent floor or wall tile using an organic adhesive; TCA Method W223 or W242. 09300 -2 3.02 JOINTS 3.03 GROUTING TARGET STORES A. Provide expansion joints 3/8" wide to align with Joints in concrete slab and as Indicated on Drawings. B. Provide sealant Joints at Inside corners of wall tile and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. C. Construct expansion Joints full depth of tile and mortar bond coat. D. Install Joint backing material with top 1/4" below the finished surface of tile except as otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer. Protect Joints with paper or other suitable material to keep Joint free of mortar, grout, and dirt. E. After grout has thoroughly cured, remove paper, and clean Joints by brushing. Sand or lightly grind edges of the to be In contact with sealant, and thoroughly clean Joint. Prime Joints and apply sealant according to sealant manufacturer's Instructions. A. Grout tile floors, walls, and base with latex- portland cement grout. B. Do not grout the until tile Is firmly set. Completely remove paper, glue, and adhesive before grouting. Properly ventilate and allow sufficient time for evaporation of volatiles from adhesive before grouting. C. Soak or dampen Joints of tile to be grouted with latex - portland cement grout as recommended by grout manufacturer. D. Force grout into tile Joints, completely filling Joints with compacted grout and covering mortar or adhesives. Finish Joints of square -edged tile flush with surface. Strike or tool Joints of cushion -edged tile to depth of cushion. Fill gaps and skips, and retool. 3.04 CURING A. Damp cure latex- portland cement thin -set Installations and grouts containing portland cement for a minimum of 72 hours. TILE UT TARGET STORES 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective the work. B. Cleaning: Upon •completion of placement and grouting, clean the surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. C. Protection: 1. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during .constructIon period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. ,2.. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from '.usIng tiled floors for at least 7 days after. grouting Is completed;-except.as approved by OSR. END OF SECTION SOUTHCENTER SR/DO T-627 TARGET STORES SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Acoustical ceiling panel. B. Suspended metal grid ceiling systems. C. Perimeter moldings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 15 and 18 - Mechanical and . electrical components of ceiling system. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Where lateral support of ceiling suspension systems Is required for seismic bracing, construct the Work as specified herein and In compliance with applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations. B. Comply with requirements of UBC Standard 47- 18 for Installation of ceiling suspension systems. C. Comply with applicable codes for Class I (Class A) flame /smoke ratings for acoustical ceiling materials when tested according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A641 -82, "Spec for Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire ". B. ASTM C635 -83, "Spec for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings". C. ASTM C636 -76 (1981), "Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tllo and Lay -in Panels ". D. ASTM E84 -84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials." E. FS QQ- W -461H, "Wire, Steel, Carbon, Round, Bare and Coated ". F. UBC 47 -18, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay -In Panel Ceilings". G. UL 723 -1983, "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". ACOUSTICAL CEILING 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Samples: Submit sample of ceiling suspension members showing specified color for approval. C. Calculations and Approvals: Submit calculations for voluntary alternate seismic bracing design of ceiling suspension systems, certified by a qualified Professional Engineer registered In the state In which project Is located. Include complete calculations and applicable code references demonstrating code compliance, and obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Calculations are for Architect's records, not for review. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not Install acoustical materials until proper temperature and humidity conditions as recommended by manufacturer can be maintained. Interior concrete work, masonry, plastering and other wet operations shall be complete and dry. Windows and doors shall be in place and glazed, and permanent heating and ventilating systems shall be installed and operating where necessary. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS (ACT) A. ACT: Armstrong Ceiling Panels, Designer Minaboard *734; 24" x 48" x 3/4 "; tegular edge panel. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Prelude Exposed Tee System. 2. Chicago Metallic Corp., 500 Series Snap -Grid System. 3. USG interiors, DX Seriea, Exposed Tee System. B. ASTM C635 Heavy Duty class; exposed tee - grid, single or double web, electro- galvanized, cold rolled steel system with 15/18" wide bottom flange. Provide reversible, reusable, and relocatable components. C. Finish on Suspension System: Baked enamel; white finish on exposed surfaces. D. Edge Molding: Angle type wall molding with hemmed edge. Factory match suspension 09510 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 system finish, or white If matching finish not available. 2.03 HANGER WIRE A. Galvanized steel wire, soft annealed, prestretched ASTM A641, minimum twelve gauge. Provide zinc coating not Tess than FS QQ- W -461H, Class 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. .Install systems according to requirements of regulatory agencies, ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions, and requirements of this section. B. Cooperate with mechanical and electrical trades In locating and spacing fixtures, diffusers, and similar Items located In ceiling. C. Lay out pattern according to reflected ceiling plans. Where not otherwise Indicated, lay out with margins on opposite sides of rooms equal In size and greater than 1/2 the width. 3.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Suspend main runners with not less than 12 gauge wire. Securely attach hanger wires to structure above. Hang wires vertically with no kinks or bends. Space hangers not over 4' -0" on center along main runners according to manufacturer's recommendations. Reinforce as necessary to adequately support suspension system, acoustical material, light fixtures, grilles, registers, and other equipment or furnishings. Install with maximum allowable deflection of 1/380 of span. 8. Laterally support ceiling system with 4 wires minimum 12 gauge, splayed In four directions 90 deg apart, and connected to main runner within 2" of cross runner and to structure above at an angle not exceeding 45 deg from the plane of the ceiling. Place lateral supports 12' -0" 0.0. In each direction with the first support located within 4' -0" from each wall. C. Do not hang ceilings from metal deck. D. Do not support suspension systems from conduit, ducts, pipes, or equipment. Where spans exceed recommended or specified spans, furnish larger main runner channels or additional relnforoing members, hangers, stiffeners, or bracing as necessary to support loads without exceeding allowable deflection. No swing hangers are permitted. E. Install edge moldings at walls and vertical protections through ceiling. F. install suspension system level, true to plane, and at required elevation and pattern, with finished surfaces undamaged. 3.03 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL INSTALLATION 3.04 CLEANING END OF SECTION TARGET STORES A. Install panels according to manufacturer's recommendations. Place four edges of each panel In firm contact with, and supported by, flanges of runner sections. Check level of system during Installation, and maintain a level and true plane. A. Following Installation, clean dirt, finger marks and other discolored spots from surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace dirty, discolored, damaged, and Improperly Installed units. 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING TARGET STORES SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Preparation of substrate surfaces. B. Installation of Owner - furnished vinyl composition tile, and resilient base. C. Cleaning of surfaces and areas of work. D. Sealing and waxing resilient flooring. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Owner will furnish vinyl composition tile and resilient base. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Comply with applicable codes for Class 11 (Class B) flame /smoke ratings of 75/450 or less when tested according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". B. FS SS -W -40, "Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic ". C. UL 723 -1983, "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature of spaces to receive resilient flooring above 65. deg F for 48 hours before installation Is begun. Store materials In these spaces at this temperature for not less than 24 hours before Installation. Maintain 70 deg F temperature during and after installation. 1.06 EXTRA STOCK A. Save all unused vinyl composition tile and resilient base scraps longer than 2 feet In length for Owner's maintenance purposes. Store where directed by Owner's Representative at completion of Work. RESILIENT FLOORING PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 2.01 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (RF -1) A. Armstrong Imperial Texture, 12" x 12" x 1/8" thick, Color to be selected by the Owner's Representative. 2.02 RESILIENT BASE (RB) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Vinyl Plastics, Inc. B. Vinyl top -set coved base, 4" high x 1/8" thick, Including premoided external corners and end stops, FS SS -W -40, Type 11, Color to be selected by the Owner's Representative. 2.03 REDUCER STRIPS A. 1 -1/2" wide, beveled rubber or vinyl strips suitable for use with 1/8" thick tile, Color to be selected by the Owner's Representative. 2.04 ADHESIVES A. As recommended by resilient material manufacturer for specific material, location and Intended use. 2.05 UNDERLAYMENT A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Ardex Engineered Cements, "K -15" and "K -55 ". 2. L .A M Construction Chemicals, Inc., "Leveiex ". 3. Tamms industries Co. "Level Magic" and " Tamms Concrete Primer ". 4. Substitutions In accordance with requirements of Section 01600. B. Provide quick setting latex underlayment, or latex leveling compound mixed In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.06 FINISHES A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pioneer 1. Sealer: First Step Sealer 2. Wax: Total Eclipse PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and voids in subfloor with underlayment. Thoroughly clean surfaces. Prime concrete according to adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. 09650 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 B. Install resilient flooring and base to surfaces which are thoroughly cured, dry, broom clean, free of dirt, grease, oil, paint, mortar, drywall Joint compound, and plaster droppings. Surfaces of concrete shall be smooth, dense, and free of dusting, non - compatible curing compounds, and hardeners. Test concrete for excessive moisture content and bonding capability with adhesive according to tile manufacturer's Instructions before starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's Instructions. B. Provide transition of underlayment material at change In floor material thickness. C. Do not commence work In any area until the work of other trades, Including painting, Is completed In that area. D. Use material In each area or room from same factory batch or color run. E. Firmly adhere resilient flooring to substrate and provide a smooth, even finished surface. F. Do not use excessive adhesive. Remove surplus adhesive from finished surfaces Immediately. 3.03 UNDERLAYMENT A. Mix and Install underlayment and leveling compound In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Appllcatlon up to 1/4" thick: Mix with liquid latex. Do not add water or sand. C. Application over 1/4" thick: Add sand and mix with water as recommended by manufacturer. 3.04 RESILIENT FLOORING A. Install flooring square with axis of room. Lay out pattern In accordance with Drawings so resilient flooring at edges of panels are more than 1/2 tile In width, Insofar as possible. Start at center of room or as otherwise determined by Owner's Representative. Lay with uniform tight Joints, accurately aligned, with alternating grain checker board pattern. Cut and fit to walls and partltlons. B. Cut flooring neatly at walls and partltlons so that flooring joint will be covered by base. Extend flooring neatly Into feature strips and edging strips. 3.05 REDUCER STRIPS A. Install where reslllent flooring meets exposed concrete floors, and at other exposed flooring edge locations. 3.08 BASE 3.07 CLEANING 3.08 SEALING AND WAXING TARGET STORES A. Install with tight butt Joints, and top and bottom edges In firm contact with walls and floor. Make external corners of vinyl base using preformed corners. Install base full length without Joints Insofar as possible. Make no splices within one foot of Internal corners. A. After fixtures are Installed, thoroughly clean resilient flooring to remove excess adhesive, dirt, and other foreign substances. A. At Protect turnover, and after resilient flooring has been thoroughly set and cleaned, apply two coats of sealer and two coats of wax. Machine -buff each coat. B. Coordinate and schedule cleaning operations with Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 09650 -2 RESILIENT FLOORING TARGET STORES SECTION 09680 - CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Preparation of substrate surfaces. B. Installation of Owner - furnished carpeting, carpet base and carpet molding. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Owner will furnish carpet, carpet base adesive, and carpet molding. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Conform to applicable code for Class 11 (Class B) flame /smoke ratings of 84/121 when tested according to ASTM E -84 or UL 723. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 -84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". B. UL 723 -1983, "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". 1.05 EXTRA STOCK A. Save scraps larger than 2 feet In length and width for Owner's maintenance purposes. Wrap carpet for long term storage. Mark each roll to indicate material and color. Store where directed by OSR at completion of. Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CPT: Direct glue down carpet furnished by the Owner. B. Carpet Base: Carpet to be furnished by the Owner with cutting and binding to be done by the contractor. C. Adhesive: As recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Carpet Molding: Vinyl edge guard; Johnsonite Flooring Products, EG -48 -F, Color: to be selected by the Owner's Representative. 3.01 PREPARATION D. Prime concrete according to adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 A. Install carpet on surfaces which are thoroughly cured, dry, broom clean and free of dirt, grease, oil, paint, mortar and plaster droppings. B. Test new concrete for excessive moisture content and bonding capability with adhesive according to the carpet manufacturer's recommendations before starting work. C. Fill cracks, holes and voids In subfloor. Thoroughly clean surfaces so that they are smooth and free of dust. A. Trim selvage edges on both sides of carpet, as required to eliminate color variation between rolls, before installation. B. Install carpet with adhesive according to manufacturer's Instructions. C. Install carpet according to cutting pattern Shop Drawings. D. Install carpet In longest lengths possible to minimize cross seams. Install carpet In each area so grain Is In one direction. Make Joints straight with pieces butted tightly together and pattern properly matched. E. Fit carpet neatly to walls, columns and adjacent finish flooring. Extend carpet Into closets and under store fixtures. F. Roll carpet with a light roller to remove air bubbles and wrinkles and leave a smooth surface. G. Carpet may be repositioned with a knee - kicker, but do not stretch carpet. H. Form seams according to carpet manufacturer's Instructions. Center seams at door openings under the door. Do not extend seams that are perpendicular to door openings through opening. Do not use excessive adhesive. Immediately remove adhesive from carpet pile face. I. Do not seam carpet where dimension of room or areas Is Tess than width of carpet. CARPETING 09680 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T.627 J: Install carpet Molding where carpet meets otherfinIsh floor:materlals K. Upon completlon, olean and vacuum carpet and protect from damage and soiling by'covering with polyethylene : perforated 'with a 1/4' round <rodapproxlmately „24" on center each ;'.way , :t0H prevent mIIdew "• AIIow no storage of tools or=equlpient an TARGET STORES TARGET STORES SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Surface preparation. B. Exterior and Interior painting systems. C. Application of Owner - supplied paint materials. D. Cleaning of surfaces and areas of work. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09250 - Gypsum board sample surfaces and surface treatment. B. Section 09950 - Vinyl wall covering. C. Divisions 15 and 18 - Identification and labeling of mechanical and electrical equipment, valves, pipes, and conduit. 1.03 MOCK -UP A. Refer to Seotlon 09250 for sample gypsum board surfaces to be painted. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit product data for proposed paint systems for substrates and conditions not scheduled. C. Samples: Prepare, In the field, 5 - 12" square samples of each finish, color, and material required applied to actual base materials. Use specified finish materials and methods. Submit samples for approval. Each sample to be different shades as follows: One shall match specified color; Two shall be lighter shades; and Two shall be darker shades than the specified color. 1.05 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide one gallon of paint of each other color for use by Owner. B. Before Substantial Completion of Work, deliver maintenance materials to Project and store where directed by OSR. PAINTING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Benjamin Moore and Co. B. Cook Paint and Varnish Co. C. Glidden Coatings and Resins, Division of SCM Corp. D. Martin - Senour Co. E. O'Brien Corporation (Fuller- O'Brien) F. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints G. Pratt and Lambert, Inc. H. Sherwin Williams Co. 2.02 COLORS A. Colors to be selected by Owner's Representative 2.03 MATERIALS A. Provide best grade and quality materials and products manufactured by acceptable manufacturers. B. Where a particular coating formula or custom mix Is specified or Indicated on Drawings, provide material from Indicated manufacturer, unless other acceptable manufacturer's materials result In approved samples. C. Except as otherwise specified, base coats and finish coats on a specified surface shall be compatible products of the same manufacturer. Provide field- applied materials that are compatible with faotory- applled primers. D. Shellac, linseed 011, turpentine, thinner, and other miscellaneous materials shall be pure, of highest commercial quality, and shall have Identifying labels on containers. E. Specified products unless otherwise indicated are manufactured by Benjamin Moore and establish the required standard of quality. Equivalent products of other acceptable manufacturers may be used. 2.04 EXTERIOR PRIMERS SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 A. Rust Inhibiting Primer: IronCiad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Primer 163 or Retadx Water Base Primer 182. B. Galvanized Metal Primer: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer 155. C. Pipe handrail Primer: X -I -M Products, Inc. Fast Flash Rust Inhibiting Primer "ZIN -X -IDE *360 ". 09900 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 2.05 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Wail and Trim Primer: Benjamin Moore, "Latex Enamel Underbody" (Tinted). B. Interior Wall Primer: Benjamin Moore, "All Purpose Primer and Sealer" (Tinted). C. Interior Stain: 1. Glidden, Ultra -Hide 011 Wood Stain No. 1601 Series. 2. Moore, Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain 241. 3. Pratt and Lambert, Tonetic Wood Stain. 4. Sherwin - Williams, 011 Stain A48 Series. D. Polyurethane Varnish: 1. Glidden, Spred Urethane Varnish 82. 2. Moore, Benwood Polyurethane Finish, Low - Lustre 435. 3. Pratt and Lambert, Varmor Clear Satin Varnish. 4. Sherwin - Williams, Polyurethane Hand Rubbed Satin Varnish, A67 F1. 2.06 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINTS A. Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Benjamin Moore 1133 impervo Enamel (Gloss). 2.07 INTERIOR FINISH PAINTS A. Interior Satin Alkyd Enamel: Benjamin Moore 41235 Satin Impervo. B. Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Benjamin Moore 11271 Moorcraft Seml -Gloss Alkyd Enamel. C. Polyurethane Finish: Benjamin Moore, Benwood Polyurethane Finish 435. 2.08 MIXING A. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturer's instructions without adulteration. Use premixed paints insofar as possible. Thin only as permitted by manufacturer's label Instructions, and avoid unnecessary thinning. B. Tint primer and subsequent undercoats to the approximate shade of final coat allowing slight variance of each coat color to distinguish it from preceding coats. 09900 -2 3.01 PROTECTION PART 3 - EXECUTION TARGET STORES A. Protect finished surfaces, work of other trades, and property of the Owner from damage and defacement. Cover floors and fixed equipment with drop cloths. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces accordingly to paint manufacturer's instructions. B. Examine factory finished and primed surfaces to be painted, and verify compatibility of existing material with paint to be applied. Report incompatible or unsuitable materials Immediately to OSR In writing. C. Apply paint only to surfaces which are thoroughly dry, smooth, even, clean, free of dust and properly prepared to receive the Intended finish. D. Touch up prime coats of factory primed materials to be painted. E. Thoroughly clean ferrous metal to remove rust, mill scale, grease and dirt. Clean rusted, chipped and abraded areas In shop coats, and touch up with primer before applying specified field coats. Sand, scrape, and wire brush unprimed ferrous metal, and prime Immediately. F. Prime ferrous metal surfaces to be In contact with PVA and other latex primers and paints, and allow to dry before latex primer or paint Is applied. G. Thoroughly clean unprimed galvanized metal and wipe with XyIoI, Toluol, or other manufacturer approved solvent before priming. Clean and touch up chipped and abraded areas in shop coats with primer before applying specified field coats. H. Thoroughly clean aluminum of foreign matter before priming. I. Sand wood to be painted, as necessary to remove surface defects, and remove dust. Seal knots and sap spots In exterior wood with pigmented shellac before priming. Back -prime Interior millwork and trim before Installation. Fill voids and nall holes with exterior putty after primer Is dry. J. Apply paint to concrete and masonry surfaces only when thoroughly cured, clean and dry with all loose material and foreign matter removed. Do not hose down concrete masonry units. PAINTING TARGET STORES K. Fill minor Irregularities In interior gypsum board with spackle and irregularities In exterior gypsum ceiling board with exterior Joint compound according to requirements of Section 09250. Sand smooth, even with surface, when dry. Avoid raising nap of paper. Remove dust prior to painting. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply materials according to manufacturer's Instructions. Apply each coat at rate recommended by manufacturer for the type of surface and with a dry film thickness not Tess than that recommended. B. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before sanding or applying subsequent coats. Lightly sand each coat of varnish and enamel applied to wood or metal with fine sandpaper and wipe clean with a tack rag before next coat Is applied. Avoid cutting through edges. C. Before applying second coat to concrete, touch up hot spots and allow to dry. D. Apply primer to top edge of wood doors. E. Finish all surfaces of wood and metal doors after fitting as described In paint notes on Drawings. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK A. Paint mechanical and electrical. Items as scheduled according to location (exterior or Interior) and type of material. Paint small Items such as grilles and registers occurring In painted walls and ceilings with same type of flnlsh as wall or ceiling. Paint other Items with satin flnlsh. B. Paint exposed surfaces of 'mechanical and electrical materials and equipment on exterior of building. Paint ventilators, stacks, vents, louvers, grilles, piping, ductwork and conduit Including aluminum and copper. Do not paint completely factory finished Items unless speolfically Indicated. C. Paint exposed surfaces of mechanical and electrical materials and equipment occurring In finished spaces or adjacent to finished surfaces Including, but not limited to the following: grilles, registers, piping, radiation, ducts, piping, Jacketed Insulation, conduit, panels and cabinets. D. Paint security devices, conduit, and accessories on doors to match door color. E. Paint hangers and supports for materials and equipment Indicated to be painted. PAINTING 3.05 PAINTING SCHEDULES - GENERAL A. Painting schedules outline the primary paint systems required. For substrates and conditions not scheduled, provide paint systems recommended by paint manufacturers. Submit proposed paint material product data for approval. B. Location and colors related to paint systems specified herein are Indicated on Drawings. C. The number of coats listed are field - applied coats. Provide all coats even If surfaces have been factory primed. Factory - applied one -coat combination primer - finishes shall be considered a factory prime coat only. 3.08 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE (EPS) A. EPS -1: Ferrous Metal, Pre - primed Metal, Galvanized Metal exposed to vlew from the ground 1 coat Rust Inhibiting Primer (except Galvanized Metal Primer at galvanized metal) 2 coats Gloss Alkyd /Latex Enamel B. EPS -2: Pipe Handrails shall have: 1 coat XIM Primer 2 coats. Gloss Latex Enamel 1 coat Stain. 2 coats Varnish END OF SECTION SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE (IPS) A. IPS -1: Gypsum Board: 1 coat Interior Wall Primer 2 coats Interior Satin Latex Enamel B. IPS -2: Gypsum Board: 1 coat Interior Wall Primer 2 coats Epoxy (eggshell) C. IPS -3: Gypsum Board: 1 coat Interior Primer /Sealer D. IPS -4: Hollow Metal Doors, Frames, Borrowed Lights, Metal Handrails, Railings, Misc. Ferrous Metal and Painted Wood: 1 coat Interior Trim Primer 2 coats Interior Satin Alkyd Enamel E. IPS -5: Stain and Varnish on wood doors and trim: 09900 -3 TARGET STORES SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Surface preparation and Installation of Owner furnished Vinyl fabrlo wail covering. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09900 - Priming of gypsum board to receive vinyl fabric wall covering. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Vinyl Fabric: Conform to applicable code for Class I (Class A) flame /smoke ratings of 10/0 when tested according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 -84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". B. FS CCC -W -408, "Wall Covering, Vinyl Coated ". C. UL 723 -1983, "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply wall covering when the temperature Is below 60 deg F, or as otherwlse recommended by manufacturer. B. Before wall covering Is commenced each room shall be clean and free of dust, dirt, and debrls. Areas shall be well lighted during wall covering operations. . 2.01 VINYL FABRIC PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. FS CCC -W -408, Type I; To be furnished by the Owner. 2.02 SUBSTRATE CLEANER A. VMSP Naphtha, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 2.03 ADHESIVES A. Vinyl Fabric Surfaces: Vermin and mildew resistant of type recommended by wall covering aanufaoturer for speciflo type of wall covering and substrates. 3.01 PREPARATION PART 3 - EXECUTION SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Do not apply wall covering untll surfaces to receive wall covering are thoroughly dry, smooth and even, clean and free of dust. B. Clean surfaces to remove dust, dirt, oil, grease and other deleterious materials. C. Verify that walls to receive vinyl fabric are primed as specified In Section 09900. 3.02 APPLICATION - GENERAL A. Apply wall covering according to the manufacturer's Instructions. B. Where resilient base Is scheduled, trim wall covering at a point 1/2" below top height of base to permit maximum base adheslon to wall surface. C. Completed Installation shall be neat, clean and firmly adhered to the underlying surface. D. Protect floors and adjacent surfaces from damage. 3.03 VINYL FABRIC. INSTALLATION A. Use panels In exact order they are cut from rolls. Apply material with a non - matched pattern with alternate panels reversed floor to ceiling for closer color continuity. B. Apply strips vertically using one piece from floor to ceiling. Trim selvage with a straight edge on a cutting table. Apply panels and butt seams neatly to form an Invisible Joint. Carefully match pattern. C. Locate vertical seams at least 4" away from internal and external corners. Trim material neatly at door frames, mouldings and other dlsslmllar•surfaces. D. Remove alr bubbles, blisters and wrinkles. Remove excess adhesive from each seam before applying next panel. END OF SECTION WALL COVERING 09950 -1 is TARGET STORES SECTION 10010 - SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Toilet partitions and urinal screens. B. Toilet accessories. C. Portable fire extinguishers. D. Corner guards. 1.02 RELATED WORK • A. Soap dispensers for standard lavatories: Furnished and installed by Owner. B. Division 16 - Electric hand dryers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM B633 -78, "Spec for Eleotrodeposlted Coatings of Zino on Iron or Steel ". B. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data for approval. C. Samples: Submit color samples of proposed or selected materials for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TOILET PARTITIONS AND URINAL SCREENS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: SPECIALTIES 1. American Sanitary, Type FS 2. General, Series 30 3. Global, Regal Model 4. Mills, Series 500 5. Sanymetal, Normandle Model B. Toilet Partitions: Manufacturer's standard floor supported type. C. Urinal Screens: Wall hung type by same manufacturer as partitions. D. Fabrication: 1. Construct panels from galvanized, bonderlzed, stretcher leveled steel. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM B633, Type RS. SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 2 . Conneot dividing partitions and pilasters together and attach to walls with stainless steel stirrup brackets. Screw stirrup brackets to partitions and pilasters with non - removable sheet metal screws. Brackets shall have at least two bolts for panel fastening and four bolts for fastening to walls. 3. Attach urinal screens to wall with 3" high stirrup brackets of same material as speclfled above. Brackets shall have at least two through -bolts for panel fastening and four bolts for fastening to walls. E. Finish: Exposed ferrous surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, bonderized and given one coat of rust - Inhibitive primer containing at least 50% rust - Inhibitive pigments and one finish coat of baked acrylic enamel. 1. Color: To be selected by the Owner's Project Architect from the Manufacturer's Standard Colors. F. Hardware: Equip each toilet compartment door with universal concealed gravity hinges and recessed hinge brackets; sliding latch; stop and keeper; and coat hook and bumper. For out swinging doors provide wall mounted bumpers; Finish: Stainless steel or non - ferrous alloy, chrome plated. No aluminum hardware will be permitted. 2.02 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Bobrlck models as listed or comparable model of American Dispenser Co. or Parker. Construct of stainless steel with a satin finish, unless otherwise specified below. 1. Mirror: B -165 series. 2. Grab Bars: B -8206 series except as otherwise indicated. 3. Paper Holders: B -2840. 4. Sanitary Napkin Dispensers: B -352 with 25 cent operation. 5. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Receptacles: 8 -282. 2.03 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers Fire.Extingulshers: 1. Amerox 2. Kidde 10010 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 TARGET STORES B. Provide wall mounted portable fire extinguishers, UL listed and bearing a UL label for type, rating, and classification as follows: 1. Type 1: Multi- Purpose Dry Chemical; 2A-108:C C. Acceptable Manufacturers Accessories: 1. J.L. Industries 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 3. Muckle D. Provide standard brackets and fasteners, of proper size for type and capacity of extinguishers, and as required for Installation conditions. 2.04 CORNER GUARDS A. Lexon Corner Guards: Pawling *CG -18 Clear Corner Protectors or equal, 2 -1/2" x 2 -1/2" x 4', pre - drilled with .screws. Pawling Corporation, 157 Charles Colman Blvd., Pawling, NY 12564. Phone 914- 855 -1005. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Install specialties according to shop drawings and manufacturer's Instructions. Locate as Indicated on Drawings. B. Install specialties plumb, true and square, in a neat, rigid, and substantial manner. C. After erection, clean surfaces and ,touch up with factory furnished matching finish. Adjust hardware and leave In good operating condition. 3.02 TOILET PARTITIONS A. Rest position of door shall be easily adjustable without removing door. B. Screw coat hook and bumper to door, through bolt other hardware. Use theft -proof screws and bolts. C. Make cut -outs and reinforce partitions to receive toilet accessories. 3.03 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Use theft -proof . screws to install toilet accessories. Fasten to masonry with screws and expansion shields. B. Securely attach mirrors to walls with concealed hangers and concealed theft -proof screws. 10010 -2 C. Anchor grab bars securely. Grab bars shall be capable of supporting a minimum live load of 300 pounds. 3.04 CORNER GUARDS A. Mount Lexon corner guards at all outside corners covered with wall covering and as Indicated on Drawings according to manufacturer's Instructions. END OF SECTION SPECIALTIES 11 TARGET STORES SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Basic materials and methods for the following mechanical systems: 1. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 2. Plumbing 3. Fire Protection B. Include minor Items necessary to complete the Installation even though not specifically mentioned In Contract Documents. Such Items Include, but are not limited to, bolts, nuts, anchors, brackets, sleeves, drains at low points, and minor offsets In ductwork and piping because of unforeseen obstructions. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01300 - General requirements for submittals. C. Section 01600 - General requirements for material and equipment. D. Section 01700 Final cleaning, operating instruotlons and maintenance manuals, and other protect closeout requirements. E. Section 09250 - Sealing around pipes and ducts penetrating gypsum board partitions. F. Section 15250 - Basic materials and methods for mechanical Insulation. G. Section 15300 - Basic materials and methods for fire protection. H. Section 15950, included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied Information - Requlrements for controls and instrumentation. I. Section 15993, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied Information - Requirements for air systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. J. Division 16 - Electrical work for mechanical Installations. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: 1. Welding of piping Joints shall conform to ANSI 831.1. 2. Welders shall be certified by NCPWB or other reputable and recognized agency, using welding procedures set forth In ASME Boiler Construction Code, Section IX, "Welding Qualifications ". B. Quality Marking: Manufacturer's name or mark shall be attached to each length of pipe, fitting, fixture, and device Installed In piping systems. C. Piping System Tests: 1. Perform tests of piping systems as specified In individual sections. Test piping before concealing. 2. Acceptance of tests performed shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for property damage to building resulting from leaking or ruptured piping during the guarantee period. Property damage shall be promptly and properly repaired, including refinishing or replacing of damaged components or areas upon notification from Owner. This requirement shall pertain only to piping, Joints, connections, equipment and workmanship represented by the systems as finally accepted, and not to those extensions or revisions that may be made by Owner during the guarantee period. 1.04 REFERENCES A. AIEE, "American Institute of Electrical Engineers." B. ANSI 818.14, " Standard Fittings." C. ANSI B31.1, "Piping and Piping Systems ". D. ANSI B36.10M, "Pipe, Steel ". E. ANSI /AWWA C105/A21.5 - 1982, "Polyethelene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast - iron Piping ". F. ANSI /MSS SP58, "Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materlals, Design, and Support." G. ASME, "Boller Construction Code ". H. ASTM. 888 -83a, "Spec for Seamless Copper Water Tube ", 15050 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 1. ASTM 01527 -77 (Reapproved 1982), "Spec for Acrylonitrile- Butadiene- Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 ". J. ASTM D1785 -83, "Spec for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ". K. ASTM 02235 -81, "Spec for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrlle- Butadiene- Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings', L. ASTM 02321 -83a, "Recommeded Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe ". M. ASTM 02564 -84, "Spec for Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ". N. ASTM. D2661 -85a, "Spec for Aoryionitrlie- Butadiene- Styrene (ABS) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings ". 0. ASTM 02665 -85, "Spec for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Piastlo Drain, Waste, and Vent Plpe and Fittings ". P. ASTM E814, "Fire Tests of Through- Penetration F1restops ". Q. AWS, American Welding Society R. FS DD- G- 541(B), "Glass, Laboratory." S. IAMPO IS 9 -89, "Standard For the Installation of .PVC Building Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings ". T. NCPWB, "National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau ". U. NEMA, "National Electrical Manufacturers Assooi,ation." V. NFPA 24, "Standard for Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances ". W. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. Strainers Thermometers Vacuum Breakers and Backflow Valves Volume Dampers Water Heaters 1.06 COORDINATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS TARGET STORES B. Submit Type (A) shop drawings, (B) product data, (C) samples, (0) test reports, (E) certificates, (F) calculations and (G) Installation details according to following schedule: Submittal Equipment and Materials Type Caulking & Sealants Ceiling identification Marker Clean Outs Ductwork Systems Floor Drains Grilles, Diffusers and Registers Hangers and Supports Insulation Materials Piping Identification Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Piping (Sewer, Storm, Domestic, Gas) Power Roof Ventilators Pressure Gauges Shock Absorbers Sprinkler System (all components) B,G B B A,B,C B B. B B 8 B B,C B B A,B,C, D,E,F B B B B B C. Refer to Individual specification sections for additional specific requirements. D. Submit Installation details with UL test number for sealing pipe penetrations thru fire -rated walls. 'A. Layout; of equipment, pipes, ducts, and accessories Is diagrammatic unless specifically dimensioned: B. Coordinate work with other trades and separate contractors to avoid Interference of Work Indicated and to secure maximum headroom. 2.01 EXTERIOR UTILITIES • A..Exterior.utilities will be Installed under a separate contract to a point .five feet outside building, unless otherwise Indicated ::on Drawings. Verify location, material and Invert elevation before. .proceeding with work and provide: fittings, offsets, and adaptors necessary. to make • final. connection. to BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1 TARGET STORES exterior utilities. Pipe materials specified In this section apply to connections to exterior utilities. 2.02 SANITARY WASTE A. Above and Below Grade: Provide one of the following In accordance with local codes. 1. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM 01785, 02685, and D2564 respectively. 2. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM 01529, 02661, and 02235 respectively. • B. Do not use PVC or ABS In air plenum ceilings. C. Below Grade: Provide one of the following. 1. Centrifugally cast service weight oast Iron with lead oakum Joints, neoprene compression Joints. 2. M.G. coupling with stainless steel bolts. 0. Above Grade: Provide one of the following in accordance with local codes. 1. Cast Iron soil pipe with lead and oakum or neoprene compression Joints 2. Schedule 40 galvanized steel with cast Iron drainage fittings. 3. No -hub type oast Iron pipe and Jointing system. 2.03 VENT PIPING A. Below Grade: Provide one of the following In accordance with Iooal codes. 1. Cast Iron pipe with lead and oakum Joints, neoprene compression Joints. 2. M.G. coupling with stainless steel bolts. 3. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM 01785, 02665, and 02564 respectively. 4. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM D1529, 02661, and 02235 respectively. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS B. Above Grade: Provide one of the following In accordance with local codes. 1. Cast Iron soil pipe with lead and oakum or neoprene compression Joints. 2. Schedule 40 galvanized steel with standard cast Iron fittings. 3. No -hub type cast Iron pipe and Joint system. 4. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM 01785, 02665, and D2564 respectively. 5. Schedule 40 ABS plastic pipe, fittings and solvent cement conforming with ASTM 01529, 02661, and D2235 respectively. NOTE: Do not use PVC or ABS In air plenum ceilings. 2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Malleable Iron Unions: Malleable Iron with ground Joint brass to Iron seat, ANSI 616.14, black or galvanized; Grinnell 463, Stockham 694. SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 A. Above Grade - All Sizes: Type "L' hard drawn copper tubing with wrought copper or bronze fittings. Solder Joints on copper piping 2" and smaller using 95 -5 tin and antimony solder (no lead). Solder Joints on copper piping over 2' using copper base, 5% phosphorous, 15% sliver brazing alloy In accordance with AWS Specification A5.8 -81. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING (CONDENSATE DRAINS) A. Type "M" hard drawn copper. B. PVC or ABS will be allowed where accepted by local codes. 2.08 UNIONS 2.07 VALVES A. General: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Apollo b. Crane c. Jenkins d. Lunkenheimer e. Niboo f. Powell g. Stockham h. Williams Hager I. Other manufacturers as shown on Drawings. 15050 -3 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 2. Manufacturer's name and model, figure or drawing number specified are for identification of type, quality and construction. 3. Select valves for not less than 150 Ib water working pressure at 200 deg, and for compatibility with working pressure of pipe and with fittings attached. Select valves designed for installed service. 4. Valves 2" and smaller shall have screw or . solder end connections. Valves 2- 1/2" and larger shall have flange end construction. . Provide numbered brass valve tags on valves. B. VaIve'Servlce Schedule: 1. Shut off valve for: Cold & hot water 2" & smaller Cold & hot water 2 -1/2" & larger C. Valves - Water: Bali valve or gate valve Gate valve 1. Ball valve: Bronze body, two -piece type chromium plated bronze ball, .lever handle, screwed or solder, teflon seats and seal, full port, 400 Ib WOG minimum at 175 deg F. Acceptable Manufacturer Model Apollo 70 Original Phelps Dodge Polaris Nlboo T580/T585 Hammond BV711T /BV712T Jamesbury Style A 2. Gate valves - 2" and smaller: 125 Ib bronze, solder end, solid disc, rising stem; Stockham Flg. B -109. 3. Gate valves - 2 -1/2" and larger: 125 Ib bronze, flanged end, solid disc, rising stem; Stockham Flg. B -125. TARGET STORES 2.08 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Strainers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: Check valve: Bronze body, sorewed, swing regrinding seat, renewable disc, 200 Ib. Acceptable Manufacturer Model Crane 38 Hammond IB949 Walworth 3420 Jenkins 782A Lunkenhelmer 554Y Stockham 6345 a. Mueller b. C.M. Batley o. Armstrong . Y- pattern type, cast Iron or semi - steer (bronze when installed on copper or brass pipe), pressure rated for Intended service. . Provldo standard brass screen, gasketed machined flanged cap with threaded blowdown opening, valved with hose connection. 4 . Provide screwed stralners for slzes 2" and smaller and flanged for 2 -1/2 "and larger. Select for minimum effective stralning ratlo four to one. B. Pressure Gauge: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Trerlce b. Ashcroft c. U.S. Gauge d. Crosby e. Marsh f. Weiss 2. Bourdon- spring pressure type with non- corrosive movements, set in cast aluminum case, flared type construction. 3. Gauges shall have 4 -1/2" dlais with white background, .black Ilnes and figures, .calibrated for two times working. pressure. C. Thermometers: Red reading eercury.fllied Tens. tube type with separate 'socket; adjustable angle style with 7" cast aluminum case; 30 deg F to'300 deg F range with 5 deg, F maximum scale division.:: 'BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS TARGET STORES D. Welding Accessories: Bonney Weidolets and Threadoiets. E. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, black or galvanized; Schedule 40 PVC; or galvanized Iron sheet metal rlvetted to form rigid cylinder. 2. Fabricate sleeves of new material, cut square and reamed. F. Escutcheons: Chrome plated, with raised edges to accommodate extended sleeves. G. Water Shock Arrestors: Provide stainless steel, pressurized chamber with threaded plug. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Watts b. Josam c. Jay R. Smith 2.09 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Michigan Hanger Co. Inc. 2. Grinnell 3. Fee -Mason B. Conform to ANSI /MSS SP58. Construct hangers of galvanized steel, except provide copper plated hangers supporting uninsulated copper piping. Provide hangers as follows: Michigan Type Hanger Pipe Size 1/2" to 6" Ring, adjust.. 100 8" and up Clevis Ring 401 For uninsulated copper piping Copper plated 101 C. Where groups of three or more pipes occur, they may be supported with trapeze hangers using two hangers as specified with a capped pipe cross member. D. Increase size of hanger rods supporting trapeze hanger as required to handle added weight of multiple plpes. BASIC MECHANICAL. MATERIALS AND METHODS Pipe Size G. Support fire by NFPA. protection 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: GE "SCS'1000 Series ". Pecora "884 ". SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -827 E. Support horizontal piping except gas, fire protection and piping on roof as follows: Hanger Max. Rod Dia. Spacing 1/2" 3/8" 8' -0" 3/4" to 1" 3/8" 8' -0" 1 -1/4" to 2" 3/8" 10 2 -1/2" to 3 -1/2" 1/2" 12' -0" 4" to 5" 5/8" 12' -0" 6" 3/4" 12' -0" 8" to 12" 7/8" 12' -O" PVC or ABS pipe 4' -0" Cast Iron pipe 10' -0" Copper tubing, 1 -1/4" and smaller 6' -0" Copper tubing, 1- 1/2 "8' -0" Copper tubing, 2" and larger 10' -0" F. Support horizontal gas piping except piping on roof as follows Hanger Max. Pipe Size Rod Dia. Spacing 1/2" 3/8" 6' -0" 3/4" to 1" 3/8" 8' -0" 1 -1/4" to 2° 3/8" 10' -0" 2 -1/2" to 3 -1/2" 1/2" 10' -0" 4" to 5" 5/8" 10' -0" 8" 3/4" 10 -0° piping as required H. Vertical Piping: Provide stand -out hangers 12' -0" 0.C. and at every pipe Joint. I. Plumbing Walls: ,1. Small plumbing piping In walls may be supported from steel waste and vent piping with WEJ -1T "AdJusto- Spacer System" components In lieu of other hangers and components. 2 . Separate steel support components Including metal wall studs from copper piping with plastic tape. 2.10 CAULKING AND SEALANTS A. Silicone Caulking: Provide caulking with oakum Joint filler for use In sleeve applications. SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 B. Fire -Rated Sealant: Provide UL- listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dow "3 -6548 RTV Foam" b. Flame Stop "V" o. GE "Pens!! 851'. d. 3M "CP -25 ". C. Provide lead and oakum Joint treatment where Indicated. D. Refer to Section 07900 for other Joint sealant work. E. Perlite /Thermafiber safing Insulation combination may be used on uninsuiated pipes thru fire -rated walls, when Installed according to ICBO Report 2331. 2.11 CORROSION PROTECTIVE WRAPPING A. 3 -M "Scotch Wrap No. 50 ", or polyethelene sheets conforming to ANSI /AWWA C105/A21.5. 2.12 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 15050 -6 1. Moore 2. Seton B. Piping Identification: 1. Semi - rigid, snap -on plastic Identification markers. Provide direotion arrows approximately 6" long and 3/4" wide, and lettering 1" high. 2. At the Contractor's option, the following alternate method may be used: identification of piping shall be accomplished by stenciling black letters on a yellow background. Stencil letters using black stenolling paint and stenciling brushes, minimum 1" high. Indicate direction of flow by stenciling a 6" black arrow on a yellow background. 3. Use following abbreviations to Identify Piping: Cold Water CW Condensate Drain CD Fire Sprinkler (mains only)..SPKR Hot Water HW Sanitary Sewer SANS Storm Sewer STS 2.13 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: TARGET STORES C. Ceiling Identification Markers: Provide adhesive backed 3/4" diameter markers, suitable for Ink notation on colored faces as follows: 1. Yellow for balanoing dampers In ductwork. 2. Red for fire and /or smoke dampers and fire protection valves. 3. Green for plumbing valves. 0. Valve Tags: Provide 2 Inch diameter 19 gauge brass tags with 1/4" capital letters above 1/2" numbers, complete with *16 brass Jack chain or brass 'S' hooks. 1. Magnetic and manual starters, disconnects, power wiring and electrical accessories are specified In Division 18, unless otherwise noted. . Control wiring and Interlock wiring are specified In Division 16, unless otherwise noted. 3. Starters furnished as specified In Division 16, unless otherwise noted. 4. Wiring, conduits, and electrical equipment not shown on Drawings which are part of packaged unit design and are necessary for proper operation of such packaged equipment are specified In Division 15. B. Motor.s: 1: Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Gould Century "E-Plus" b. Spartan - Louis Allis "Pacemaker" c. Westinghouse "MAC II" 2 . Comply with AIEE and NEMA requirements, and requirements of this section. . Design motors for supply voltages shown on Drawings and specified. Size to develop required brake horsepower and operate satisfactorily with a voltage variation of + 10% at an altitude of 5600 feet. bynamlcally balance motors and hold to commercial tolerances: Select motors to operate satisfactorily without failure when ambient temperature reaches 40 deg C (104 deg :F) for a period of.two hours or more.• BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND' METHODS TARGET STORES 5. Provide dripproof ball bearings and Zerk grease fittings, except as otherwise specified. 8. Provide squirrel -cage type motors with dripproof enclosure, unless otherwise specified, constant speed, and aoross- the -line normal starting torque designed for quiet operation. Each motor shall operate Its proper full load and speed continuously without excessive heating in any part. Size motors at minimum of 115% service factor. 7. Equip V -belt drives with sliding base, belt guard and motor sheave. 8. Provide electrical characteristics for each motor as indicated on equipment schedules on Drawings and In Specifications. 9. Wind motors 1/2 hp and larger for three phase, 60 cycle current unless Indicated otherwise. 10. Wind motors smaller than 1/2 hp for single phase, 60 cycle current unless Indicated otherwise. 11. Motors 5 hp and above shall be high efficiency type with power factor and energy efficiency above 85%. C. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA and these Speclflcatlons for motor control and starting equipment. Design control equipment for specified function and operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Run piping and ductwork In the most direct, straight, and mechanical manner, properly graded. Offsets in vertical pipe will be allowed only when necessary to avoid conflicts with other trades. Allow for freedom of movement of the piping during expansion and contraction without springing at pipe connections. Properly group piping with other pipes. Route pipes and ductwork as closely as possible to that shown on Drawings. OSR reserves the right to make slight changes In runs to avoid Interference with other work or structural conditions without extra charge by the Contractor. Exercise particular care in coordination with Installation of sprinkler system. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATIONS SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 A. Provide pipe anchors and guides where needed to prevent excessive movement of piping and excessive strain on piping and equipment connections. Provide expansion loops and offsets In piping as required to prevent excessive strain or pipe displacement between anchors, at piping take -offs, and at equipment connections. B. Protect underground ferrous metal pipe with corrosion protective wrapping. Apply as recommended by protective material manufacturer. Install polyethelene wrapping according to ANSI /AWWA C105/A21.5. C. Connect piping to apparatus and equipment with flanges, unions, and similar devices to permit easy removal. Provide unions on Inlets and outlets of apparatus and equipment having screwed or soldered connections, 2" and smaller, D. Isolate dissimilar metal piping materials using dielectric unions, except where valves are used. Isolate copper piping from ferrous building elements with plastic tape. E. Install valves where required and as Indicated on Drawings for the control, operation and maintenance of mechanical equipment and systems. Install valves ahead of control valves and as service valves for mechanical apparatus and fixtures to permit maintenance of the same without shutting down the service of the piping systems In the building. Valve each domestic water branch at the main, except at plumbing fixtures having Integral stops. Coordinate location of access panels to service valves and equipment In concealed locations with appropriate trades. F. Install manual drain valves at every low point of water systems. Drain valves with threaded hose connection shall be 3/4" slze. Verify exact location of drain valves and receive approval from OSR prior to Installation. G. Install piping specialties where Indicated on Drawings. Install thermometers on water heater outlet at convenient height for reading. H. Install pressure gauge connected to Its respective pipeline, and located where shown on Drawings by means of suitable brass pipe and fittings containing a brass cock. Install shutoff valve ahead of each gauge. I. Install PVC or ABS plastic plpe. according to ASTM 02321. Install expansion offsets or 15050 -7 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 approved expansion joints as required by local codes. J. Where welded pipe connections are allowed, Bonney "Weidolets" or "Threadolets" may be used In place of welding tees. K. Ream piping up to 2" Inclusive after cutting. L. Blow out piping seotlons with compressed air or otherwise clean Internally immediately prior to Installation Into pipe line. M. Cap or cover open piping during erection to prevent entry of foreign material. N. Install water shock absorbers where Indicated on Drawings and where necessary to prevent water hammer. 3.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Firmly hold equipment, ducts, and piping In place using hangers, supports, and anchors. Design hangers and supports to support weight of equipment, duct, pipe, fluid, and Insulation, and provide adequate side bracing to prevent swaying. B. Locate supports or hangers adjacent to fittings. In addition to above hangers and supports, support piping at each offset or change of direction, at ends of branches, at base of riser pipes, In immediate vicinity of valves and heavy accessories, and along piping as required to prevent sags, bends or vibration. C. Provide vertical adjustment to maintain required pitch for proper drainage and to allow for expansion and contraction of piping. Provide hangers for Insulated pipe large enough to encompass insulation, including insulation support shields. 15050 -8 • D. Do not support equipment, ducts, or pipes from roof deck. Support only from top chord of bar Joists. Connect hanger at bar Joist top chord panel point; that Is, the point at which the vertical or angular member of bar Joist Is attached . to top chord. Coordinate hanger locations between trades so as not to exceed a maximum allowable load of 88 Ib. to any Joist panel point. Locate panel point loads at least 8 feet from any other panel point load on same Joist. Provide necessary steal to span between joists to locate hangers properly. If these conditions cannot be met, notify the Architect. E. Support hubless piping on both sides of fittings. F. Support piping, ductwork and equipment from structure. DO NOT support from other equipment. 3:04 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Conform to requirements of Section 02205 for excavating and backfilling. B. Provide necessary excavating for Work and backflll excavations. Provide uniform bearing for pipes. Do not place work on frozen ground. Do not undermine or damage bearing of column, wall, or other structural footings. Excavations below footings shall not be deeper than one -half the horizontal distance from such footings or foundations. Backflll only after Work to be covered has been Inspected, tested as required, and approved. 3.05 CHASES, SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A. TARGET. STORES General: 1. Place sleeves In. walls,: floors, and other locations 'and verify that appropriate ` • trade leaves chases, sleeves and openings where required. In case of failure to do so, cut and patch chases and • openings necessary at no additional .expense to Owner: . Refer to Structural Drawings for • .openings In wall panels. provided by • panel • supplier. .. Core, drill piping passing through :foundation or above grade walls poured during an early .•. contract, except where sleeves are Indicated. Where .required, Dore drill for piping and equipment passing through wall panels:. Verify size and.locatlon of openings.wlth OSR: r' P BASIC'MECHANICAL MATERIALS -AND METHODS 1 1 TARGET STORES B. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Provide sleeves through slabs, walls, and partitions, 1/2" greater In Inside diameter than the external diameter of pipe passing through. Provide domestic hot and cold water pipe sleeves 1/2" greater In diameter than pipe insulation. 2. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves through interior concrete masonry unit partitions extending through full thickness of wall, and flush with finished surfaces. Seal spaces between piping and sleeve, and between sleeve and wall with silicone caulking. Sleeves are not required through gypsum board partitions where escutcheon plates are provided to cover opening around pipes, except on Insulated pipes thru fire -rated partltlons. 3. Install Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves through exterior building walls above and below grade. Install flush with finished surfaces and caulk between sleeves and pipe with oakum and lead to provide a watertight Joint. Seal spaces between sleeve and wall with slllcone caulk of color approved by OSR. Sleeves are not required on neat core drilled holes. Linkseal may be used In lieu of caulking. 4. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves through above grade floor slabs in exposed areas (such as offices). Extend sleeves 1/2" above finished floor surface, except sleeves for piping larger than 2" shall extend 8" above floor. Seal spaces between pipe and sleeve, and between sleeve and floor with slllcone caulking flush with top of sleeve to make a watertight Joint. 5. Install sleeves through floor slabs on grade for concealed piping (chases, pipe spaces and within walls or partltlons). Construct of 22 gauge galvanized Iron or Schedule 40 PVC. Seal with lead and oakum or slllcone caulking. 8. For sleeves sealed with slllcone caulking, pack space between pipe and sleeve with oakum and Install approximately 1" depth of slllcone caulking. C. Fire -Rated Penetrations: Where chases, sleeves, and openings penetrate fire rated walls, seal opening around pipes or other penetrating elements with foamed fire rated sealant as specified. Galvanized steel sleeves are required on all Insulated pipes BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS thru fire -rated partltlons. Fire sealant for all insulated pipes shall be of Intumescent type and shall be Installed per manufacturer's recommendations and UL testing for wall assembly. D. Escutcheons: Install escutcheon plates on exposed piping through floors, walls, or ceiling In finished areas, except within olosed cabinet work. 3.08 THRUST BLOCKS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Refer to Section 03300 for concrete material requirements. B. Brace tees and bends of cast iron underground water pressure pipes using cast - In -place concrete thrust blocks. Size thrust blocks consistent with soil bearing values used to size adjacent building and equipment foundations. Place thrust blocks against undisturbed soil and construct with Joints accessible for Inspection. C. Where use of thrust blocks is not practical, such as plug locations, piping within vaults, pipe entrances Into buildings, or otherwise at Contractor's option, use socket clamps with tie rods and fittings with Integral lugs designed for use with tie rods. In lieu of tie rods, mechanical Joint cast iron pipe may have tie rods threaded Into flanges. Refer to NFPA Standard No. 24 for acceptable methods of installation. 3.07 PIPES OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Where pipe Joints or valves In piping occur within two feet In horizontal direction from electrical panels or equipment, provide drip pan of size which will afford protection, as approved. B. Pans: 24 gauge galvanized sheet pan with Joints sealed water tight, edges turned up 2 -1/2" sides. C. Provide drain with 3/4" PVC or type M copper pipe to floor D. Support with bars or angles. Brace to prevent sagging or swing. 3.08 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed piping within building and piping In accessible concealed spaces, such as above lay -In ceilings and access panels. Identify contents and direction of flow at not more than 30 foot Intervals, whenever a pipe turns 90 deg, whenever a pipe passes through a wall (both sides), and other locations for ease of maintenance. 15050 -9 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 B. Install ceiling Identification: markers on ceiling grid at points over which mechanical Items requiring service or adJustment are located. 15050 -10 BASIC MECHANICAL`MATERIALS_AND METHODS C. Provide 2 typewritten Ilsts with Identification codes, functions and locations of ceiling markers, each In Its own plastic, protective sleeve. D. Identify valves with numbered brass valve tags. E. Provide two typewritten lists Identifying numbered valves each In Its own plastic protective sleeve. F. Submit with operating and maintenance manuals. 3.09 TOUCH -UP A. Touch -up all preflnlshed and preprimed equipment items to match existing factory finish. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment where set to prevent breakage, Alisuse. or disfigurement. Cover pipe . and . duct openings' to prevent entry of debris: Immediately cover openings In equipments upon .unc or receipt at the :Job site until, permanent connection Is made: .3.11 SYSTEM START. -UP /OPERATION /INSTRUCTION 'A. Prior, to start -up, .equipment,shall:be ;.fully lubricated, charged, filled, and otherwise prepared according to• manufaoturer's recommendations. B. After` the system.. installations have been completed.and connections made, the systems shaWbe operated, adjusted, calibrated and balanced to provide the specified performance. Air systems final testing,. adjusting and balancing, will be provided by Owner :as specified in Section ..15993. The Contractor, and manufacturer of the various ..Items of equipment, shall fully instruct the Owner's designated 'operating .personnel on the operation adJustment and maintenance of each system and,equipment. TARGET STORES t : F." TARGET STORES SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Thermal and sound insulation and accessories for the following systems: 1. Plumbing piping. 2. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning ductwork and equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01090 - Reference standards. B. Section 01600 - General requirements for equipment and materials. C. Section 15050 - Submittals. D. Section 15880 - Flexible duct insulation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide insulation systems with domposite (Insulation, Jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or Jacket to the Insulation) flame and smoke hazard ratings as tested by ASTM E -84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 not exceeding the following: 1. Flame Spread - 25 2. Smoke Developed - 50 3. Smoke Developed - 150 (for Insulation In concrete masonry unit walls) B. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes, and Jackets and facings for fittings shall have same component ratings listed above. C. Materials or their shipping cartons or packages shall bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do. not exceed speolfled requirements. Duct liners shall be stenciled with "Meets NFPA 90A Requirements ". 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 -84 "Test Method for Surface Burning Characterlstics of Building Materials." B. NFPA 90A -1985 "Installation of . Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems ". C. NFPA 255 -1985 "Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials." MECHANICAL INSULATION SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 D. SMACNA "Flexible Duct Performances and installation Standards ". E. UL 723 -1983, "Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation Materials: 1. Armstrong 2. CertalnTeed 3. Manville Corp 4. Owens - Corning 5. Rubatex 6. Knauf B. Adhesives, Cements, and Accessories: 1. Chicago Mastic 2. King Chemical 3. Ryder 4. Saran 5. 3M (Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing) 2.02 JACKET AND FACING DESCRIPTIONS A. Type GVB: Glass cloth, white factory sizes, beach puncture, 150 oz. in. /In /tear, tensile strength 100 lb per Inch width, mulien burst 300 psi, with Saran Vapor Barrier. Water vapor permeability 0.02 perms. Provide Jacket "sizing" of mildew- resistant vapor barrier mastlo, void of wheat paste. Manvilie Corp. "AP" or Owens- Corning "ASJ" factory applied Jackets are also acceptable. B. Premoided Fitting Covers: Premoided Insulated fitting covers. Provide required rivets, staples or tacks, vapor barrier adhesive and tape, and other accessories. Manville Corp. "UnI -fit" or Zeston. 2.03 GLASS FIBER INSULATION (TYPE A) A. Glass fiber Insulation having factory- appiled vapor barrier facing, average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.24 (BTU- Inch /hour -sq. ft.- deg. -F) at a mean temperature of 75 deg. F. rated for 40 deg. to 250 deg. F., 1.0 pcf density. Provide rigid board type Insulation where mitered segments are required. 15250 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 2.04 DUCT LINER (TYPE B) A. Rigid glass fiber board having average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.23 (btu -Inch) /(hour -sq. ft. -deg F.) at mean temperature of 75 deg. F.; sound absorption coefficient of 0.68 at 500 Hz frequency based on 1" thickness with No. 6 mounting; 1.5 pof minimum density. Coat with black mat facing to prevent fiber erosion. Provide metal nosing strip on leading edges of each board. Provide fire resistant adhesive manufactured by 3M and recommended for Intended application. 2.05 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION (TYPE 0) A. Continuous tube insulation; Armstrong "Armaflex" and No. 520 adhesive. 2.06. CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC INSULATION (TYPE E) A. Closed Cell insulation, average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.28 (BTU- Inch) /(hour - sq.ft. -deg F.) at a mean temperature of 75 deg F.; rated for -40 deg F. to 220 deg F., 6.0 pcf, flame spread rating not to exceed 25, smoke density rating not to exceed 50. 2.07 INSERTS AND SHIELDS (CLEVIS HANGER) A. Inserts: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation, of equal thickness to adjoining insulation, with vapor barrier where required. Wooden blocks or dowels are also acceptable. B. Shields: 16 gauge galvanized steel for pipe sizes 4" and smaller and 14 gauge for pipe sizes over 4 ". Provide the following shield lengths: Pipe Size Shield Length 6" and smaller 8" thru 12" Over 12" C. Prefabricated thermal hanger shields are acceptable In lieu of Inserts and metal shields. 2.08 RELATED ACCESSORIES 12" 16" 20" A. Strap Banding: Galvanized steel bands, 1/2" wide by 0.015" thick, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire Banding: Galvanized annealed steel wire, gauge as Indicated. C. Wire Anchors: Welded steel studs, clips, and angles as required. D. Twine Banding: Three -ply Jute twine. E. Finishing Cement: Asbestos free cement; Ryder "Thermokote No. 1 ". F. Exterior Exposed Seam Sealer: Hardcast tape with field applied aluminum paint finish. G. Interior Jacket Seam Sealer and Adhesive: Chicago Mastic No. 17 -465, King Chemical No. 19- 113FR. 3.01 GENERAL PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install Insulation continuous through wall, floor, and ceiling openings, and through sleeves. B. Apply Insulation to clean, dry surfaces. C. Extend Insulation full thickness through hangers, protected at hanger point by Inserts and metal shields. D. Install metal shields around lower 1/2 circumference of Insulation. Provide Inserts not less than 2" longer than metal shields and of same thickness as Insulation. Fasten metal shields to pipe insulation with duct tape. 3.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING TARGET STORES A. Insulate domestic cold water, refrigerated cold water, filtered cold water and hot water with Type A or E insulation. B. Finish Type A with factory applied Jacket. C. Seal factory applied Jacket and end laps. Apply adhesive to two surfaces. No staples are permitted. 0. Finish fittings, valve bodies, and flanges for piping 4" and smaller with with finishing cement to thickness of adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate piping over 4" and water meters with mitered pipe insulation segments secured with twine or 19 gauge wire banding with one coat of finishing cement. E. When finishing cement Is dry, cover with 4 oz. glass cloth Jacket (Type GVB) and two coats of sizing. F. Premoided covers are acceptable for fittings and valves. Use In exposed areas only If approved by local authorities having Jurisdiction. Secure covers over Insulation and tape Joints as recommended by manufacturer. 15250 -2 MECHANICAL INSULATION TARGET STORES G. For pipes running underground or In masonry walls, use 1/2" thick flexible elastomerlc tube Insulation. Seal Joints with adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. H. Install Type E as recommended by manufaoturer. Seal all Joints with recommended adhesive. 3.03 CONDENSATE PIPING A. Copper: Same as for domestic water. B. PVC or ABS: No Insulation required. 3.04 SHEET METAL DUCTS A. General: Provide duct liner at all ducts requiring thermal and acoustical Insulation as Indicated on Drawings or specified herein. Where duct liner Is not specifically Indicated, external duct Insulation may be provided. B. Internal Duct Insulation: 1. Secure duct liner using adhesive over entire metal surface and press Insulation firmly In place. Install with mat faced surface facing air stream. Additionally secure duct liner using welded pins and clips 12" on center Maximum on top and side surfaces of duct. Coat butt edges with adhesive and press together. Provide leading edges with metal nosing strip. 2 . Increase duot sizes shown on Drawings as necessary to accommodate duot liner thickness. • Ductwork exposed to weather shall be waterproofed by sealing seams with hardoast tape according to manufaoturer's recommendations. Apply one coat of aluminum paint to tape. . Line the following ducts with Insulation thickness listed below, along entire length of duct, unless Indicated otherwise on Drawings: a. Supply and return air ductwork inside building, 1" thick where noted on Drawings. MECHANICAL 1NSULATION b. Exhaust or relief air within ten feet of roof or wall openings, 1" thick Insulation. c. Air transfer ductwork 1" thick insulation. C. External Duct Insulation: 1. Secure insulation to ducts with spot applied adhesive 8" on center. On ducts 24" and wider, provide pins 18" on center (spaced 3" maximum from butt Joints) on the bottom to prevent sagging. Use vapor - barrier tape over seams, tears, and penetrations of vapor barrier Jacket. Alternate method of cap seal: Longitudinal Joint lapped and folded, then stapled securely In place. 2. Thermally insulate supply ductwork from rooftop unit to room air diffusers, unless otherwise noted on Drawings, with Type A or E with factory applied vapor barrier. Seal all Joints as recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE PIPING: Type Domestic Hot Water Supply Domestic Cold Water All Condensate (except PVC or ABS) All • 3.06 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE OUCTORK: Type Supply and Return Inside Building Exhaust within 10 feet of Exterior Roof or Wall Opening END OF SECTION SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 INSULATION: Size Type Thickness All A 1" E 3/4" 1" 3/4" 1" 3/4" INSULATION: Type Thickness A or B 1" E 3/4" TARGET STORES SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Design, provide, and test the Automatic Sprinkler System. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01600 - General Requirements for Materials and Equipment. C. Section 09900 - Field Painting. D. Section 10010 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. E. Section 15050 - Submittals. F. Section 15050 - Installation Requirements for Hangers and Supports. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Areas within the building have been classified according to the occupancy hazard existing therein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Install fire protection systems In accordance with NFPA 13 "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems ". B. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products In accordance with UL standards; provide UL label on each product. C. Requirements of Regulating Agencies: 1. IRI Compliance: Provide fire protection products and Installations In accordance with IRI requirements. 2. Fire Department /Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems In accordance with regulations of local fire department or fire marshal. 3. Perform the work of this section In accordance with laws, ordinances, and regulations In effect at Job site, as well as these specifications and reference standards listed herein. When the contract documents call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality or higher standard than required by above rules and regulations, the provisions of Contract Documents shall take precedence over sald rules and regulations. FIRE PROTECTION SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 Furnish without extra charge, any additional material or labor, or both, when required for compliance with said rules and regulations, whether or not mentioned In the Contract Documents. 1.05 REFERENCES A. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. NFPA 24 - Outside Protection. C. NFPA 231C - Rack Storage of Materials. D. NFPA 291 - Hydrants, Testing and Marking. E. UL, "Building Materials Directory." 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300 and 15050, except as otherwise specified herein. B. Product Data: 1. Submit equipment brochures and catalog cuts to provide a complete description of Items to be furnished. 2. Where manufacturer specifications and /or directions are referred to In the specifications, submit such printed specifications and /or directions before work Is commenced. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings at a scale approved by Owner. Draw subdivisions of total building plan Identically as shown on mechanical drawings. 2. Drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings Include, but are not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, hanger Locations, hanging weights, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Indicate Interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment. 3. Shop drawings shall be prepared and certified by a qualified professional engineer registered In the state In which the protect Is located. 4. Approval Drawings: Prepare approval drawings of fire protection systems Indicating pipe sizes, pipe locations, fittings, shutoffs, equipment, and similar Information. Submit to agency having Jurisdiction for approval. 15300 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 D. Record Drawings: 1. Provide and keep up -to -date an accurate "As. Built" record of work Installed. Show type, size, elevation, and location of features of the system, and clearly Indicate changes or deviations from original Contract Documents. 2 . Upon completion of Work, submit a set of transparencies showing changes as noted on record drawings to OSR. E. Maintenance Data: 15300 - 2 1. Submit four bound copies of complete typewritten operating instructions, parts lists, and service manuals of equipment, wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and test reports. In addition, post one copy of complete instruotions In Water Service Room. . Provide neatly drawn, small scale plan of the building, color coded to define the limits of each system. Plan should indicate locations of control valves, low point drains, and Inspector's tests. Frame under glass and permanently mount on wall In Water Service Room. F. Submittal Procedures: 1. Submit one reproducible copy of each shop drawing of the automatic sprinkler system and eight copies of the equipment brochures to the OSR for review. . The OSR will review, tentatively approve or comment on, and return one copy of the shop drawing and equipment brochures to Contractor. Shop drawings or equipment brochures returned to Contractor with "comment" shall be revised and resubmitted to OSR for review unless otherwise noted. Only shop drawings tentatively approved by OSR shall be submitted by Contractor to, the authorities having Jurisdiction. a. IRI Suite 1500 North 300 South Riverside Plaza Chicago, IL 80808 .Attu: Eric Larson b. Rollins Burdick Hunter of Minnesota, Inc. Plaza VII, Suite 2108 45 South Seventh Street Minneapolis, MN 55402 TARGET STORES 3: Contraotor shall submit the shop drawings to IRI and any other agencies having Jurisdiction. IRI servicing office mailing addresses are available from OSR. Contractor shall forward one copy of each transmittal letter for that submittal to OSR and to each of the following: Attn: Timothy L. Brown 4. Upon receipt of shop drawing approval letter from IRI and other agencies having Jurisdiction, Contractor shall forward one copy of each approval letter to OSR. 5. After receiving shop drawing approval from agencies having Jurisdiction. Contractor shall forward eight coples of each shop drawing and, approval letter to OSR for final review: In the event review by any authority results In — "comment" on the :shop drawings, such comments are to be Incorporated unless instructed otherwise by the '.OSR . 7. Do not proceed with.installatlon of work until OSR has approved shop drawings 1.07 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Review complete drawings and specifications of .other trades before installing work. After checking, consider the work of other trades and coordinate work to obtain the best arrangement of equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and other construction. B. Inform OSR of points of conflict between trades, 80 that conflict may be properly resolved. Work Installed which interferes with the work of other trades shall be ` removed and reinstalled at Contractor's expense.when so directed by OSR. C. The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding pecullarlties and limitations of the spaces available :for the installation of ;materials furnished under this ' FIRE PROTECTION TARGET STORES Although the location of equipment may shown on Drawings In certain positions, the Contractor shall be guided by architectural details and conditions at Job site, and shall position equipment so It Is easily accessible for service and maintenance. 1.08 UNIT PRICES A. Submit Unit Prices according to Bid Form or schedule Included In Section 01010 - Summary of Work, as applicable. B. Sprinkler Heads: Base unit prices for addition or deduction of sprinkler heads due to Contract revisions on piping, fittings, hangers, heads, re- engineering, overhead and profit, and other requirements necessary for oomplete Installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ABOVE GRADE SPRINKLER PIPING A. Conform to NFPA 13 for piping, fittings, and methods of Joining.. Piping and /or tubing shall have minimum wall thickness as listed therein and approved by local codes. Foreign made pipe may be used If It meets applicable ANSI and. ASTM standards and compiles with NFPA acceptance tests. 2.02 DRAIN PIPING A. Pipe: Schedule 40, galvanized steel. B. Fittings Cast iron, drainage pattern, standard weight, screwed. 2.03 FIRE PROTECTION VALVES A. Gate Valves, 2" and Smaller: 175 Ib bronze, screwed end, OS &Y, Stockham figure 8 -133. B. Gate Valves, 2 -1/2" and Larger: 175 Ib OS &Y, flanged end; Stockham figure G -834. C. Drain Valves, 2" and Smaller: 175 Ib, globe, renewable teflon disc, screwed end; Stockham figure B -22. D. Check Valves, 2 -1/2" and Larger : 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Stockham figure G -939. b. Star, Model A. 2 . Provide 175 lb, renewable disc and seat, . swing check; flanged end. E. Wafer Check Valves: FIRE PROTECTION SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 4" check valve. a. 'Chemetron Fire Systems, Model 10. b. Star, Model 10. 2. Provide 175 Ib, renewable disc and seat. 2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Star Sprinkler Corporation. 2. Central Sprinkler Corporation. 3. Grinnell. 4. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler. 5. Substitutions: Submit alternate manufacturers and products In accordance with Section 01600. B. Provide UL listed sprinkler heads conforming to NFPA requirements for Intended use. Temperature ratings and orifice size noted on Drawings. C. Pendant Heads: 1. Provide UL listed heads for Ordinary Hazard, Group 2; polished chrome finish with metal polished chrome ceiling escutcheon plate. Provide escutcheon plate flush with ceiling, except as noted on Drawings, that allows installation and removal of ceiling panels without removing head. Grinnell Model F -950 with 428 escutcheon. D. Upright Heads: 1. Regular brass. 2. Grinnell Model F -950. E. Semi- Recessed Heads: 1. :Provide satin: chrome with :recessed :ceiling escutcheon. 2. Grinnell Model F - 948 F. Accessories: 1. Cabinet: Provide wall mounted steel sprinkler head cabinets containing one wrench and spare sprinkler heads as required by NFPA 13. 2 . Head Guards: Welded steel were. SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 2.05 PRESSURE GAUGES A 3 -1/2" round dial, black finished plain steel case, clear glass lens. Provide dial range approximately double the normal operating pressure at the point where Installed. Accuracy shall be + 1% of total dial range. 2.06 HANGERS A. Comply with NFPA 13, Sections 3 -15 Hangers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WATER SERVICE A. Connect overhead sprinkler system work to existing main. 3.02 PIPING AND SPRINKLER HEADS A. Piping and Equipment: 1. Install piping and sprinkler heads according to approved Shop Drawings. 2. Locate symmetrically with architectural elements, notwithstanding the fact that locations indicated by Drawings may have been distorted for clearness In presentation. 3. Provide concealed piping for pendant and concealed heads. Piping shall be Installed concealed In finished areas, unless noted to be exposed. Horizontal piping shall be located above ceilings and vertical pipes located behind walls or In shafts. B. Sprinkler Heads: 1. Location In Finished Areas: Install sprinkler heads In areas with finished ceilings as indicated on the architectural reflected ceiling plans, centered 1' -0" from each of three sides of 24" x 48" or 24" x 24" ceiling panels. Coordinate closely with ceiling Installer before laying out work. Field cut piping as necessary to correct "creep" of heads as they proceed along the length of the run. 2. ' Location In Unfinished Areas: Location of sprinkler heads In areas without suspended ceilings may be adjusted, providing there is no conflict with the work of other trades and requirements of governing codes are met. 3. Upright Head Locations: Areas without suspended ceilings, below duotwork and 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISH 3.04 CLEANING AND FINISHING TARGET STORES ceiling mounted equipment, and as Indicated on Drawings. 4. Semi Recessed head Locations: Areas with suspended ceilings, such as office, toilets, and as Indicated on Drawings. 5. Locate symmetrically with architectural elements, notwithstanding the fact that locations Indicated on Drawings may have been distorted for clearness In presentation. 6. Provide head guards In areas without suspended ceiling where heads are within 7' -O" of floor and In locations where heads might be subject to mechanical damage. 7. Support piping and equipment with hangers and supports according to NFPA 13. A. Protect finish parts of construction Work against damage during construction until final acceptance. Cover materials and equipment, In storage and during construction to prevent marring or damage to finished surfaces, and keep moving parts clean and dry. A. Clean equipment and piping of Iron cuttings and other foreign substances. B. Remove cement, plaster, dirt, and foreign substances which accumulated during Installation. Remove grease and oil spots with cleaning solvent. C. Finish painting, except for Items speolfled to be factory finished, Is specified In Section 09900. Provide clean sprinkler piping suitable for paint application. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Regularly Inspect Work and deliver certificates of approval to OSR. Do not cover up or enclose Work until It has been Inspected, tested, and approved by required authorities. Should work be enclosed or covered before such Inspection and test, uncover work and make repairs with like materials necessary to restore any work damaged thereby to Its original condition, without cost to Owner. B. Open and close each control valve while the system Is under operating pressure to demonstrate proper operation. 15300 -4 FIRE PROTECTION E. A.`;Upon:completton of tests•speolfied herein, arrange for a Joint. and flnal.Inspectlon . ;. with IRi and .the, OSR. Decision shell be reaohed"'during•the Inspeotlon'conoerntng•the "';resolution of discrepancles and /or changes, as. recommended, by': authorities having Jurlsdlction.and OSR B: Final,aooeptanoe of fire protection system will be :made after • completion of Work:: :. resulting from :the :final. Inspection, and after. recelpt , of :a formal..:Iettor of acceptance from the authorities.' having . Jurlsdlotlon and a formal fetter of acceptance: from FIRE PROTECTION :. ENO :OF. SECTION SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 15300 -5 TARGET STORES C. Open drain valves and test valves to fui! flow for a period of not less than two minutes, and then close to test for proper operation and tightness. D. Hydrostatically test piping at not Tess than 200 psig, or 50 pslg above static pressure In excess of 150 pslg for a period of not less than two hours. Inspect pipe Joints . while system Is under test pressure and correct visible leaks to the satisfaction of OSR. If necessary, piping shall be dismantled and reassembled with the use of new pipe or fittings. No caulking or makeshift method of temporary repair of defective work will be permitted. Repeat tests until line or system receives approval of OSR. Test .Acceptance:. Acceptance of tests.... performed on the. systems shall not relieve Contractor from-- ,liability for property damage to building resulting from leakage ruptured piping during warranty period: Repair such :damage promptly and properly, Including refinishing or replacing of .. damaged.components or adjacent areas upon . from Owner. This requirement: pertains only to piping, Joints, .connections, equipment and .workmanship represented : by the systems: as finally acoepted, and not . :.to extensions or revision made others during warranty period. 3,06 FINAL INSPECTION TARGET STORES SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Domestic cold water system. B. Domestic hot water system. C. Sanitary waste and vent system. D. Connections to Owner - supplied fixtures and equipment. • E. Piping identification. F. Piping testing. G. Termination of piping systems at a point 5' -0" outside building unless otherwise Indicated. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01600 - General Requirements for Equipment and Materials. C. Section 15050 - Basle Materials and Methods. D. Section 15050 - Submittals. E. Section 15050 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other submittals. F. Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation. G. Section 15300 - Furnishing, Installation and testing of fire protection piping. H. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASME, "American Society of Mechanical Engineers ". B. ASPE, "American Society of Plumbing Engineers ". C. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". 1.04 WARRANTY A. Water Heaters: Provide three years or longer written guarantee against leakage of tank, covering material and labor. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC COLD WATER SYSTEM A. General: Refer to Section 15050 for piping, valves, hangers, sleeves, and other materials required. SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 B. Shook Absorbers: Provide shock absorbers (water hammer arrestors) at all solenoid, remote operated or quick closing valves and as shown on Drawings. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Josam b. Zurn c. J. R. Smith 2. Provide Josam Series: No. 75000. C. Vacuum Breakers /Backfiow Preventers: Provide safety devices such as vacuum breakers and backflow prevention valves as required by governing code to prevent contamination of drinking water supply system. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Watts b. Hersey 2. Provide vacuum breakers with Integral brass trim of the same manufacturer. 2.02 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Lochlnvar 2. Rheem 3. A.O. Smith 4. State B. General: 1. Refer to Section 15050 for valves, hangers, sleeves, and materials required. piping other . Size and capacity of water heaters as scheduled on Drawings and speolfled herein. . Provide glass lined water heaters complete with fiberglass or foam Insulation with steel packet, ASME and FM approved temperature and pressure relief valve (150 psig rating with hand test lever) and safety and operating controls as required by governing codes. 15410 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 C. Electric Water Heaters: 2.03 SOIL AND WASTE SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: As scheduled and indicated on the Drawings. 1. Josam 2. J.R. Smith 3. Zurn 4. Wade B. General: Refer to Section 15050 for sanitary waste and vent piping, hangers, sleeves, and other materials required. C. Floor Drains: Heavy cast iron, as scheduled on Drawings. D. Cleanouts: Provide cleanouts with access covers. 1. E. Traps: Provide. "P" traps as required In fixture drains, floor drains without Integral traps, and other points indicated on Drawings or as required by local codes. Provide traps of same material as lines In which they are Installed. 2.04 PIPING INSULATION A. Refer to Section 15250 for Insulating materials for systems specified In thls Section. 15410 -2 1. Provide UL approved, two element, thermostatically controlled (unless otherwise scheduled) heaters with overheating control and outlet temperature set at 105 deg. F. 2. Heater standby loss not to exceed 4 watts per square foot of tank area. 3. Coordinate electrical characteristics with electrical trade before ordering. 4. Set floor mounted units on 3" high steel ring base. Approved Josam models: a. Finished floor - Series 58000 Nlckaloy b. Wall - Series 58800 -2 chrome plated. c. Unfinished floor and under carpet - Series 56040 -2 bronze. 2. Provide carpet markers at floor oleanouts where carpet will be Installed. 2.05 PIPING IDENTIFICATION TARGET STORES A. Refer to Section 15050 for piping identification for systems specified in this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WATER SERVICE INSTALLATION A. Connect cold water fromexisting main as shown. Provide shut -off valves at equipment connections. 3.02 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SERVICE INSTALLATION A. Provide a complete domestic hot water system Including water heaters and connection to plumbing fixtures and equipment as Indicated on the Drawings. B. Pipe temperature /relief valves on water heaters to nearest floor drain or floor sink. 3.03 SOIL AND WASTE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Provide a complete continuous waste and vent plumbing system as shown on the Drawings. Work Includes, but Is not limited to the following: 1. Building sanitary sewer, extended to point Indicated outside building, to Join site sanitary sewer line. Verify connection point, Invert elevation and pipe material before proceeding and make necessary adjustments to accomplish connection. 2 . Install continuous waste and vent system. 3. .Connect waste and vent piping to plumbing fixtures, and other locations indicated. B. Floor Drains and Cleanouts: 1. Set drains with strainer top level with finished floor surface. Verify floor finishes and elevations with Architectural Drawings before commencing work. 2. Provide soil, waste, and drain pipe cleanouts at foot of stacks, at every change In direction, where Indicated on Drawings, and as required by governing codes. PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS TARGET STORES C. Vents: 1. Provide 4" diameter vent pipe from a point 12" below roof where 4" roof penetrations are required. Provide single counterflashing over flashing sleeve and pipe with adjustable clamp to provide tight closure over sleeve. 2 . Locate vents, cut holes In roof deck and furnish flashing sleeve to roofing trade before roofing work Is started. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Contractor shall test piping systems, after erection and before concealing or covering. Test as required by code and as specified heroin. Materials or workmanship found faulty shall 13e Immediately replaced or repaired and sections or systems re- tested. 2 . Perform tests In the presence of governing authorities and OSR. 3. Submit certificates to OSR that tests have been satisfactorily completed. lumbing Tests: Plumbing tests shall be not less than the following: Test water pipes at a pressure at (east 50 :psig higher than normal working.. pressure', but In no case at a pressure less than 125 psig, for a perlod,of 2 hours. Sanitary, storm and vent pipes, :air pressure of 5 pslg for a period of 15 minutes'. 4. Perform final .air test when plumbing work Is finished, according to governing code requirements. . No 'plumbing system, or part thereof, shall be covered or concealed until such work.. receives approval of OSR and "governing authorities requiring tests. C. Water Piping Sterilization: Upon completion of the cold and hot water systems, sterilize systems with chlorine before placing In operation. Provide a chlorine dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. Following a contact period of not Tess than eight hours, flush chlorinated water from the system with clean . water until residual chlorine content Is not greater than 0.2 parts per million. Valves In water lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the sterilization period. Comply with governing code requirements. END OF SECTION SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 TARGET.STORES SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Plumbing fixtures and trim for the following Items: 1. Water closets 2. Urinals 3. Lavatories 4. Sinks 5. Service Sinks 6. Electric Water Cooler 7. Drinking Fountain 8. Remote Water Cooler 9. Hose blbbs and Wall Hydrants 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01600 General Requirements for Materials and Equipment. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealant Product Specifications, D. Section 15050 - Submittals. E. Seotlon15410- Plumbing Piping Systems. F. Section 15250 - Piping Insulation. G. Division 16 - Electric Work for Mechanical Installations. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A112.6.1M -1979, "Supports for Off -the- Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use ". B. ANSI A112.19.1M -1979, "Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings ". C. ANSI A112.19.2M -1982, "Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures ". 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide products of same manufacturer for each product type specified throughout. B. Provide vitreous ware fixtures of best quality, close grained and free from pores.Warped or Imperfect fixtures will not be aocepted.Surfaoes coming Into contact with walls, floors, or surface of other fixtures shall be ground true. PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fixtures: 1. American Standard 2. Church 3. Crane 4. Eikay 5. EIJer 8. Flat 7. Kohler B. Fixture Trim: 1. Chicago Faucet 2. Eikay (Fixture F -4 only) 3. Sloan 4. Sperzel 5. Grohe C. Fixture Carriers: 1. 2. 3. 4. Josam Smith Wade Zurn D. Hose Bibbs: 1. Chicago Faucet 2. Woodford E. Electric Water Coolers: 1. Filtrine 2. .Halsey Taylor 3. Haws SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 F. Soap Dispensers (Handicapped Lavatory): 1. Bobrick 2: Watrous G. Drinking Fountains: 1. Flltrine 2. Haws 2.02 WATER CLOSET (FIXTURE F -1) A. American Standard,.Afwall 'No. 2477.016 wall hung, siphon Jet, elongated rim, white vitreous china, Sloan No. 110 YB royal flush valve, 1" screwdriver stop, Sperzel No. 150E black open front seat with self - sustaining check hinge. Closets hung on chair carriers designed for vertical adjustment. Provide positioning frame for each bowl. SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 2.03 WATER CLOSET (FIXTURE F -1H) A. Same as unit F -1. Comply with applicable handicapped standards for mounting height. 2.04 URINAL (FIXTURE F -2 & F -2H) A. American Standard, Lynbrook No. 6531.019 white vitreous china, wall hung, 1 -1/4" top spud, blowout urinal, Sloan No. 180 royal flush valve, lever handle, 1" screwdriver stop, vacuum breaker. 2.05 LAVATORY (FIXTURE F -3) A. American Standard, Lucerne, No 0355.012, 20" x 18" wall hung, white vitreous china less soap depression, angle supplies with stops, flexible risers, 1 -1/2" adJustable trap with C.O. Chicago No. 802A faucet with soft -fie outlet and open grid strainer with 1 -1/2" tailpiece. Provide flow control valve on 'hot' and 'cold' lines to limit flow to 1.6 GPM. 2.08 LAVATORY (FIXTURE F -3H) A. American Standard No. 9141.011 wheelchair lavatory, 20" x 27" white vitreous china, Chicago No. 895 - 317 -E28 -5 faucet with 8 -1/4" high gooseneck spout with vandal resistant 3/4 gpm outlet, 4" wrist blade handles. Indexed and open grid strainer, 17 gauge C.P. "P" trap with cleanout. Chicago 3/8" short pattern wail supplies with loose key stops. Comply with applicable handicapped standards. Drill and provide Bobrlck No. 8- 822 soap dispenser on the lavatory. 2.07 LOUNGE SINK (FIXTURE F -4) A. Elkay Lustertone No. DRKR- 2517 -C, 25 "x17 ", type 302 - 18 gage stainless steel self rimming sink with fountain. Provide with LK -2439 concealed mount mixing faucet, 10" high, 45 degree restricted swing spout with aerator, LK -141 lever handle bubbler, and LK -35 duo strainer. 2.08 REMOTE WATER COOLER A. Haws Model HRC8, with a minimum storage capacity ofo .5 gallons and rgcovery of 8 GPH from 80 F to 50 F at 90 F ambient. Compressor shall be hermetically sealed, with automatlo reset overload protector, lifetime lubricated. Cooling coil and storage tank shall be double wall construction tested at 125 PSI working pressure. Provide 6" leads In Junction box for direct connection to 120V 60 Hz, single phase. Provide coolers with T hermostatic control factory set for 50 F water, adJustable + 5 F. 2.09 CARRIERS A. Water Closets: Josam 11000 or 12000 series, cast Iron with adJustable closet connection and all fittings and extensions required to fit plumbing chases as shown on drawings. Provide for high rough -In for handicapped water closet as Indicated. B. Urinals: Josam 17810 series, floor mounted single urinal with hanger and bearing plates. C. Lavatories: Josam 17100 series, floor mounted single lavatory with concealed arms. D. Electric Water Cooler: Josam 17900 or 17905 series, floor mounted with hanger and bearing plates sized to accept specified water cooler. 2.10 JOINT SEALANTS A. SLNT -4 as specified In Section 07900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIXTURE INSTALLATION TARGET STORES A. Set fixture In place, and properly connect to waste, vent and water pipes. Install rigid, plumb, level and true. Mount at heights Indicated on architectural elevations. 8. Install carriers for all fixtures according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Fixture Bolts: Hang wall fixtures with 5/16" brass bolts of sufficient length to securely fasten fixture to backing. Provide chrome plated exposed heads. 0. Provide correctly faced Inlets for fixtures. Extend branches of soil, waste, and vent pipe as close to fixture as possible. Grade branches of vent pipes to trap. Run waste pipe In practical alignment at a uniform grade of not less than 1/4" to the foot. Support and anchor as specified In Section 15050. E. Connect fixture wastes, other than water closets and trap standard fixtures, to waste lines with iron ferrule and threaded pipe. Make connections to water closets and trap standard fixtures with approved Inlet fittings, correctly located according to the slze and type of fixture to be connected. F. Anchor flush valves for water closets and urinals oompietely shake -proof In walls. Where copper straps are used to anchor 15440 -2 PLUMBING FIXTURES piping to. steel wall studs, Isolate strap : with plastic tape: G., Provide chrome plated angle supplles with loose key stops,. in water supplles to water . closets, lavatories, and sinks with exposed supplles. Where :water supplies are Concealed In accessible : .cabinet work, the piping lay be copper :and'the stops.,shall be wheel handle type. H: Instal ,, adjust _And, :test automatic faucets and;.; flush valves In : accordance .with manufacturer's instructions Provide.wiring from transformers to each valve, 120V power wiring provided under.DIvision 18.: Wire valves such that no lore than two.urinals or three faucets In either room are served by any one transformer.,. 342 CAULKING A. Caulk around plumbing: fixtures with white colored SENT -4 Joint sealant: 143_ INSTALLATION A Insulate exposed waste,.: hot, and cold water conneotlons .at all. handicapped lavatory fixtures Refer to Seotlon.' :for Insulation type thickness,. and method of instal:latlon. END OF SECTION SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 PLUMBING FIXTURES ;1 ' � ` 1 5440- TARGET STORES TARGET STORES SECTION 15850 - AIR HANDLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Installation of packaged rooftop air conditioning equipment. B. Power roof ventilators. C. Exhaust fans. D. Line voltage thermostats. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01600 - General requirements for materials and equipment. C. Section 05500 - Burglar bars for exhaust fans. D. Section 08100 - Wood curbs for rooftop equipment. E. Division 7 - Roof curb Insulation and counterflashing. F. Section 09900 - Painting of mechanical equipment. G. Section 11425, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied Information - Owner-furnished Food Service hood, fans, and accessories. H. Section 15050 - Submittals. 1. Section 15780, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied Information - Owner-furnished rooftop units. J. Section 15880 - AIr distribution. K. Section 15950, included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied Information - Controls and Instrumentation. L. Section 15993, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied Information - AIr systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. M. Section 18180 - Installation of line voltage thermostats. N. Division 18 - Electrical work for mechanical Installations. AIR HANDLING 1.03 REFERENCES A. AGA, "American Gas Association." B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. D. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating AIr Moving Devices. E. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. F. NFPA, "National Flre Protection Association." 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Power Roof Ventilators, Exhaust, and Transfer Fans: 1. Acme 2. Cook 3. Greenheck 4. ILG 5: Jenn -AIr 6. Oxford 7. Penn 2.02 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Roof mounted power exhaust fans, low silhouette hood style, as scheduled on Drawings. Hood may be aluminum or paint bond galvanized steel. Provide units complete with gravity backdraft or motorized dampers as scheduled on Drawings, built -In disconnect switch, Internal wiring post, variable pitch "V" belt drives, except where direct drive Is scheduled, hinged hood and bird screen. Provide capacitor start single phase motors. Provide lubricants and belts suitable for low temperature operation. 2.03 EXHAUST AND TRANSFER FANS A. Fans as scheduled on Drawings. Provide units complete with mounting collar, dampers as scheduled, and built -in disconnect switch. Design mounting collar so motorized damper has adequate clearance to open 15850 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 without louver Interference. Provide fan guards on motor side and opposite motor side as required, constructed of heavy gauge wire, and completely enclosing running components of fan. B. Owner will furnish line voltage thermostats as speolfied In Section 15950. Installation of thermostats Is specified In Division 18. 2.04 FILTERS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Farr 30/30 2. Servodyne Mark 80 high capacity 3. Airguard dp 40 B. Provide 2 ", medium efficiency, 25 -30% on ASHRAE standard 52 -76, pleated non -woven cotton .filter media of not less than 4.8 square feet of media per square foot of filter face area. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP UNITS A. Install Owner furnished rooftop air conditioning equipment and curbs scheduled on Drawings. B. Contact local representative of manufacturer for specific work Items required to set and connect the units, or contact: Minnesota Air, Inc. 9610 James Avenue South Bloomington, Minnesota 55431 612/884 -1981 C. Install rooftop units according to . manufacturer's recommendations, construotlon documents and schedule established by OSR. D. Protect units In accordance with Section 01600. E. Assemble roof curbs with burglar bars on roof deck with shims as required to maintain top of curb level. Weld to deck 2" long at every 12" of curb perimeter. F. Place sealing gasket furnished with units between unit sections and between unit and top of curb. G. Install Owner - supplied. power exhaust fans, and economizer hoods • as required for complete Installation. H. Furnish•and Install .deep seal trap .on unit. cooling coil drain. 15850 -2 TARGET STORES I. Install 2" low efficiency throw away filters during construction as required. J. Install 2" medium efficiency filters at time of Building turnover. K. Refer to Section 15950 for Owner - supplied controls. 3.02 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS A. B. Install power roof ventilators on curbs provided by others with 2" screws, 12" on center maximum. Install dampers and accessories In accordance with manufacturer's Instructions and recognized Industry practices to Insure proper operation. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Air systems will be tested and balanced by Owner's Independent air balance agency as specified In Section 15993. Contractor shall make changes In pulleys and belts, required for correct balance as recommended by air balance agency, at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION r AIR HANDLING_ TARGET STORES SECTION 15880 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Sheet metal duotwork B. Fibrous glass ductwork C. Spiral round ductwork D. Flexible ductwork E. Flexible duct connectors F. Ductwork accessories G. Volume control dampers H. Backdraft Dampers I. Grilles, registers, and diffusers J. Installation of Owner furnished variable alr volume boxes. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Owner will furnish Variable Air Volume Boxes for installation under this Section. B. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. C. Section 01600 - General Requirements for Materials and Equipment. D. Section 10010 - Wall Louvers. E. Section 15050 - Sealing of Duct Sleeves Penetrating Fire -Rated Partitions. F. Section 15050 - Submittals. G. Section 15250 - Duotwork Insulation. H. Section 15780, included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied Information - Owner furnished rooftop units. I. Section 15850 - Air Handling Equipment. J. Section 15950, included for reference under Section 00215, Owner Supplied Information - Owner furnished controls and Instrumentation. K. Section 15993, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner Supplied Information - Owner's Independent air balance and testing. 1.03 DEFINITIONS SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes Inside lining. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Install alr distribution system materials and construction In accordance with ASHRAE, ASTM, NFPA, SMACNA, and UL standards as referenced. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE, "Handbook 1985 Fundamentals "; Chapter 33 - Duct Design. B. ASHRAE, "Handbook 1987 Equipment "; Chapter 1 - Duct Construction. C. ASTM A90 -81, "Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zino- Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles ". D. ASTM A525 -83, "Spec for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zino- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process ". E. ASTM A527/A527M -85 "Spec for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality ". F. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems ". G. NFPA 96, "Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease -Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment ". H. SMACNA, "Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards". I. SMACNA, "Fibrous Glass Construction Standards ". J. UL 33, "Heat Responsive Links for Fire- Protection Service ". K. UL 555, "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers'. L. UL 181, "Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors'. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. In addition to requirements of Section 15050, submit the following: 1. Fabrication Methods: Submit proposed fabrication and erection methods and past experience with fibrous glass ducts for approval before proceeding with fabrication and erection. AIR DISTRIBUTION 15880 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK (SHEET METAL) A, General: 1. Provide ductwork with G -90 galvanized coating. Provide cadmium plated hardware, fasteners, and accessories. 2. Provide turning vanes In 90 deg elbows of supply, return, and exhaust ductwork. 3. Construct all sides, Including bottom and top of ducts and plenums of sheet metal. Use no portion of the building construction, such as walls, or slabs, as part of any duct or plenum, unless specifically Indicated on Drawings or otherwise specified. B. Rectangular Ductwork: 1. Provide galvanized sheet metal of minimum gauges as follows, unless otherwise Indicated: Duct Width (Inches) U.S. Standard (GA) O to 30 No 24 31 to 54 No. 22 55 to 84 No. 20 Over 84 No. 18 . Construct duct -to -duct Joints with standard slip fittings or duotmate 'connectors. C. Round Ductwork: 1. Provide galvanized sheet metal, longitudinal seam, round duotwork, of minimum gauges as follows, unless otherwise Indicated: Duct Diameter (Inches) U.S. Standard (GA) 3 to 14 No. 28 15 to 23 No. 24 24 to 38 No. 22 2. Fabricate longitudinal seam. duct using butt weld or Acme lock seams only. TARGET STORES 2.02 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK (FIBROUS GLASS) A. Contractor at his option, may use fibrous glass duct construction for low velocity ductwork 47" wide or less in concealed locations (above ceilings, etc.). Fabricate exposed ductwork (receiving, marking, storage, mechanical rooms, roof, generator, and similar locations), ducts 48" wide and over and supply ductwork from SF -1 to food service exhaust hood, of sheet metal construction as specified above. B. Fabricate fibrous glass ducts from standard duty fiberglass duct board faced with FSK facing as manufactured by Manville or Owens- Corning. Fabricate in.accordance with good Industry practice and as recommended by manufacturer of duct board. Comply with requirements of local governing agencies and NFPA 90A when tested by UL 181 procedure and rated as Class 1 duct. C. Provide Duro -Dyne turning vanes. D. Provide galvanized sheet metal fire dampers, damper, and extractors. 2.03 ROUND DUCTWORK - SPIRAL A. Provide spiral ductwork' as manufactured by United Sheet Metal, Spiral Uniseal Duct, or approved equal. Construct ductwork of 28 gauge galvanized sheet metal In sizes 4" to 14" and 24 gauge In sizes 15" and above. B. Provide conical tee 90 deg takeoff fittings from main to branch. Provide uniform formed elbows for turns and rises /drops. Five- piece sealed gore type elbows may be used. C. Provide alr -tight construction at Joints and takeoffs. Construct duct -to -duct Joints with . manufacturer's standard male slip coupling fittings. Construct fitting -to- duot and fitting -to- fitting Joints by field cutting a female slip coupling or by use of manufacturer's special fittings. 2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS A. Provide external factory Insulated ductwork with Inner core of laminated aluminum foil, fiberglass and polyester, mechanically locked, without adhesives Into a formed wire helix on outside of Inner core. Inner cores of polyester only are not acceptable. B. Provide 1" glass fiber Insulation with factory- applied vapor barrier facing, average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.27 Inch /hour- sq.ft.- deg. -F) at a mean temperature of 75 deg. F., rated for 40 deg. to 250 deg. F., 0.75 pcf minimum density. TARGET STORES 2.05 DAMPERS 2.06 C. Comply with UL 181 and NFPA 90A for Class 1 Alr Duct Connectors. D. Provide non - spliced flexible duct connectors with total length not exceeding 10 feet and total bends not exceeding 180 degrees. A. Construct dampers and splltters In ducts with a locking arm outside of duct, set In same direction and plane of damper and working over a quadrant or regulator. Blades shall not exceed 8" In width for ducts 24" and smaller, or 8" In width for larger ducts. B. Provide 5/16" diameter damper rods fitted with brass bearings on one end for dampers 14" and under. For rods 15" long and over, fit rods with brass bearings on each side of duct. C. Stiffen dampers where necessary to prevent noise. Replace dampers causing noise or provide additional stiffeners to eliminate noise. BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Alr 2. Air Balance 3. American Warming 4. Casco 5. Greenheck 8. Ruskin 7. United Sheet Metal B. Provide adjustable counterbalanced type with 16 guage steel frame, dustproof ball bearings, overlapping parallel aluminum blades with felt or vinyl blade edges, 60X minimum free area; Ruskin type CBD4. 2.07 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels at locations shown on Drawings, and at reheat coils, fire dampers, motorized dampers, backdraft dampers, control equipment, and other locations necessary for duct or equipment Inspection or adjustment. Fabricate panels of 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal properly braced and stiffened, provided with Ventlok Ho. 100 Series latches, hinges, and gasketing. 2.08 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Barber Coleman 2. Carnes 3. Carrler 4. Krueger 5. Metal Alre 6. Titus 7. Tuttle & Bailey E. Return and Transfer Grilles: 2.09 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 B. Provide grilles, registers, and diffusers of size shown on Drawings. C. Supply Registers: Individual adJustable vertical or horizontal double deflection blades with 3/4" spacing and a screwdriver adJustable opposed blade volume control damper. D. Exhaust and Return Air Registers: Match supply registers, with stationary horizontal or vertical bars. 1. Single set of fixed blades with 3/4' spacing parallel to long dimension. 2. Provide 1/2" x 1/2" eggcrate with channel border for use In T -Bar ceiling grld. Provide with square to round adapter where required. F. Linear Ceiling Diffuser: Extruded aluminum, continuous appearance over the entire length, complete with air control pattern vanes. Length and number of discharge slots as scheduled on Drawings. G. Ceiling Diffusers: Square design, fixed or adJustable pattern as scheduled. Provide lay -In or flush mounted type as required by ceiling material and configuration. Provide control grid as scheduled on Drawings. Provide single blade design with center rod operator accessible through diffuser. H. Deflecting Vanes: Where indicated on Drawings, provide individually adjustable deflecting vanes that will deflect supply air for even distribution through a supply grille, or register, or diffuser. I. Factory paint grilles, registers, and frames with baked enamel finish In ceiling white, to match ceiling panels and tee construotlon. A. Fire resistive heavy glass fabric, double coated with neoprene, UL approved; "Ventfab" for low pressure systems, or approved equal. B. Connector: Iron bands or angles. AIR DISTRIBUTION • 15880 -3 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 2.10 DUCT SEALANT A. Sealants: 1. 3M 800 or 900 Duct Sealer. 2. Foster 32 -14 or 32 -14C Duct Sealant. 3. Duradine. B. Sealing Tape: 1. Aluminum heat seal tape, 2" wide, 2 mil thick. 2. Duct tape Is not acceptable. 2.11 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES ' A. Owner will furnish variable air volume boxes. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Titus 2. Enviro -Teo 3. Anemostat 4. Metal -Aire C. Pressure Dependent VAV Boxes: 1. Provide UL listed or recognized componenets and ARI certified single duct variable volume terminal units In the sizes and capacities shown on Drawings. 2. At inlet veloolty of 2000 FPM, the differential statio pressure shall not exceed 0.10" w.g. Sound ratings for unit shall not exceed 30 NC at 1" statlo pressure. 3.. Provide 24 gage galvanized steel unit casing, internally lined with 1/2" dual density fiberglass insulation which compiles with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Coat all exposed Insulation edges with NFPA 90A approved sealant. 15880 -4 . 4. Provide heavy gage metal damper with shaft seated In self - lubricating bearings. The 24V actuator shall apply minimum 40 In. lbs. of torque to the damper shaft. 5. Provide a Class II, 277/24 V transformer and toggle disconnect switch in an approved NEMA 1 enclosure. 8. Provide fan powered boxes with UL approved electric heaters where indicated on Drawings as follows: a. Provide boxes with forward curved direct drive blowers and three -speed PSC motors, TARGET STORES b. Provide heaters with open coil high grade 80/20 resistance wire designed to provide 45 watts /sq.inch, with automatic -reset high temperature limit switch and air flow switch. Provide 277v single phase for coils of 3kw or less, and 460v three phase for coils greater than 3kw. c. Factory install electric heaters and heater control cabinet. 7. Furnish VAV boxes with all fans, heaters and controls mounted allowing single point connections for power and control wiring. See Section 15950 for requirements. D. Pressure Independent (By -Pass) VAV Boxes: Provide boxes of same specifications as pressure dependent boxes including the following: 1. Provide pressure differential reset controller to maintain setpolnt within 5%, regardless of system pressure change. Flow curve for field balancing shall be affixed to terminal casing. Controller shall maintain pressure Independence to as low as .03" w.g. Averaging sensor shall be mounted In the inlet of the terminal and shall provide a minimum of one air pickup point for each 2 -1/2" of Inlet diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK (SHEET METAL) A. Construct sheet metal ductwork In accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duot Construction Standards for 1" w. g. pressure classifications. B. Provide watertight ductwork where exposed to weather. Solder or weld exterior seams and Joints. C. Make Joints In sheet metal ductwork virtually air tight by sealing with duct sealants. D. Sealant shall not be relied upon to seal damaged ductwork. Repair or replace damaged ductwork prior to installation. E. Use additional bracing where necessary as directed by Archlteot or OSR wherever in his opinion such additional bracing Is required. Panels over 18" wide or deep shall be crossbroken or beaded for strength. AIR DISTRIBUTION TARGET STORES 3.02 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK (FIBROUS GLASS) A. Seal longitudinal and transverse Joints by a facing flat stapled by outward clinch 9/16" staple on not less than 2" centers. Additionally seal Joints with aluminum heat seal tape. B. Secure turning vanes in duct with metal plates on outside of duct with sheet metal screws through to turning vane plate. Seal external plates. C. Reinforce fire dampers, dampers and extractors and hold In place with metal plate and sheet metal screws In accordance with SMACNA standards. Seal screws and plates. D. Suspend ducts under 24" wide on maximum 6 foot centers, and suspend ducts over 24" on maximum 4 foot centers. E. Support diffusers Independently of ductwork. 3.03 ROUND DUCTWORK - SPIRAL A. Seal flanged JoInts with neoprene gaskets. B. Provide bellmouth fittings for plenum starting takeoffs. C. Gore type elbows may be used to provide field required offsets. Seal gore Joints with duot sealant. 3.04 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK AND FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS A. Install flexible duct according to SMACNA Standards. B. Seal flexible duct to male outlets with sealant. Seourely fasten with strap clamp. C. Support flexible duct with galvanized strap hangers not over 5' -0" on center. 3.05 DAMPERS A. Install manual volume dampers In each branch low pressure supply, return and exhaust duct. Sputters or extractors may be used In Ileu of manual volume dampers for small branches, where so indicated on Drawings. B. Provide additional balancing dampers as required by the Owner's independent air balance and testing agency. C. Install fire dampers in accordance with UL and NFPA standards with angle Iron frame both sides of wall. Provide 'break -away' connections as required. AIR DISTRIBUTION SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 D. Install motorized and backdraft dampers In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Provide access doors at dampers In inaccessible furred spaces. 3.06 ACCESS PANELS A. Coordinate location of duct access panels and equipment access doors with other trades to assure that wall or oeiling.access panel corresponds with duct panel and the service location for dampers and equipment. 3.07 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS A. Install grilles, registers, and diffusers with fitted gaskets, drawn tight to surface and securely fastened to eliminate gaps and dirt streaking. Rigidly fasten ducts behind grilles, registers, and diffusers, and add extra screws if necessary to draw grilles, registers, and diffusers tight to surface. 3.08 VARIABLE VOLUME BOXES A. Install Owner - furnished variable volume boxes In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the schedule established by OSR. Protect each box from damage, Including appropriate protection from weather. Repair damage to boxes from time of delivery to Job site untll acceptance of completed protect by Owner. B. Install box In a position with air flow label in same direction as duct air flow. C. Mount box with control box easily accessible for wiring and service. D. Do not attach hanger straps to control box when Installing damper. Place screws or rivets close to ends of spiral duct to allow damper blade movement free of obstruction. E. Do not adjust damper. 3.09 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. Provide galvanized strap hangers for ducts 35" and less In width bolted to angle stiffeners or secured to sides of duct. Support ducts 36" and more In width with trapeze hangers formed of rod and angle Iron under ducts, spaced no greater than 4' -0" on centers. 15880 -5 D. 3.10 A. Provide flexible connections where :Indicated on Drawings.: Provide ,connections not Tess than 6" wide, and with ample slack In the connections. B. Fasten: oonneotlons Aelng Iron. bands or angles pulled tight and bolted In place. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS A. Duct Sleeves: ".Coordinate location and size of openings for duotwork passing . through walls, floors or partitions, with other. .appropriate trades.. Seal around ducts. penetrating, fire rated partitions as required by UL and NFPA'standards. 3.12. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A: Alr;sy'stems will be tested and balanced by Owner's Independent air balance agency as In`Sectlon.: 15903 H.Contractor shall make:changev In pulleys, belts, and dampers, .Including addltlon .of,'dampers, required for correot balance•.as recommended by allr; balance agency, cost to Owner: B. Duct leakage :rate shall not exceed five percent of the design cfm for each system. Reseal any ;system In which excess ,leakage is determined by:alr balance agency. 15880 -8 END OF SECTION AIR OISTRIBUTION<` SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 TARGET STORES B. Adequately support hangers,. from the top chord panel.polnts of the steel Joists or beams with bolts, anchors, inserts and /or clamps,' spanning angles or channels, as the condition requires.' Comply. with Section 15050 for hanging requirements. Do not. • secure hangers to roof deck. . • C. Provide stays on. vertical Ilnes of ducts consisting. of galvanized steel'. anchored to the building,structure (not roof deck) at points neoessary'_for proper support; and. alignment. Adequately side- brace" ductwork to prevent swaying. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TARGET STORES SECTION 18111 - CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. B. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings. C. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. D. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. E. Liquidtlght flexible metal conduit and fittings. F. Non - metallic conduit and fittings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Sealing around conduit penetrating non -fire rated gypsum board partitions. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1, "Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc- Coated". B. ANSI C80.3, "Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zino- Coated ". C'. ANSI C80.5, "Rigid Aluminum Conduit ". D. ANSI /NEMA FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblles ". E. NEMA RN 1, "PVC Externally - Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing ". F. NEMA TC 2, "Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC -40 and EPC -80) ". G. NEMA TC 3, "PVC Fittings for Use with RIgId PVC Conduit and Tubing ". H. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. RIgId Aluminum Conduit: C80.5. SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 C. PVC Externally Coated Conduit: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external galvanized surface. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI /NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. 2.02 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: Galvanized steel, UL 1242. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI /NEMA FB 1; use fittings and conduit bodies specified above for rigid steel conduit. 2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS A. EMT: ANSI C80.3 galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI /NEMA FB 1; steel, compression or set screw type, 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: FS WW -C 568; steel. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI /NEMA FB 1. 2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: UL File 52123 galvanized steel flexible conduit with UL 360 PVC Jacket. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI /NEMA FB 1. 2.08 RIGID NON- METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.07 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: Steel or malleable Iron. 2.08 SEALANTS A. Fire Rated Sealant: UL-listed foamed silicone elastomer compound; GE "PensII 851 ", Dow "3 -6548 RTV Foam ". 2.09 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Corrosion Resistant Coatings: Asphaltic base liquid; Koppers'Bltumastic 50. CONDUIT. 16111 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT A. Size as Indicated on the Drawings; where size not shown, base on N.E.C. tables for conductors being Installed. Use 3/4 Inch trade size minimum for branch circuit home runs to paneiboards, for conduits Installed below grade and floor slabs. Minimum size for any conduit work Is 1/2 Inch trade size. B. Arrange conduit to maintain 8' -0" minimum headroom and present a neat appearance. C. Rack horizontal runs of exposed conduit In stockrooms and shipping /receiving area above bottom chord of bar Joists. D. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. E. Malntaln minimum 6 Inch clearance between conduit and piping. Malntaln 12 Inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues and heating appliances. F. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using one -hole galvanized straps with clamp backs, lay -In adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. G. Group conduit In parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional conduit. H. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled. 3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; ream and de -burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes, and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes In damp or wet locations. 0. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90- degree bends between boxes. E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes In direction, as around beams. 16111 -2 3.03 CONDUIT USES PERMITTED TARGET STORES F. Use hydraulic one -shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends In conduit larger than 2 Inch size. G. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide Junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect Installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. 1. Provide No. 12 AWG Insulated conductor or suitable pull string In empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. J. Install expansion fittings where conduit crosses building expansion or seismic Joints. K. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls, provide pipe sleeve two sizes larger than conduit; seal opening around conduit with fire rated sealant. L. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through roof membrane with flashing boot approved by roofing supplier. M. 0o not cast conduit within floor slabs. N. Apply a oontlnuous even coat of corrosion resistant coating on metallic conduit In contact with soli. 0. Use PVC- coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends In rigid non - metallic conduit runs below grade longer than 100 feet or which have more than two bends regardless of length. P. Wipe rigid non - metallic conduit clean and dry before Joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area that will be Inserted Into fitting. Let Joint cure for 20 minutes minimum. Q. Provide backflll material In accordance with Section 02205 for all conduit Installed In soil. A. Exposed Outdoor Locations: Rigid steel conduit; Intermediate metal conduit. B. Wet interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit or rigid aluminum (2" trade size minimum) conduit; Intermediate metal conduit; Liquldtlght flexible conduit In lengths not to exceed 18 Inches. TARGET STORES SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 C. Concealed Dry Interior Looatlons: Rigid steel conduit or rigid aluminum (2" trade size minimui) conduit; Intermediate metal conduit; Electrical metallic tubing. D. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Rigid steel where subject to physical damage and below five feat above floor In loading dock area; Intermediate metal conduit; Electrical metalllo tubing. E. Connections subject to Vibration: 1. Dry Locations: Provide flexible metal conduit for connections to" transformers, motors, emergency generator. and other vibrating equipment. 2. Wet locations and . Service Equipment: Provide,.Ilquidtlght flexible conduit. END OF SECTION TARGET STORES SECTION 16112 - SURFACE RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Surface metal raceways. B. Multi- outlet assemblies. C. Auxiliary gutters (wireways). D. Installation of power and communication poles. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09900 - Painting. B. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles. C. Owner will furnish power and communication poles for installation under this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include product data for surface metal raceways, multi- outlet assemblies, auxiliary gutters, and accessories. 1.04 UNIT PRICES A. Submit Unit Prices according to Summary of Work, as applicable. B. Power and Communication Poles: Unit prices for Installation of Owner- furnished poles, for addition or deduction of poles due to Contract revisions; based on requirements for complete pole Installation, exoluding wiring. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Miroflector Company, Inc. 2. Panduit Corporation 3. The Wiremold Company 4. Walkermold, a division of Butler Manufacturing. B. Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway. C. Size: As shown on Drawings. SURFACE RACEWAYS D. Finish: Field - applied matte enamel to match finish of surface onto which applied. E. Fittings: Couplings, elbows, and connectors designed for use with raceway system. F. Boxes and Extension Rings: Designed for use with raceway systems. 2.02 MULTI- OUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Miroflector Company, Inc. 2. Walkermold, a division of Butler Manufacturing. 3. The Wlremold Company B. Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as a multi - outlet assembly. C. Size: As indicated on Drawings. D. Receptacles: Convenience receptacles mounted in cover, centered as shown on Drawings. E. Finish: Semi -gloss enamel, field applied to match finish upon which applied. F. Fittings: Couplings, elbows, outlet and device boxes, and connectors designed for use with multi- outlet system. 2.03 AUXILIARY GUTTERS SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman Engineering Company 2. Panduit Corporation 3. Square D Company 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. General purpose type wireway, with knockouts and weepholes. C. Size: As indicated on Drawings. D. Cover: Screw applied cover with captive screws, chain cover retainer, and full gasketing. E. Fittings: Lay -In type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws. F. Finish: Rust Inhibiting primer coat with gray enamel finish. 16112 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 ' 3.01 3:02 INSTALLATION AUXILIARY GUTTER A. Support auxiliary gutter to will using two- piece hangers. Install parallel and true to adjacent building lines. B. Secure hangers with lag screws through studs or with expansion anohors where applied to concrete or unit masonry walls. Maintain grounding continuity between gutter sections with bonding Jumper sorewod to each section. 3:03 INSTALLATION POWER AND COMMUNICATION POLES A. Refer to Drawings for ,location and InsteIIation requIrements 16112 -2 END OF SECTION-: SURF CE- RACEWAYS 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION - RACEWAY & MULTI- OUTLET AS$Y. A.,Use flat -head screws to . fasten channel to surfaces: .Mount plumb and level; B. Use :sultable'insulatIng bushings'`and Inserts at, connections tor outlets and corner: fittings. C. Maintain grounding continuity between raceway .components ':'with bonding jumper screwed to each section. P ! TARGET STORES SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Building wire B. Cable C. Wiring connections and terminations. D. Installation of manufactured wiring system. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Owner will furnish manufactured wiring system for installation under this section to Interconnect low voltage distribution system (600 volt maximum) to Sales Floor lighting system and power and communication poles. B. Section 16111 - Conduit. C. Section 16112 - Surface Raceways. D. Section 16113 - Underfloor Duct. E. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. F. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding. G. Section 16510 - Lighting Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ASTM B3 - Annealed Bare Copper Conductor. B. NEMA WC 3 - Rubber - Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. C. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic- Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. D. UL 44 - Standard for Rubber - Insulated Wires and Cables. E. UL 83 - Standard for Safety of Thermoplastic- Insulated Wire and Cable. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under the provisions of Section 01300. B. Certifloates of Insulation megohmeter• tests. WIRE ANO CABLE SOUTHCEHTER SR /DO T -627 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE A. Thermoplastic- Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5, UL 83, ANSI /ASTM B3. B. Rubber - insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 3, UL 44, ANSI /ASTM B3. C. 75 ° C Conduotors: Copper, 600 volt insulation, THHN /THWN or XHHW; 8 AWG and larger, stranded conductor; smaller than 8 AWG, solid conductor. 0. 90 ° C Conductors: Copper 600V Insulation Type THHN or XHHW; 8 AWG and larger, stranded conductor; smaller than 8 AWG, solid conductor. E. Control Circuits: 14 AWG Copper, stranded conductor 800 volt Insulation, THHN /THWN. F. Metal -Clad (MC) Cable: A factory assembly of one or more conductors each Individually Insulated and enclosed In a metallic sheath of Interlocking tape, or a smooth or corrugated tube. G. Armored (AC) Cable: A fabricated assembly of Insulated conductors In a flexible metallic enclosure, with an Internal bonding ,strip of copper in Intimate contact with the armor for Its entire length. 2.02 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE A. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits:. Copper, solid conductor, 600 volt Insulation, rated 80 degree C, Individual Insulated conductors twisted together, shielded and covered with a PVC Jacket; UL Ilsted. B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote, Control and Signal Circuits: Copper solid conductor, 300 volt Insulation, rated 60 degree C, Individual 'Insulated conductors twisted together, shielded and covered with a PVC Jacket; UL listed. 2.03 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEM A. Manufactured Wiring System: Pre -wired flexible metal conduit assemblies furnished by Owner. SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. Switch legs are not considered control wiring. B. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branoh circuit home runs longer than 75 feet (23m), and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 150 feet (61m). C. Splice only In Junction or outlet boxes. D. Place no more than 8 current carrying conductors In the same raceway unless Indicated on Drawings. E. Neatly train and lace or tie wiring inside boxes, equipment, cabinets, and panelboards. F. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. G. Use 90 ° C wire for feed through wiring In channels of continuous row fluorescent fixtures. 3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors Into a raceway at the same time. Use UL Ilsted wire pulling lubricant for pulling 6 AWG and larger wires. B. Install wire In raceway after Interior of building has been physloally protected from the weather and all mechanloal work likely to Injure conductors has been completed. C. Swab raceway system with sponge and drawstring before installing conductors. 3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Permitted Uses: Locations where not subject to physical damage. 1. MC Cables: For feeders to RTU's and panelboards. 2. AC Cables: For branch circuits In Front Office Area, Back Room Offices and dry locations only. B. Not Permitted Uses: Direct burlal or In concrete. TARGET STORES 1. AC Cables: Where exposed, as In the Stockroom or Loading Dock Area, in Food Service Area and other damp locations. C. Support exposed cables (not In raceways) above accessible ceilings; do not rest on coiling tiles. Use spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not support cable from ceiling suspension system. Include brldie rings or drive rings. Support cables at Intervals not exceeding 8 feet. D. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 3.04 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install manufactured wiring system In accordance with manufacturer's Instructions. B. Use spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables longer than 8 feet (1.8 m) from structure. Include brldle rings or drive rings. C. Do not support manufactured wiring system cable or components from ceiling suspension system. 3.05 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Use solderless pressure connectors with Insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps for conductor slze 8 AWG. For 10 AWG and smaller, use Insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps. B. Use split bolt connectors for splices and taps, 8 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. C. Thoroughly Olean wires before Installing lugs and connectors. D. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. E. Terminate spare conductors with wire nuts and electrical tape. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contraotor shall field Inspect and test Installation as follows: 1. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. 16120 -2 WIRE AND CABLE 'si TARGET STORES SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 2. Torque test conductor connections and terminations : to manufacturer's' recommended values. 3. Perform continuity test on all power and: equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections.: ' g . Test each .'feeder by :`means,: of `.a. megohmeter tester Impress a voltage of no Iese than 500 volts DC upon the circuit :being'.tested. Correct Insulation deflolenoles which show. an Insulatlon:reslstanoe of less than'one: megoha': PerforN 'test'wlth :conductors connected to thelr respective: terminals with switch or'.oircult breaker - In the "off" position: END OF SECTION IRE AND'CABLE Y r 16120= TARGET STORES SECTION 16130 - BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and Junction boxes. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: General requirements for Owner - supplied equipment. B. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Sealing around boxes penetrating gypsum board partitions. 0. Section 16111 - Conduit E. Section 18112 - Surface Raceways F. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable G. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices H. Seotlon 16195 - Electrical identification I. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm Devices. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. B. NEMA 250 - Enolosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). C. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". 2.01 OUTLET BOXES PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 1/2 Inch and 3/4 Inch knockouts. B. Cast Boxes: Aluminum; shallow for column mounting, deep for other applications; hubiess with 1/2 Inch NPS threaded holes as required; gasketed cover. 2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel with cover plate. BOXES SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 B. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger Than 12 Inches (300 mm) In any dimension: Hinged cover enclosures. C. Cast metal Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations: NEMA 250; Type 4 and Type 8, fiat - flanged, surface- mounted Junction box, UL listed as ralntlght. Cast aluminum box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. Provide traffic covers where applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets In Sales Floor fixtures with Owner's flxturing and electrical drawings prior to rough -In. C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation Is inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Section 08305. D. Locate and Install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. 3.02 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Do not Install boxes back -to -back In walls, Provide minimum 8 Inch separation. B. Locate boxes In masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. D. Support boxes Independently of conduit except for cast boxes that are connected to two rigid metal Conduits, both supported within 12 Inches of box. E. Use multiple -gang boxes where two or more devices are mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. F. Install boxes In walls without damaging wall Insulation. 16130 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T 7827 >TARGET..ST.ORES G. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of.' Outlets', mounted above counters,, benches, backsplashes, and•slmllar fixtures: H: Position outlets with respect to.;,Iuminalre :Iooations showm on refleoted Gelling plans. . Inacoesslble ceiling areas,, position outlets and Junotlon boxes;,wlthln 8 Inches • 'of' reoessed • tobe' accessible through °.luminaire celling opening. J. Provide recessed outlet' boxes In finished :areas; securo boxes to Interior wall and partltlon _ accurately position to . :. surface 'finish Use stamped steel stud `bridges for flush outlets -In', hollow stud wall, and`adJustable steel channel fastehers for flush ceiling outlet boxes. K ''AIIgn ' wall- mounted outlet boxes. :forswltches; and's'imi Iar'`devlces plumb and :true with building lines. L: Provldeast outlet boxes. In ,exterlor I ocat l onv and wet`'l goat l ons : ._3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A Locate pull -boxes and ,,Junotlon,: boxes. above, acoess'ible"ce"Ilings `or.In unfinished a • B :' :Support - pull and Junction boxes:' Independent of conduit END :,OF : SECTION 18130 2 B OXE TARGET STORES SECTION 18141 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wail switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and box covers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS W -C -598 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet. B. FS W -S -896 - Switch, Toggle. C. NEMA WD 1 - General- Purpose Wiring Devices. D. NEMA WD 5 - Specific- Purpose Wiring Devices. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's Instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Harvey Hubbell, Inc. B. Pass & Seymour, Inc. C. Slater Electric, Inc. O. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 WALL SWITCHES A. Wall switches for Lighting Circuits: FS W -S- 898; AC specification grade quiet snap switch with toggle handle, rated 20 amperes at 120 or 277 volts AC. Handle: Dark Gray. B. Pilot Light Type: Clear lighted toggle. 2.03 RECEPTACLES A. Convenience and Straight -blade Receptacles: FSW- C -598. B. Locking -Blade Receptaoles: NEMA WD 5. C. Convenience Receptacle Conflguratlon: NEMA Type 5- 20R, dark gray face. 0. Specific -use Receptacle Conflguratlon: NEMA WO 1 or WD 5; type as Indicated on Drawings, WIRING DEVICES SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 dark gray plastic face. (Specific -use receptacles are those Indicated on Drawings for use with designated equipment.) E. GFI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with Integral ground fault current Interrupter. F. Network and EPOS Receptacles: Duplex receptacle, NEMA Type 5 -20R, dark gray In color, for use on computer systems. 2.04 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Dark Gray Plastic. B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers. C. Utility Cover Plate: Stamped galvanized steel. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Install wall switches 48 Inches above floor, OFF position down. B. Install convenlence receptacles 18 Inches above floor, 4 Inches above backsplash, center Ilne 'dimension, grounding pole on bottom, unless otherwlse noted on Drawings. C. Install specific -use receptacles at heights shown on Drawings. D. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and dark gray blank outlets In finished areas. E. Install weatherproof plates where exposed to weather and otherwise as Indicated. F. Install utility plates on surface mounted outlet boxes and Junction boxes In unfinished areas and above accessible callings. G. Align devices and covers plumb and true with building lines, flush with walls, frames, floors and ceilings. H. Device plates shall cover entire wall opening. END OF SECTION 16141 -1 TARGET STORES SECTION 16180 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR 2.02 CRIMP -ON TERMINALS 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 1.02 RELATED WORK PART 1 - GENERAL A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections, B. Electrical connections to Owner - supplied equipment. A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: General requirements for Owner - supplied equipment. B. Owner will furnish line voltage thermostats for Installation under this section, as specified In Section 15950 - Controls and Instrumentation, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied Information. C. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable 1.03 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 5 - Specific- Purpose Wiring Devices. B. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field verify equipment rating with manufacturer's nameplate data. Adjust feeds, fuses or overcurrent protectors as required to comply with code requirements. 2.01 LUGS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. lisco 2. Teledyne Penn -Union 3. Burndy Corporation B. Compression Type: Seamless, one - piece, copper; size for conductor applied to. C. Connections to Set Screw Lugs: Pin type compression fittings for use on conductor sizes *2 AWG and larger with barrels filled with conductive paste. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP Dlstrlbutor Industries 2. 3M Company 3. Thomas -Betts 8. Crimp on Insulated for conductor ranging *14 thru *10 AWG, flanged fork or ring tongue style. 2.03 CONNECTORS, SPLICES & TAPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP Distributor Industries 2. OZ Gedney 3. ILSCO 4. Burndy B. Compression or set screw type, insulating cover for use on conductor sizes *8 AWG and smaller. C. Compression type or split bolt connectors with Insulating covers. for conductor sizes *6 AWG and larger. 2.04 WIRE CONNECTORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. AMP Dlstrlbutor Industries 2. Ideal Industries 3. 3M Company B. Conical spring type with plastic or nylon Insulating outer shell, color coded to denote wire size, for conductor sizes *14 through *10 AWG. C. Butt compression style insulating crimp splices for conductors smaller than *14 AWG. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Bus Connection: Use compression lugs, bolt to bus bars using cap screws, lock washers and nuts of material electrically compatible with bus, for connections to switchboard and main distribution panelboards only. B. Set Screw Lug Connection: Install pin type compression fitting of similar construction as compression lugs. C. Terminations to Motors: Use crimp -on connectors for motor terminations from stranded conductors and where terminal Tugs are not provided at connection point. Use ring- tongue terminals wherever possible. 16180 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 D. Use crimping tool suppl,led,by manufacturer. of connector to Install on conductor Do not remove conductor strands or over -slze terminatore Apply - Insuiat;ing`.tape over exposed conductor surfaces to 150% of the conductor Insulating material E. Strip conductor Insulation as'presoribed by the manufacturer of the terminator. Use conduct ive ' paste ' ° where '''.'requ l red for diseimilar materials or."'as recommended by the manufacturer.: ' TARGET STORES 1818o- i EI CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMEN F Tighten :oonneCtIone' ensure surface contact between terminals'. TARGET STORES SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Fastening hardware. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: General requirements for Owner - supplied equipment. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry C. Section 09900 - Painting. Devices exposed In publlo areas. D. Section 16111 - Conduit E. Section 18440 - Disconnect Switches F. Section 16481 - Dry Type Transformers G. Section 16470 - Panelboards H. Section 16510 - Lighting Fixtures 1. Section 18741 - Telephone Raceway System 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with Section 03300 - Cast-in- Place Concrete. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry. 1.05 REFERENCES A. APA, "American Plywood Association ". B. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT CHANNELS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Beeline 2. Klndorf 3. Unlstrut 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 B.;12 gauge galvanized or painted steel, "U" section, 1 -1/2" square nominal In section. C. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to support equipment. Provide corrosion resistant finish. D. Threaded Rod: Zino plated steel, 3/8" dia. minimum, sized to support load required with safety factor of 2. 2.02 BACKBOARDS A. Plywood Boards: APA C -0 or C -D Plugged, Group 2, Exposure 1. Provide fire retardant treated material, pressure Impregnated with Osmose "Flameproof" or Koppers "NON -COM ", and bearing a UL label indicating fire hazard classification of 25 or less, or an FR -S Classification. 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and Junction boxes to building structure using bolts, beam clamps, and spring steel clips. B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners In hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors In solid masonry walls; self - drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws In wood construction. C. Do not secure materials to architectural wall panel system except at steel studs as approved by architect. 0. DO NOT FASTEN SUPPORTS TO PIPING, DUCTWORK, MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, OTHER CONDUIT, OR ROOF DECK. E. Do not use powder- actuated anchors. F. Do not drill through structural framing members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. H. Install free- standing electrical equipment on concrete pads four Inches high and overlapping equipment footprint by two Inches on all sides. I . Install surface - mounted cabinets and panelboarde with minimum of four anchors. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 ''TARGET STORES Provide steel channel 'supports' to stand cabinet :one Inch' ,off 'wall, or.on'3 /4 Inch ' :plywood backboards. J. Install, plywood backboards over`gypsua board or'direotly, 'to stud fra.Ing :as Indicated. Fasten to studs With screws according to APA recommendations. • K Bridge` studs top and bottom with channels to support flush - mounted cabinets and • panelboards In stud walls. L. Support equipment and ,flxtures.fron the top ohord,of;bar,Jolsts: :Connect hanger at bar Joist top chord panel' potnt;:.that Is, the point:.at, which: the : .vertical or. angular member`of bar`Jolet` Is .attached:.to the top chord Pro'vIde steel'. channels.' to. span between Joists to locate hangers' properly. Nots::,;DO'NOT support equipment, conduit, or flxtur:es from the roof. deck. M. Locate panel paint loads . at , least 8 ; feet from any other panel point load on tha'same Jolst: Note:, "DO NOT exceed a maximum allowable load of8il`_ib:.to' any Joist panel point. ' 16190- END. OF SECTION ;., UPPORT.INR``.DEVIGES;: 1' 5 TARGET STORES SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Nameplates B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit color coding. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09900 - Painting B. Section 16111 - Conduit C. Section 18120 - Wire and Cable D. Section 18130 - Boxes E. Section 16440 - Disconnect Switches F. Section 18461 - Dry Type Transformers G. Section 16470 - Paneiboards H. Section 16480 - Motor Control 1. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm Devices 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels. 2.01 MATERIALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS , A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic white letters on a black background for equipment on normal utility power system; white letters on a red background for equipment on emergency or standby power system. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, spilt sleeve or tubing type. C. Tape„ 3/4" wide vinyl adhesive backed marking tape, color as specified herein. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure nameplate to dead -front barrier recessed panelboards In finished locations. D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor In panolboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and Junction boxes, and at Toad connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as Indicated on schematic and Interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 3.03 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads served. Letter Height: 1/8 inch for Individual switches and Toads served, 1/4 Inch for distribution and control equipment Identification, 3.04 COLOR CODING A. Use colored tape to Identify systems In conduit and outlet box Interior as follows: System Des! nation Tape Color Fire Alarm Red Telephone Blue EPOS and Network Orange Security Yellow Television Distribution Green Temperature Control White 1. Install tape In 3 Inch bands at each end of conduit. 2. Apply two stripes of tape within each outlet box for low voltage systems. B. Paint fire alarm. system Junction and pull boxes red. END OF SECTION 16195 -1 L L 1: . r i TARGET STORES SECTION 18440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Disconnect switches B. Fuses C. Enclosures 1.02 REFERENCES A. UL 198C - High - Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types. B. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 1.03 SUBMITTALS B. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and short circuit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Square 0 2. General Electric 3. Westinghouse 4. Allen Bradley 5. Substitutions: Under . provisions of Section 01600. B. Fusible Switch Assemblies: Horsepower rated, heavy duty type; quick -make, quick - break, load Interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses only and reject all others. C. Nonfuslble Switch Assemblies: Horsepower rated, heavy duty type; quick -make, quick - break, load Interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle Interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch In ON position. Handle lockable In OFF position. D. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; Type 1 for Interior and type 3R for exterior. locations. 2.02 FUSES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bussmann 2. Gould- Shawmutt SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 B. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: UL 198E, Class RK5 sized as indicated on Drawings. C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rus amperes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings and required by governing codes. B. Install fuses in fusible disconneot switches. A. Submit produot data under provisions of END OF SECTION Section 01300. DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440 -1 TARGET STORES SECTION 16450 - SECONDARY GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Power system grounding. B. Telephone system grounding. C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ground each separately- derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe or nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member. B. Provide communications system grounding. Connect to nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member. C. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non- ourrent- carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor In raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems. D. Provide continuous green ground wire to receptacle ground lug for outlets serving CRT'S. 2.01 MATERIALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Ground Clamp: Water pipe connection, bronze two piece with serrated Jaws,, lug sized for grounding electrode conductor. B. Connectors, Compression Type: Bronze or copper, pretreated with conductive paste, sized for conductors to which applied. C. Connectors, Exothermio Weld Type: Powder actuated weld. Bond made through exothermic reaction producing molten copper from premixed copper oxide and aluminum powder. Form bond In mold or crucible. 3.01 INSTALLATION SECONDARY GROUNDING PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Provide a separate, Insulated equipment grounding conductor In feeder circuits and branch circuits serving CRT'S. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing SOUTHCENTER SR /00 T -627 B. Use minimum 8 AWG copper conductor for communications grounding. Leave 10 feet slack conductor at telephone terminal board. C. CRT Receptacle Systems: Use dedicated Insulated green equipment grounding conductor and connect between panelboard ground bus and green lug on receptacle chassis. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper Installation. END OF SECTION TARGET STORES SECTION 16461 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Dry type two winding transformers. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16111 - Conduit B. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. C. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices D. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification E. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding 1.03 REFERENCES A. NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, KVA, and Impedance ratings and characteristics, loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, sound level, tap configurations, Insulation system type, and rated temperature rise. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store in a warm, dry location with uniform temperature. Cover ventilating openings to keep out dust. C. Handle transformers using only lifting eyes and brackets provided for that purpose. Protect units against entrance of rain, sleet, or snow If handled In inclement weather. DRY`TYPE.TRANSFORMERS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. B. C. 0, PART 2 - PRODUCTS Westinghouse - Type DT Sorge) - Type SO General Electric - Type QL Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 DRY TYPE TWO WINDING TRANSFORMERS A. Dry Type Transformers: NEMA ST 20; factory - assembled, air cooled dry type transformers; ratings as scheduled on the Drawings. B. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated KVA as follows: Rating Class Rise (Degree C) 1 -15 185 115 16 -75 220 150 C. Case temperature shall not exceed 40 degrees C rise above ambient at Its warmest point. D. Winding Taps - Transformers 15 KVA and Larger: Two at 2.5% FCAN; four at 2.5% FCBN. E. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. F. Basic Impulse Level: 10 KV. SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 G. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap. H. Mounting: Transformers shall be suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting. 1. Coll Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded. J. Enclosure: NEMA. ST 20; Type 1. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. K. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration - absorbing mounts. L. Nameplate: include transformer connection data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set transformer plumb and level. B. Use flexible conduit, 2 ft minimum length, for connections to transformer case.' Make condult connections to side panel of enclosure. 16481 -1 C. Use vibration_, Isolating, pads to Isolate transformer from building structure. D. Provide seism IC restraints where..requl'red by local codes. 3,02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. A: Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer. B. Measure primary and secondary voltages . and make appropriate tap adjustments. "' TARGET STORES SECTION 18470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED PANELBOARDS A. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. B. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. C. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. D. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. B. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. C. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide panelboards of sizes and type, with overcurrent protective devices and contactors as scheduled on Drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data for equipment and component devices under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampaclty, Integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. 1.08 SPARE PARTS A. Keys: Furnish keys to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 120/208 V 3 P . 4W 277/480 V 3 P . 4W 1. General Electric. A4 AE 2. Square D HOD NEHB 3. Westinghouse.POW -R -LINE 1..POW -R -LINE 2 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type. C. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1. D. Cabinet Size: Nominal 6 Inches deep, 22 Inches wide. E. Provide cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed continuous piano hinges, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish In manufacturer's standard gray enamel. Refer to drawings for mounting type. F. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide copper ground bus In all panelboards. G. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards. H. Molded Case Clrcult Breakers: NEMA AB 1; bolt -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate wall construction for flush mount panelboards with other trades to ensure proper wall thickness and framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Panelboard schedules are shown on Drawings. B. Install panelboards plumb In conformance with NEMA PB 1.1. C. Height: 8'6" to top of panelboard. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces In panelboards. 16470 -1 SOUTNCENTER SR /00 T -827 E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit,. panelboard: Indloate.load types and areas served using Owner's room designations.. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. • F.::Stub 2 empty one inch conduits to accessible ::IOoatIon above ceiling out of each recessed : panelboard. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY:CONTROL y. : A : Measure. steady,statoload., currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the - difference at. any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange oircults In•pane) board to ;:balance the phase Toads withim 20 percent. Maintain proper phasing for :multi -wire. branch circuits. 8. Visual and Mechanical inspection: Inspect for.: physical ..damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and .tlghtness of ,connections ..for cIIrcult: breakers, :fusible switches, and fuses. ';1 END.OF SECTION... TARGET STORES ELBOARO i TARGET STORES SECTION 18480 - MOTOR CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Manual motor starters. B. Magnetic motor starters. C. Combination magnetic motor starters. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: General requirements for Owner - supplied equipment. B. Section 11425 - Ventilation Equipment, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied information. C. Section 15780 - Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Equipment, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner - Supplied Information. D. Section 15850 - Air Handling Equipment. E. Section 16111 - Conduit F. Section 16180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. G. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. H. Section 16195 - Electrical identification. 1. Section 18440 - Disconnect Switches. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. B. NEMA ICS -6 - Enclosures for industrial Controls and Systems. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. E. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe installation Operation and Maintenance of Paneiboards Rated 600 Volts or less. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide product data on motor starters and combination motor starters, relays, pilot SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 devices, and switching and overcurrent protective devices. C. Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. E. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store In a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MOTOR STARTERS A. Allen Bradley B. General Electric C. Square D D. Westinghouse E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general- purpose Class A manually operated, 1 or 2 pole, full- voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and toggle operator. B. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 8; Type 1B. 2.03 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS A. Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2; AC general- purpose Class A magnetic controller for Induction motors rated In horsepower. B. Full Voltage Starting: Non - reversing type. C. Coll Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. D. Size: NEMA ICS 2; size as shown on Drawings. E. Control Transformer: Integral with starter, providing 120 volt control power. MOTOR CONTROL 18480 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 TARGET STORES F. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; bimetal. G. Control Device: Hand -Off -Auto selector switch, spring return to : "OFF" from hand position. If Indicated, provide "ON -OFF" pushbutton, mounted In cover. H. Indicator Lights: Red Jewel pilot light on cover, illuminated while motor Is running. I. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 for interior use and Type 3R where subject to moisture or on building exterior. J. Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with fusible switch disconnect In common enclosure. K. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; two field convertible contacts In addition to seal -in contact. 2.04 FUSES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bussmann 2. Gould - Shawmutt B. Fuses: UL 198E, Class RK5; dual element, current limiting, time delay, .one -time fuse, 600 volt or 250 volt as Indicated on the Drawings. C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes. 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to motor and equipment schedule on Drawings for. Items, requiring motgr.control equipment. 16480 -2 PART 3 - EXECUTION B. Install motor control equipment In accordance with manufacturer's Instructions. C. Install fuses In fusible switches. 0. Select and install heater elements In motor starters to match Installed motor characteristics. E. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label Inside each motor starter enclosure door Identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage /phase rating. F. Provide nameplate on each starter Indicating motor served. END OF SECTION TARGET STORES SECTION 18510 - LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Exterior luminaires and accessories. C. Lamps. D. Ballasts. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Callings. B. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of fixtures. D. Section 18111 - Conduit E. Section 18112 - Surface Raceways F. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable G. Section 16130 - Boxes H. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI C82.1 - Specification for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. B. ANSI C82.4 Specifications for High - Intensity- Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple Supply Type.) C. NEMA LE 2 - H -I -D Lighting System Noise Criterion (LS -NC) Ratings. D. UL 57 - Electric Lighting Fixtures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include outline drawings, Tamp and ballast data, support points, weights, and accessory Information for each luminaire type, C. Submit manufacturer's installation Instructions under provisions of Section 01300. LIGHTING FIXTURES 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2.03 LAMPS PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 A. Provide lighting fixtures and power equipment with UL ratings and labels complying with UL 57. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01800. B. Receive and store Owner supplied equipment and protect against damage under provision of Section 01600. 2.01 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. Lighting Fixtures: Provide type and quantity of lighting fixtures Indicated on the drawings. B. Fluorescent Luminaires: Provide with hinged door frames and positive acting spring- loaded latches. Provide doors capable of latching from either side, field convertible. Provide lenses where Indicated of 100 percent virgin acrylic, 0.125 Inch thick. C. Recessed Fluorescent Luminaires: Provide trim type and accessories required for installation In ceiling system Installed. D. Exit Signs: Stencil face, 6 Inch high red letters, directional arrows as indicated, universal mounting, type as Indicated. E. HID Luminaires: Pre- wired, with integral ballast. 2.02 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. Enclosures: Complete with gaskets to form weatherproof assembly. B. Provide low temperature ballasts, rated for use at temperatures to -20 degrees F for exterior locations. A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Philips 2. Sylvania 3. General Electric 4. OSRAM (HID Only) 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Provide lamps for luminaires and lampholders. 18510 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -827 C. Fluorescent Lamps: Lamp color as shown on Drawings, all by same manufacturer. D. HID Lamps: Lamp color, burning position, and type as shown on Drawings. 2.04 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Advance 2. Universal 3. Substitutions under Section 01600. B. ANSI C82.1; high power factor type. Use low energy type where possible with lowest noise criteria available for the type. C. Provide ballasts with Class P thermal protection. 2.05 HID BALLASTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Advance 2. General Electric 3. Universal B. HID Ballast: ANSI C82.4; selected by luminalre manufacturer. C. LS -NC Rating: NEMA LE 2; equal to or less than ratings listed In Table C -1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 16510 -2 provisions of A. Install lamps in fixtures. B. Support surface- mounted luminaires directly from building structure, from ceiling grid T structure or provide auxiliary support laid across top of ceiling T's as required by fixture weight or size. Fasten to T using bolts, screws, rivets, or approved ceiling framing member clips. Verify T's will support fixture weight. Refer to Drawings for additional mounting requirements. C. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. Install seismic grid olips, where required by local code. Do not Impair the lift -out feature of lay -In ceilings. Do not cut ceiling T's without specific permission from OSR. D. HID Luminaires: Provide safety chain between ballast and structure and between reflector and ballast. for Industrial type luminaires. Install shielding provided by manufaoturer or where required by code or lamp manufacturer. 3.02 FIELD PAINTING END OF SECTION TARGET STORES A. Refer to Drawings for fixtures to be field painted according to requirements of Section 09900. 3.03 RELAMPING AND CLEANING A. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work. Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from Installed luminaires. B. Touch up luminalre at completion of. work. 3.04 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. As shown on Drawings. LIGHTING FIXTURES TARGET STORES SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Duct smoke detectors. B. Interface between fire protection system and exterior alarm device. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15780 - Packaged Rooftop Equipment, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner- Supplied Information. B. Section 15950 - Controls and Instrumentation, Included for reference under Section 00215, Owner- Supplied Information. C. Section 15300 - Fire Protection System. D. Section 18111 - Conduit. E. Section 18120 - Wire and Cable. F. Section 18130 - Boxes. G. Section 18180 - Electrical Connections for Equipment. H. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification I. Section 16480 - Motor Control 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide self - contained, 120 volt, duct mounted, products of combustion detectors. B. System Is designed to operate'as follows: 1. Upon sensing products of combustion In the air stream of HVAC system, duot detectors shall Interrupt control power circuit of rooftop unit causing unit shut down. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Installation subject to approval, inspection, and test of local fire department. B. Provide equipment listed by NFPA, UL and FM. 1.05 REFERENCES A. FM, "Approval Guide - Equipment, Materials, Services for Conservation of Property". B. NFPA, "National Fire Protection Agenoy ". FIRE ALARM DEVICES SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -827 C. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's Installation Instructions under provisions of Section 01300. C. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data under provisions of Section 01700. D. Have manufacturer submit, upon completion of system verification, a point -by- point check list Indicating the date and time of the inspection and unit performance and issue a certificate confirming that Inspection has been completed and system 1s Installed and functioning In accordance with the contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Gamewell B. Pyr- a -larm C. Simplex Time Recorder Company D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01800. 2.02 DUCT MOUNTED PRODUCTS OF COMBUSTION DETECTORS A. General: Provide self- contained units capable of detecting products of combustion without requirements for presence of heat or smoke, unaffected by changes in environmental temperature, humidity, and pressure, which have a field adjustable sensitivity measuring facility, surface mounted, 2 - N.O. and 2 - N.C. alarm . contacts, with duct casting and sampling tubes, designed for operation on 120 volts, design and function based on dual chamber principle. Provide sampling tubes of length required to sample full width of air handling duct. B. Reset Feature: Provide detectors designed so that disconnecting and reestablishing power to the 120 volt power supply will reset the contacts to their normal position. 18721 -1 SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install detector power and control,:wir.ing ln conduit.: B. Minimum WIre No. 14 AWG gage copper for control, No 12..AWG gage copper'for power Circuits, - Or: � as,ahown on Drawings. Owner's Controls Contractor. will make connection from detector contaote,to rooftop . unit control panel ,and.from the detector contacts to the Interface .control module (ICM)`of the. energy, management system. FIELD:QUALITY CONTROL A,. Contraotor provide servlces of factory ' to make:a thorough inspection of: ; the complete Installed duct smoke !detector systems including all components, and controls, to ensure the following: 1. Complete `and.funotional,system. 2. UL and FM requlreients: Installed In accordance, manufacturer'el nstructlons. ., END, OF SECTION TARGET STORES SECTION 16741 - TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Telephone raceway system. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09900 - Painting B. Section 18111 - Condult C. Section 16130 - Boxes D. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices E. Section 18195 - Electrical Identification F. Section 16450 - Secondary Grounding 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Conduit, terminal boards, underfloor duct, and outlets to form empty raceway system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Condult: Refer to Section 18111. B. Backboards: Walls In room are plywood. Refer to Section 16190 for additional product requirements. C. Outlet Boxes, Pull and Junction Boxes, and Floor Boxes: Refer to Section 18130. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION' A. Provide pullboxes In telephone condult.runs spaced not greater. than 100 ft apart,'(where conduit system Is required) and on backboard side of runs wlth more than two right angle bends. B. Place "TELEPHONE" label on pull and Junction boxes. C. Provide puliwire In each telephone conduit run. D. Provide duplex receptacles In the telephone equlpment room. Confirm location on Jobsite prior to Installation. Comply with Installation requirements of Section 18190. SOUTHCENTER SR /D0 T -627 E. Provide *6 AWG bare copper grounding conductor from effectively grounded bullding structural member to a ground bushing Installed above floor slab In telephone room. END OF SECTION TARGET STORES SECTION 16892 - ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Electric hand dryers 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEC, "National Electric Code ", NFPA -70. B. UL, "Building Materials Directory ". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and operating Instructions and manuals In accordance with Section 01300. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. World Dryer Corporation: No. NR -216; recessed. 2.02 HAND DRYERS A. Electrical Characteristics: Entire unit Internally grounded and connected to system ground, designed for operation on 208 volts, single phase, two wire circuitry. B. Heating Elements: Not less than 2000 watts, proteoted by automatic resetting circuit breakers which open when air .flow Is cut off and close when air flow Is resumed. C. Motor: Universal type, 1/10 HP, with resilient mounting, sealed and lubricated ball bearings, and protected" by a properly sized UL Class G fuse or thermal overload. D. Fan: Delivering at least 140 CFM at discharge end of nozzle and mounted directly to motor shaft. Insulate fan and motor from remainder of dryer with rubber resilient mounting. E. Switch: Proximity sensor activated; fully automatic. F. Dryers: One piece tamperproof cast metal enclosure with revolving metal air nozzle having metal vanes, a metal pushbutton, a tamperproof metal grille protecting the air Intake opening, and necessary accessories. 1. Include manufacturer's wall box where recessed installation Is required. ELECTRICAL HAND DRYERS 2. Finish: White porcelain enamel or epoxy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install dryers as recommended by manufacturer. B. Install dryers at Junction boxes Indicated with mounting heights as Indicated. When no mounting height Is Indicated, Install at height recommended by manufacturer for each specific area and type of use. C. Install recessed dryers In wall boxes. END OF SECTION SOUTHCENTER SR /DO T -627 16892 -1 PLA6tic 'LAM. • , „„.. FIN; sHavise;- 0N CbLOF PRoVIDE. WO," IN WALL stikw,i'scg P..„.,Si„fbaLOw sWiTcHsa`- .14 REMAIN , COL. CUsie) Es/4bE TQ REMAIN WW6KM. FXPosera REMOVE IsALANC4 FL, TO 1?FtAN LJtftJc1 FL.. F.O. - • , I , 0 0 m min ras ..'' . . „:, - pRE -1 viousL,sp.,,„,, ,o,,,,,E,. OR E1 : HAFOWARE OROUP AS .. FOLLow6 : -'' S,.PA11, eiutT_,, 1 cookoNATofk .t\ i iNu FLUSHeiour I 1 ' , N7 iNtispRei.L. SMOKE DETEc,.-edir..=-Aivo Hol_011R.' RISLII.A5a. 1. STAKE 2 ARNfoR.eLATE,5,. ,,,_ p,ocam,FROTE.C10K$ 11 1 5 ter: w ; vTRIM 5f4R, 1 LocicSET,,_ LAV NIO ER HALE 8314.- 6PLGIA .,, ininiiingieal 9 HANOLE \ APP'ROVEt, FOR 14c, WeE. ,• , 'NOTE _,_. .,. , , NsTALLp oil HAIRONAKG GIROUP iNc Att•ov,s, ' NOT VICRIPI 0 - CoNTRACToR. , .1 MOTIF)! AIRCHItgCt or ANY 1 'Ab-lit•Ulli.T pa9i.eviri6Ns 3 /4J I soLoo cogs Woop 000R UNI.SISS NPYMO OtHEIRWISE HK 1 T, PAI R SoLiO C,ORai.jo, oPaNiNG 110.0,1 118 -ANY' PAstoi WORK OR ALTERATIoNs Rgnop FoR 11-11a 4ALL ge.quIREs TYPS G-,%1 CLoSET SLIRF/4:ca 1•11 H,41.14.1 F.E. L. EQUIP. 11'6 x4 :1 Aar r) 6 'A LApoe,R To REMAIN 7 11/441 ■4 I III 11 ILIN CORRIDOR see eLlic. DsWol. --= c) 4 c 1 I A .4 FOIL EXTliA MET _o _s I 1 ot 1 STUD FtacqUIlkOMOtoiT6 1/41 li f THIS 1.4^1..1. . , Ramovaexivr; ' To 64 64.4 e‘,14 N ° A 0 b m A p l . * . 5L . O 1,2.. PE ON. Note: FoR. P. sem OMT, 11./A2. L1Yer" -gm To REMAIN kuISFa. IN P.gc00, To 4" Arbove oPPICE, leis .. • .... N... ,, ... ...it -, ,,, . ,,, ,.. i .: ir Eta." , _,.,.., - im , . pm IN : .,...,,,! 1 im , m:,:, um , IM EINE •••..;;,•.. - MI '..' -. - -111111111111111111. , ‘Ifil ii 'Ill 01 CI 6 Mi Ertir ,.. -- ti FPA aii1111111111111111111 moollwillagi iwil .-=L, ' ' l as11°61 , 113 . '. Ima131111114KEI Erin .. ,-„, am 1 ii gpai .111111 : '° NM III iiimilm■;iimammi 6.111 , 0 . • . Fr . 6 4s1 .: i ;:... e . MI 41 ' r6 111111111/1. 1111;1 :11111;.!iiii IIIII..i1,411111110.141111111:11 114!IIIIIII111111111111111.1 1 1 1 1111111111 .1ill i!ji ,,,,i-km i. 1111ffl'imiiiimin „...,....11 Imo '''o 5 ..i. 1 11.01. m a El ,, • , :f..c , in min 0 'MIN I . . ,. .. . r . • , IIM WO 11 111M1111 al .. , ',.......dl . 1111111.111111111111 Ill I III IIIIIIMM NOTE: OWNER To rsovium SMOKE oNTECTOISS IN Accomp..A.Nom 1.47 Udb. c. seclioN 4395 ( excEPTION'S H.M. F14.4:ma 14.1A, FRAME, Ak•• UNLEggss NOTE t) OPE.H;NCIS 101 111 OTHER.WISe, 112. 113 111 122. 4 RAMP - Ft:21.114 11 0/40W WALL aSaLoW... ';11/411-114t. PARTITION . NAHO. 1,01 I . RaCEPTION u3 OFFIC.. L1 TEL UIP. PROVOS G.=14"DERP PLA57,ic LAM, FIN, P ON 3 'QF MST. SHe.'LP sTo, wALL 1:11.Rc•Olba wo. R$L.KG, .114 WALL As Rego, L001•10E. glofrieN cop.Ftir:i.oF4 GO4 KQOM 517 OPEN OrPICK. 14" SCRIBM TO WALLS TbrOICAL- o REMOVE W E.XIST, Ext. ALL te) ACCOMODATE 4o IRECEPTION 10 COAT CLO, emoye ets,:r Pfr%US OF 9 006 3, 9 ,41 Orgo WM4 aNied.e •F gR'Ayme. 13A , ringssiiistar Kxist) WI'SL.L 70 mAtdk--- „ VaRIFT. FIE '' E. CAe2IN . cpre6 --PA1C,H 01871)0%6E0 SURROUNO1NOI TO MATCH EXIST, - 1E di .•.0 • 0:1L E C ( C )'L Valk1F19°' t 4 LOCATION--- LOT11.10 102 gym A4.11 CPT, UNPtig • COliNrag REP0,10.(141( ye:111Fr 61%E. LOcAtION ' di4NER NOTE,S 'at rldf &F1/11- To„.4,0, tONTROL 4,eorr, OF 1IR NOT SS Tc)1Soi . R1 :110.e 4'114c4c, TO RICEIIVe. SAME Fitsj, As 11 Mk" ,. CPT, PE's 4 Dr ro P 1MAT o'CILUe PLACE, Gel; ebAss IN F49 :PoltoeR mAld - CPT-b OOU it,oFt0EIR bet- i.giotHs 6 KM. 51Z.E.; To rbe aPec, te2Y TARGET ortaiGNER v.1.1' 16 ,r1 VINYL - iZIft=oE. 8 CveRitxe) 4 WINTEFt �i LOtATE., FROM FRONT c•Fre:16UNTIER. astoois tO A:1'CH 6Ir P SIPARATION 4 1.0'04tioN or DR SEPARATE P ERMIT AND ,P PROVAL REQUIRED 1 •INr:)EX I:)RAWHINGS. VOININZAMMINIMIIIMMOMINIMMINI■ t*C+ ii)LAWS, aLivAtioius 4 SCHEIZIJLe5 AP4 c)ETAILs i tsc.Hilk.11C.As■ PLANS 4 scktoiji.es, E.LEtiTAlcAL rod•W‘ER, LIGHT $ sfaTams 'LAW „ , ELEc+iiitAL 'act4i0ULE,s 4 DETAILS E.I.EVAeTION .011 • V4 z L T., 1M. COI•Jc E L V. REVERSE 4. sNR 01.411.t 1. 3111•111IL DENOTES ISKIST. PARTITION RakiA114. 2, -- TrPICAls NSW loArictitioN sHALL. ess we ciT11, ebm SIDE OF G mat Atat p!t OM L. 1 4" ovia , UNLMS5.N.,TE0 Oti-15,11tWISE s. ,1 : 11, 5,,cRN:re . rgARTITIoN CoNFtuSTctiON. TrPe OTHSR tHP.:N a>klet. OR TrI Above -',58,11 4, r-oR. ApOtTiONAL.,iNFO„RtlATION ReGARpliZIG FINISH MATRIALS sea owNe.re'PROVICM1:1 FINISHES 'Olkt:101.-"ro I5E ISSUE.° AT A LATOR DATE g, FoR ObOS 14AROi4AkE. iNFL:Af4A7ioN SEE SPECIFICATIONS Co, FOR' T■JET.INI R.T.U. 6.1-1AilWiT FAN r „ , <5N ROOF 5E6 Mect4, ORWO _- Fog ROOF cURR, L5/froz FOR cvnquciothCAL.' SUP.POR'r, PRAMIN saa owl; 144/A2 . ii l.. ekREA O REMODBLIW Fi. P O OCCU0AkC ; 6•2 coN*tRuctio TYPE trtg!e, it=iN1 p.LLO FL. AR: UOLIMITEC• 1 4ft4 AFPRokietR 5 PAIN KLE.Ft , SYSTEM 40 AN, PUIbLIc WAifs oR YAii,os ON ALL SiOgs, AdTUAL. , , . . , IS 4,12.C. $4), FT, TOTAL occ. LoAo(itayi3E0): 2 Occ. ' •aTAL 0.54IT WIPTH•RaildiRED: 'TOTAL egIT 01r.)T H. 1 'VI cmr:t : 11. el 1011•Ricer OFFICE axitiNG: (oc41.ip6N Le:),,, a s 471 °cc.) 415FibaR exits Niet01111tio = 2 • 41.1PIER. EXITS PROVi0110 1 a 016% KEQUIRM0 IT Call:3TH Pfk04iOV) ,gI EX = 5 , occiiPANNCT 5MPARATIoN :.RiTAJL/oFFIGE irk ___ _ _____ e .10 ROPENZAENT 6. 4 1.110114 1.1AIIV5C01 47 V. W.C., AISOVE., As - , • Obl FL, pLAN. 4 PULL C,T. �S.1 PLWU.JG WALL VPI-W7 FILE COPY :. BIJILoRo CODE UNIFOR14, BuILOING, COOE, 1980 Ef1iiiorl lei (IOC) STATE 0 WASHINGTON APPLICABLE ODINANCES LOCAL *JURISgICITON toDE _ CITY OF To(WiLA LOCAL ORDINANCES wASNINGT STATE.NEGuL.ALION, FOR BARRIER FREE FActaTiES WORM ELCBIG C40E,IssiEDION (ett (ist) „ .kiLy )twsRern MEdiAAICAL CODE urironm utetLoaroL 400cisos ebritorl caa uuci WA94NDION STATE u4/4 mECHANICAL coot11991) PLUMBING EbE tjFORM 1 Paktia (991) 'OIRE 1LiFE SAFiTY CODE rt:Al WAsreNGTON SLATE UNIFORM (199) ELE L toot , t o torno t4190 „No t VATSZ oF LAB AND ImusTBLES. tT _ *ASHINGToN 5111E'ENEAGY COOE. 1991 EDITI•N / FOOD SERVICE wASHINGTON ava$ muo Itcu1/4?afts:Ot''NE tiAie Bono OF i l i A Vt:i1 F L!!9_ 3F1 COST O PUBL FOR OtO ESTABLISKILATS H AN GUIDE NORTN CITY'OF 'TUKWILA APPROVED stP,4t 19t'd RECtIVED erryornIKIMLA SEP 1 1:1991 PEtikiit CkNfiR LIT°61Plaritt.SIC:nsilheCectoelakjorIPProfapPrO:": are y a actor liaof n.§ aft knowledged. 81. Date"' ‘111;:lig • ip Patimft l li-L4,16711E1,11! f ; js fTritrpp • 41 51 No la 1 I 1 I II' I le I fg iwsIi $z, i,oam E I TINGI PERGOLA T■ REMAIN - PROTECT ALL SURFACES NEI.4 WORK VERIFY THAT MASONRY' COURSING( TIMIES OUT W7 R, ca. IDIMENE,ION GTR. OR. PRAM& HORI ZoNTALLy E ISTINcr FIN. FL. LINE 1 is EQUAL E L E VA .�� I ON 3/4" RIGID GOOpUIT -wQ * I2 C- A VERTICAL.. 1-14,1 4.1 WIRE e- ` 41 -O' ALQNG EACH MAIN RUNNER. EXIaNli• t IV 4urrDitT : (� FI APA/K1b Pq 't' aDI�aT Tor MINK (P poa►lr v 1 0 1 0 ) t a 11 . 11 11 11 �- 3/4 ,PAIN'" Ca,RAOR E IRCH OLJTSIOE TRIM SGR113e TO CLG.:. ' INTERIOR OF CAE►, SHALL bEr. MELAMINE MET. ADJ. SHELF STo.- SETINFLUSI wl C. PARTITION PROVItOE• SHELVES PER CAP•IN .T 34 PAINT OR4' E ... 5IRCH .DOOMS 4. HEAD, $ILL 4 JA.Me) PRIM P.NINT . TO MATCH. FILE. CAI$. (vERIFr) GYP, 60. I•JING WALL �E'T'OND aE.E FL. PLAN 51 M.e M5 12)14! L. is c& .LATERAL SUPPORT vviRl=S MItJ. '45 SPLAY WIRE BRACWJG IM PLANE OF MAID ALL WIRES ATTACHED TO MAIN RUt ►� ER: 4. DIRE;CTtUMs. LATERAL, RRp,CING'AT 12'0 C,.I1.1 o EACH f71REC`t'IG'I.l . EIR5'T SUPPc*& 45 ATED WIT( -- X11-.1 4' -d,?5F EACH • W LL,. r 1AI I RUNKItRe 4' d' O.C. JOIgT 4 6:4 x4 x5/ - FIEL.D vtieLp To •I''T5 #'�/k' PIL.I. T, '»J etge.m4eN J61 4T PANT. FY IN7i, toe tre iz7 , LEC& Ov ;R• JO 141' &I I:14 GS PANEL ` P4tNT5 — GONG, F1 s /1(,V3 0tritievE O ,F 1i1) C1IRb Velt4r1 v4 suPPL.I G `1 s/i a .rJ P HANDICAP SIC ■N 1'' S`I`L. PIPS, ROUNID ark sQuARE sk T' IN Cow c, Cw " a'f L p''IPE KILLED W7 GONG, (PAINT ` et,t,,(3IJ) MIEN PIPE EMIb .OME,NT INTO FTC' -1. '..y'b eat NO SCALE 4: r. • w, g SvP D ►ME NhION� I. I MOVE itOOFINes MAIL IN401.k1'10Iv 2 GE.Gg. AS teaulizoP Dr;CW To S►TE , PfAmE / sa'O PUPPL a P1 LD4 e4"04 EQUAL 2" ORSTO. G "' MF.:T. STUD uI 0 /6 11 di anYP. RAP, ON IbOTM SIDES, EKTgNO. ASSEME3L:1" FEQM . "'PQ i'59/QAF.2. �JEGIi AP.�OVr�. SEE FL t91±T. 4, L 1 /A'i Fc,R CONN To STR,UCTUR.AL MEMIe,E KER MET. TUrtos:, S,8 i'r1 w/'� C1's''I?, P.SD. N �or 4 pl S 4 SA NCO �► iO IN &LJ4 » , EXTtrNp ASSEMItsLT' FROM FL. Y0 61;n Ae3QVE C1-0, I.A`I 3'/2' OF IN oC A. o P+� RTI 4Lo oNE E LI $i T'El o ov R TUP OF PAI rtirioN PARTI'T'ION 1-*T-FDE5 Gyp, 8ORPIT SEE SIM, 0E7, e AL.L E .XPO5g4 . ►U tFAcE, SMALL FEE PLAS'4'IC LAM. INTERIOR QIs CAS. SRALL fie~ Mi'LLAMINIE 7 3/411 WO. ,ACK SPLAStf pfYQNT P'7 PLASTIC LAMINATE' FIN. ,ON ALL EXPosEO ` SU RP.NcES .� I /q•" NO. I' A w K P N L KINGER PULL C/4 Rour.o). INTERIOR OF CAE), DRAWER SMALL 16E MELAMINE, -- MET At J. HELP, STD, 5ET IN : FLUSH . GA13. PARTI'T'ION a' MET.. 5 7 5 %8 11 .: 01%r f3rJ ON : IbOTH 5,IoE.s, • SOUND ATTENUATION IW UL,- EXTENa A5SEMI3L'I° FROM FL, To R k3ECI4 Ae►OV - SEE ' OET L3/A2 ' 14 /A2 ' Fo • CONNECTION TO STRUCTURAL NIeMesarz. 4 FRAIvItNG Ls 4'A4"l /IG!, (E.L..TOP OF FRAMs tk, Ls SAME AS EL TOP OF SUPP6RT.) 4 CLIP 5'4.5 ",$5i,I; so =5" C4 ABOVE. 'IORAMiw6 A•r 'PAWet. Path -r4 114%5 4- MAC 6E OM 1TTED. Note: I: $ : ME g 4ALL. I5E 5140P WELDED M ONE. ' ' ()NIT w/ AROUN t3 ALL r VJELQ T15L O / 1� ..t)I =0 'O GON'I'AC"C'S � � S UPPcoS - r M rvl13ER', w/ si FILLET WILD ALL AROU1.49. 2. V I IF' OP r11 P • s E L.00AT W MC 4 4r,c.Y�► GON"f"' i� R ►OR; r'o �AI31ZeAIOir.I OPN , 5 .. EKI S'I'l.N G PERGOLA COL. ie,W'ONID W4" 671:). STCy.PI E RA (PAINT) - CHAMI=ER EMIE 0 TL S{ EEvE TO , ?RECEIVE` NANORAIL S ST I� 4 e`1,2 `o.G. ` E. W. - ' w' PLAWI'IC, . LAMINATE; SHELF ►^7 ROO BRACKET QLIP%N 1 urr (EQUALLY srAC E•Q ) A:3 rot,. L.O W S SPAN QUANTIT"I SHELF � CpAT RC�I� DET. II GROUT t�OLIQ; A li + F 3ELok NEW LAN (NCI iI AT SIM. CON°, GONG. $L.p e$ CUT'S VNYO EXT. WALL» w7., VI." E MATERIAL : q.ozo' L'� FILL.: FLU' a OF ' DECK 1IV/ �` METAL: rLvr PE :K PRoVIOE MEF Iit1+�N FLA wJ TEIRMINA'TIO CHAR SLNt EXTEND M3MKA► Eta UP WALL. l 4", , M 1 M', EXIST WALL A5SEM6 .Lir 1 I@eMAN •" PATCH To MATCH EXIST, AS '4' New CdiA o ftx /&" STL, pROVIOE H N, ou SEARING ON`t3O'H R O. SAW CUT LINE 0 p, MET, FLAGH'C,I I,4a E.L.EVATI OI1=FEReNCE i1 REE4E 1 ' ' 0 524.5A TNRFSHOLD OR EQ SET IN 13ED OF _s LANT NEW 5 E OE.T, � LANDING L' 1/At Yt -c Gsou'I` cAyt? r SOL' LL CONOI ION OPENING t)ET{.i 1 1 4 W. x PLYWrs, SEiCURIT",' I°L:ATFOIRM ON J; 2X " ` C0' W D. JsTS, l2." o.c, Wmh.I'S Q 24 o, Nsw c 4'In 4/h got, r 4» pRQvlt 5AW C U T OJ LO TH SIC3 S o!"`M,o, 70 ALL F MI N. :Ort:11 r3E . I N (AT SIM. JAMS GONG t � t SAME SIZE 4. Ta WA, W7 W' "� 4 � J ' EMISED t C 24 " o, c, - T N t� 4. To MEAD + W 'I° C " 1;3 ,.. —NEW C0i4'T', , . 51 M, 1 Rag°. 'r ALLOW FOR A % S SEALANT J•INT AT OR, FRAM&, PROVIOE SEALANT 50TH $TOES NEW KM. 00oPt, FRAME SAW CUTEXIST. CONC., 'WALL PANEL A'T' "' L. LINE ft. estNNO FL I.lSN amoOT4 Ext3'T; CILA�i 4 WALT,. I As5EMB1..'r EXt T, PARTITIONS PIROVII�E rJrDc.�� • ' bLi�C�+ As hiEQl? 1;. REMOVE EX!$t. WALL A5sEMe4.1' TO ACCOMOIaATE NZ(4 OR. I~"RAMI?. OWNs.K. SWPPLiM I 'TLI &JHT -:FL. u I II OWtslark �,. aUPPL' Ittp GU1213 ME' 1= lY.ASµING .. PAT As Rego, r?E S V uuI�.p.Iu Im IITl ,. . o�oncar Jupfl imaa,N.,p Tim. • •.I =rri i w...w°u O luaja 1 Uii, & aD. i5 11-16J1. I ME' ljf ,4- SEE Oii."r, 14/At 4 61/64. O NER $UPPL "IEO - CLAR t3AR I�411 ,tr P 11 ANORML N OR UN© -SHOWN CASK EO FOR ` CLARIT`I' f'AtCH :PAVEMkNT TO MIAHTI E)USTINc, - NOTE: coWc. SKALL .3,Qao Psi' (A.1R tieSIIKAINE1 lb ' "'AI C eh.1 I L f , # s�. GAR x 2Lo" LONG 12' c7.G. - CEIfl R LENGTH OF ; 13A$ ON CON,STRAJ CTION J'r• NOTE.: GONG, SHALL, ' BE 5 • (AIR EN`1'RAINW) RieiNhP1 P O ,TAIL NOTE: pp■1NT STRIPE. 4 G+I APN .I,G CoLORS 'O MATCh+ .>!�►1$ T 1°ROVIt7E NEW 1%. x16 .61(10 ', lNT IRtJA'rIONAL. $WMI LY. OF .ACCM5G ('. D) SEA I IE�: Qa 1 /A'L ' - I°AINT RL 5rMBOL STALL (1.-Rego.) IRI�.ING O N:CGTNT E Nkr IN ON f ACH pA �•I ' 'I' IP R E DIAGONAL. �4 °�'I`IQIwE S REMOVE axis"P'. II STRIPES OASHW 11 E IsTINci II so`t 1 I pi 11 To , :MAIN 111 � IL " 9 W uI Y�IYi. t`p��i��Pi"1 nil. ' I I�LL 161.1!:1 19, I Ig t 11111111111111111111111111111 5 No. t8 1 II I w3IT L S?'AGL APP' -o* 3 or z "GW C.t Y1'° £K/s1,AiG Z'4 c) 4.1. lllrc - g61 , 4oVi 1 5 r,NCa 60,5 L1Al AH/b VAWI i N %4T ?s• GAP GAS GUN6 Vii_ GAS/ DA'! r" 1.rEedi &. PACKAGED ROOFTOP ASR ' O D'IT ONING 'E UI MENT "CHEDUIE FAN DATA FIL "TCI? DAT lEAt ,r c;- DATA /z24- 1/AY-Z. VAY-I A44.u6t. A -Z4x 73.0 74x1. 300 "Zx; 6 UP .14-x /z. MIN gob" CURB, EER TYPE 16 /MI2` 8`.8 loo AREA . SERVED TRANSFER GRILLE ... io Z �,'A =Z4x4 MFF3 kNL) MODEL ' J•�C . GRLEi1F;C1. GB-120-4 TITUS TLIS TITUS 35ORL + REMARXS wd•a+i itl,, o Co Svflo4 it WA7QA iq ►D 2Vt# oft. /46?vi4L X 'POWER R 1 ITSF 1'YWI•IEEL f !p - SPEED (' we,)I tiI/. F F`1,1 t t/ ;37r) % 12' r4FR h, D T.E� "�u RISE" r I.L74 MOTEL NO , MAY,. `F • RECOVERY' L``(i :HI!4VA 5R(OOi; 6 O PPOSED BLADE 2x18 300 axis REMOTE, WATER SPECIFICAT ION) A-Z4xe. Ite`it It /2X 2 ! c i *ECCCRATE `GRID w%CFMN"IEL UORPER M PROVIDE SOUFRE -rD -ROUND ADAP TER •011 SALES FLOOR GRILLES 24 X ,24 MoDVLAR FULL-FACE DIFFUSER 'W ROUND; NECK' 21 X 24 11ODUL?R OIFf(CER W /12 X' 12 PANEL MMOI)NTED FACE, ROUND NECK .8 =s. z /0 WH -1 A�L4x , C •24714) 300 PLYWOOD LA.TFORM SIZE AS ' REOUtRED BEAMCL'AMPc ON TOP CHORD OF 'BAR JOIST, AT PANEL ` POINTS 2x2 VAV- 5 8: 8 NOX Ott I L* 14 1R 0 E JAv -1 YAV =2 468 gy t — �: "'`� TEMPERATURE " AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE, FULL SIZE --`� DISCHARGE TO I+LOOR 'D 114 IN T ooM /0 WATER HEA MOUNTEL ' CON TEP 3" , . ----. HIGH STEEL RING REMOTE WATER --- ('jOLER SEt: PRESS .` DROP ROOM S) , F (INCHES "WC) SERVED CFM NAt'IOICAPPED WALL NUNG 4" DOWN TfiRU FLOOR A . 'PLANFOP LOCATION OF GRILLES. REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS, SEE ARCH ' REFLECTED CEILING . B. FOR GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS SCHEOIJL.E. SEE SHEET cell. C. FLEXIBLE OTHERWISE `D UCTWORK SHALL BE SAME SIZE AS DIFFUSER NECK INDICATED, UNLESS NOTED 0. FOR EXACT LOCA TON OF SPRINKLER. HEADS REFER TO ARCN CEILING PLAN. E. PRQ "IDE SFPIhNKLER ; SHIELDING IN ALL ELECTRICAL EOUIPMENT ROOMS. F. SPRINKLER. SYSTEM SHALL ` DELIVER 0.10 GPM PER SO. FT. OVER 3000 SO. FT. OF FLOOR AREA WHILE ALLO'NINC 250 G PM FOR HOSE STREAMS, (I&5° HEADS) EXISTING SPRINKLERS SHALL REMAIN. �I'� I 6,I fI�I�I "I`i��`i1(�ii'ri�i►�Yltiirl ffL 1 9 9 I i�I"t9 lII(II�I tilii I� ttiii }ritT�l l 'IrIi I n�)filti�u„�Irlt5ktlrll� °art PROTOTYPE . PROJECT CODE DRAWMNGS I=UR EXACT L- OCAT1O1..15. one line diagram lighting plan power plan power system and lighting plans light fixture schedule equipment schedule